7SD52 en
7SD52 en
7SD52 en
Table of Contents v
SIPROTEC
Introduction 1
Functions 2
Differential Protection
7SD52 Installation and Commissioning 3
V4.2
Technical Data 4
Manual Appendix A
Index
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Liability statement Copyright
We have checked the contents of this manual against the Copyright © SIEMENS AG 2000; 2003. All rights reserved.
described hardware and software. Nevertheless, deviations Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or
may occur so that we cannot guarantee the entire harmony communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden without ex-
with the product. press authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All
The contents of this manual will be checked in periodical in- rights are reserved, especially in the event or grant of a patent or
registration of a utility model or design.
tervals, corrections will be made in the following editions.
We look forward to your suggestions for improvement.
Registered trademarks
We reserve the right to make technical improvements with-
SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM, and DIGSI are registered trade-
out notice.
marks of SIEMENS AG. Other names and terms can be trade-
4.20.03 marks the use of which may violate the rights of thirds.
Aim of This Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the
device. In particularly, you will find:
· Description of the device functions and setting facilities ® Chapter 2,
· Instruction for installation and commissioning ® Chapter 3,
· List of the technical data ® Chapter 4,
· As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the
Appendix.
General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC® devic-
es are laid down in the SIPROTEC® 4 system manual, order no. E50417–H1176–
C151.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, persons who are involved in setting,
testing and service of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation
personnel in electrical plants and power stations.
Applicability of this This manual is valid for SIPROTEC® 7SD52 differential protection; firmware version
Manual 4.2.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equip-
ment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC).
This conformity has been proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance
with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards
EN 60000–6–2 and EN 50082 (for EMC directive) and the standards EN 60255-6 (for
low-voltage directive).
The conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German specifi-
cation VDE 0435.
7SD52 Manual i
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Preface
This product is UL-certified with the data as stated in the Technical Data:
Additional Support Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to
the local Siemens representative.
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may
be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
Instructions and The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an
Warnings appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following terms are used:
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non-
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all
warnings and hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
ii 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Preface
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and
the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
· Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
· Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with es-
tablished safety practices.
· Is trained in rendering first aid.
Typographic and The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the
Symbol Conven- device appear in the text flow:
tions
Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which
may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal
computer (with operation software DIGSI®), are marked in bold letters of a monospace
type style.
Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear
word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer
(with operation software DIGSI®), are written in italic style, additionally.
“Annunciations”, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay
or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace
type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can
be obviously derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Parameter address
Parameter name
Parameter options
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617–12 and
IEC 60617–13 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
³1 OR gate
signal inversion
2610 Iph>>
Iph> Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
2611 T Iph>>
T 0
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable)
with setting address and parameter designator (name)
0 T
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 60617–12 and IEC 60617–13 or
similar are used in most cases.
iv 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................... i
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Functions............................................................................................................................................ 11
2.1 General................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions .............................................................................. 12
2.1.1.1 Setting Overview .................................................................................................................. 15
2.1.2 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 17
2.1.2.1 Setting Overview .................................................................................................................. 22
2.1.3 Setting Groups ..................................................................................................................... 23
2.1.3.1 Setting Overview ................................................................................................................. 24
2.1.3.2 Information Overview ........................................................................................................... 24
2.1.4 General Protection Data (Power System Data 2)................................................................. 25
2.1.4.1 Setting Overview .................................................................................................................. 29
2.1.4.2 Information Overview............................................................................................................ 30
7SD52 Manual v
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Table of Contents
vi 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Table of Contents
7SD52 Manual ix
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Table of Contents
x 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC® 4 devices 7SD52 are introduced in this chapter. An overview of the
devices is presented in their application, features, and scope of functions.
7SD52 Manual 1
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1 Introduction
AI IA AD µC OA
IL1 Ç ERROR
RUN
IL2
UL1 LEDs
on the front
panel, user-
UL2 programmable
UL3
Display on
U4 # the Front Panel
µC
Front Serial Oper- to
ating Interface PC
7 8 9 Time radio
Operator 4 5 6 Synchronization clock
control panel
1 2 3
ESC ENTER . 0 +/- Rear Serial PC/
Service Interface modem
Serial System to
Binary inputs, programmable Interface SCADA
2 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1.1 Overall Operation
Analog Inputs The analog inputs “AI” transform the currents and voltages derived from the instru-
ment transformers and match them to the internal signal levels for processing in the
device. The device has 4 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are pro-
vided for measurement of the phase currents, a further analog input (I4) may be used
for the residual current (current transformer starpoint or a separate earth current trans-
former). A voltage input is provided for each phase-earth voltage. In principle, the dif-
ferential protection does not require any measured voltage. However, voltages that al-
low to measure voltages and powers and voltages that enable the user to measure the
line voltage also for automatic reclosure can be switched to the device. A further volt-
age input (U4) may optionally be used to measure the displacement voltage (e-n-volt-
age). The analog signals are then routed to the input amplifier group “IA”.
The input amplifier group “IA” ensures that there is high impedance termination for the
measured signals and contains filters which are optimized in terms of band-width and
speed with regard to the signal processing.
The analog/digital converter group “AD” has a multiplexer, analog/digital converters
and memory modules for the data transfer to the microcomputer system “µC”.
Microcomputer Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system also executes
System the actual protection and control functions. In particular, the following are included:
- Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals,
- Continuous supervision of the measured signals,
- Supervision of pickup conditions of each protection function,
- Formation of the local differential protection values (phasor analysis and charge
computation) and creation of the transmission protocol,
- Decoding of the received transmission protocol, synchronism of differential protec-
tion values and summing up of the differential currents and charges,
- Monitoring of the communication with the other devices part of the differential pro-
tection system,
- Interrogation of threshold values and time sequences,
- Processing of signals for the logic functions,
- Reaching trip and close command decisions,
- Storage of fault messages, fault annunciations as well as fault recording data for
system fault analysis,
- Operating system and related function management such as e.g. data storage, real
time clock, communication, interfaces etc.,
The information is provided via output amplifier “OA”.
Binary Inputs and The microcomputer system obtains external information through binary inputs such as
Outputs remote resetting or blocking commands for protective elements. The “µC” issues in-
formation to external equipment via the output contacts. These outputs include, in par-
ticular, trip commands to circuit breakers and signals for remote annunciation of im-
portant events and conditions.
7SD52 Manual 3
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1 Introduction
Front Elements Light emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide
information such as targets, measured values, messages related to events or faults,
status, and functional status of the 7SD52.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local inter-
action with the 7SD52. All information of the device can be accessed using the inte-
grated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control set-
tings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also SIPROTEC®
System Manual, order-no. E50417–H1176–C151). The settings can be modified as
are discussed in Chapter 2.
Using integrated switchgear control functions, the control of circuit breakers and other
equipment is possible from the 7SD52 front panel.
Serial Interfaces A serial operator interface (PC port) on the front panel is provided for local communi-
cations with the 7SD52 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all func-
tions of the device is possible using the SIPROTEC® 4 operating program DIGSI®.
A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a mo-
dem, or local communications via a substation master computer that is permanently
connected to the 7SD52. DIGSI® is required.
All 7SD52 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through
the serial system (SCADA) interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements
are available for this interface to suit the particular application.
Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via ex-
ternal synchronization sources.
Via additional interface modules further communication protocols may be created.
The operating and service interface allow the communication from one PC with the
devices at all ends of the protected object during commissioning, checking and also
during operation of the device, using a standard browser. There is a range of PC-tools
supporting this function (e.g. “IBS-tool”) which have been optimized with regard to the
differential protection system.
Protection Data The protection data interfaces are a particular case. Depending on the version there
Interface are one or two protection data interfaces. Via these interfaces the measured value
data of each end of the protected object is transmitted to the other ends; during this
procedure measured values from the other ends may also be added. Further informa-
tion such as closing the local circuit breaker, pickup of the inrush restraint as well as
other external trip commands coupled via binary inputs or binary information can be
transmitted to other ends via the protection data interfaces.
Power Supply The 7SD52 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages. Transient
dips of the supply voltage which may occur during short-circuit in the power supply
system, are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Subsection 4.1.2).
4 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1.2 Applications
1.2 Applications
7SD52 Manual 5
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1 Introduction
tion can be used as a backup time overcurrent protection, i.e. it operates independent
of and parallel to the differential protection at either end.
The communication link can be used for transmitting further information. Apart from
measured values, binary commands or other information can be transmitted (option).
Depending on the version ordered, the short-circuit protection functions can also trip
single-pole. They may operate in co-operation with an integrated automatic reclosure
(available as an option) with which single-pole, three-pole or single- and three-pole
rapid automatic reclosure as well as multi-shot automatic reclosure are possible on
overhead lines. It is possible to connect an external auto-reclosure device as well as
double protection with one or two automatic reclosure functions.
Apart from the short-circuit protection functions mentioned, a thermal overload protec-
tion has been integrated which protects in particular cables and power transformers
from undue heating through overload. An optional circuit breaker failure protection
provides rapid backup fault clearance instruction to the adjacent circuit breakers in
case the local breaker fails to respond.
6 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1.3 Features
1.3 Features
Differential · Differential protection system for up to 6 ends with digital protection data transmis-
Protection sion.
· Protection for all types of short-circuits in systems with any starpoint conditioning.
· Reliable distinction between load and short-circuit conditions, also on high-resist-
ant, current-weak faults, by means of adaptive measuring procedures.
· High sensitivity during weak-infeed conditions, extreme stability against load jumps
and power swings.
· Due to phase segregated measurement the pickup sensitivity is independent of the
type of fault.
· Suited for transformers in the protected zone (order option).
· Detection of high-resistant, current-weak faults due to high sensitivity.
· Insensitive against in-rush and charging currents — also for transformers in the pro-
tected zone (order option) — and against higher-frequency switching transients.
· High stability also for different current transformer saturation.
· Adaptive stabilization that is automatically derived from the measured values and
the configured current transformer data.
· Fast phase segregated tripping also on weak or zero infeed ends (Intertrip).
· Low dependence on frequency due to frequency tracking.
· Digital transmission of protection data; communication between devices via dedi-
cated communication connections (in general optical fibre) or a communication sys-
tem.
· Communication possible via ISDN-networks or two-wire telephone connections (up
to approx 8 km or 5 miles).
· Protection data synchronization via GPS receiver possible, resulting in automatic
correction of transmission time differences thus increasing once more the sensitiv-
ity.
7SD52 Manual 7
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1 Introduction
External Direct and · Tripping of the local end by an external device via binary input.
Remote Tripping
· Tripping of the remote ends by internal protection functions or by an external device
via binary input.
Transmission of · Transmission of measured values from all ends of the protected object.
Information
· Transmission of up to 4 fast commands to all remote ends (optional).
· Transmission of up to 24 additional binary signals to all remote ends (order option).
Time Delayed Over- · Selectable as emergency function during protection data communication failure or
current Protection as back-up function or as both.
· Up to a maximum of three definite time stages (DT) and one inverse time stage
(IDMT), each for phase currents and residual current.
· For IDMT protection a selection from various characteristics based on several
standards is possible.
· Blocking options e.g. for reverse interlocking using any stage.
· Instantaneous trip with any desired stage when switching on to a fault is possible.
Automatic · For reclosure after single-pole, three-pole or single and three-pole tripping.
Reclosure
· Single or multiple shot reclosure (up to 8 reclosure attempts).
(optional)
· With separate action times for every reclosure attempt, optionally without action
times.
· With separate dead times after single-pole and three-pole tripping, separate for the
first four reclosure attempts.
· With the option of an adaptive dead time: in this case only one device controls the
automatic reclosure cycles whilst at the other end(s) the automatic reclosure solely
depends on the one controlling device; the following criteria may apply: voltage re-
turn recognition and/or close command transmission (“Remote close”).
· Automatic reclosure controlled optionally by protection start with separate dead
times after single, two and three-pole starting.
8 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1.3 Features
Circuit Breaker · With independent current detectors for monitoring of current flow through each in-
Failure Protection dividual circuit breaker pole.
(optional)
· With independent delay timers for single-pole trip and three-pole trip.
· Initiation by each of the internal trip functions.
· Initiation by external trip functions possible via binary inputs.
· Single-stage or two-stage delay.
· Short reset and overshoot times.
· End fault protection and pole discrepancy monitoring possible.
Thermal Overload · Provides thermal replica of the current heat losses of the protected object.
Protection
· True RMS measurement of all three conductor currents.
· Adjustable thermal and current-dependent warning stages.
User Defined Logic · Freely programmable linkage between internal and external signals for the imple-
Functions mentation of user defined logic functions.
· All common logic functions.
· Time delays and measured value set point interrogation.
Commissioning; · Indication of the local and remote measured values, amplitudes and phase relation.
Operation;
· Indication of the calculated differential and restraint currents.
Maintenance
· Indication of the characteristic values of the communication link, as transfer delay
times and availability.
· Function logout of a device from the differential protection system during mainte-
nance work at an end of a power line, test mode operation possible.
Monitoring · Monitoring of the internal measuring circuits, the auxiliary voltage supply, as well as
Functions the hard- and software, resulting in increased reliability.
· Supervision of the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits by means of
summation and symmetry checks.
· Monitoring of communication with statistics showing the availability of transmission
telegrams.
· Check of the consistency of protection settings at all line ends: no processor system
start-up with inconsistent settings which could lead to a malfunction of the differen-
tial protection system.
· Trip circuit supervision is possible.
· Check of local and remote measured values and comparison of both.
· Broken wire supervision for the secondary CT circuits with fast phase segregated
blocking of the differential protection system in order to avoid malfunction.
7SD52 Manual 9
C53000–G1176–C132–4
1 Introduction
Further Functions · Battery buffered real time clock, which may be synchronized via a synchronization
signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIG B or GPS via satellite receiver), binary input or system in-
terface.
· Automatic time synchronization between the devices at the ends of the protected
object via the protection data transmission.
· Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the de-
vice. Indication of measured quantities of the remote line end(s).
· Fault event memory for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power system), with
real time stamps (ms-resolution).
· Fault recording memory and data transfer for analog and user configurable binary
signal traces with a maximum time range of 15 s, synchronized between the devic-
es of the differential protection system.
· Switching statistics: counters with the trip and close commands issued by the de-
vice, as well as record of the fault current and accumulation of the interrupted fault
currents.
· Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial interfac-
es through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibres, as an option.
· Commissioning aids such as connection and direction checks as well as interface
check and circuit breaker test functions.
· The “IBS-tool” (installed on a PC or a laptop) widely supports the testing and com-
missioning procedure: the communication topology of the differential protection and
communication system, phasor diagrams of all currents and (if applicable) voltages
at all ends of the differential protection system are displayed as a graph.
10 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Functions 2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC® 7SD52
relay. The setting options for each function are explained, including instructions to de-
termine setting values and formulae where required.
2.1 General 12
2.2 Differential Protection 32
2.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping 47
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology 51
2.5 Direct Local Trip 65
2.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional) 67
2.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 70
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection 74
2.9 Automatic Reclosure 89
2.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) 120
2.11 Thermal Overload Protection 137
2.12 Monitoring functions 141
2.13 Function Control 154
2.14 Commissioning Tools 168
2.15 Ancillary Functions 170
2.16 Processing of Commands 185
7SD52 Manual 11
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
2.1 General
A few seconds after the device is switched on, the initial display appears in the LCD.
In the 7SD52 the measured values are displayed.
Configuration settings (Subsection 2.1.1) may be entered using a PC and the software
program DIGSI® and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via
the serial service interface. Operation via DIGSI® is described in the SIPROTEC® 4
System Manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151. Entry of password No. 7 (for setting
modification) is required to modify configuration settings. Without the password, the
settings may be read, but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device.
The function parameters, i.e. settings of function options, threshold values, etc., can
be entered via the keypad and display on the front of the device, or by means of a per-
sonal computer connected to the front or service interface of the device utilising the
DIGSI® software package. The level 5 password (individual parameters) is required.
General The 7SD52 relay contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope
of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. Furthermore, commands
(control actions) can be suited to individual needs of the protected object. In addition,
individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction be-
tween functions may be adjusted.
Example for the configuration of the scope of functions:
7SD52 devices should be intended to be used for overhead lines and transformers.
Overload protection should only be applied on transformers. If the device is used for
overhead lines this function is set to Disabled and if used for transformers this func-
tion is set to Enabled.
The available function are configured Enabled or Disabled. For some functions, a
choice may be presented between several options which are explained below.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7SD52. There are no
messages, and associated settings (functions, limit values, etc.) are not displayed dur-
ing detailed settings.
Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the re-
lay (see ordering code in the Appendix Section A.1 for details).
Determination of Configuration settings may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI®
Functional Scope and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via the serial service
interface. Operation via DIGSI® is described in the SIPROTEC® system manual, order
number E50417–H1176–C151 (Section 5.3).
12 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
Special Cases Many settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below.
If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address 103 Grp
Chge OPTION must be set to Enabled. In this case, it is possible to apply up to four
different groups of settings for the function parameters (refer also to Subsection 2.1.3).
During normal operation, a convenient and fast switch-over between these setting
groups is possible. The setting Disabled implies that only one function parameter
setting group can be applied and used.
Address 110 Trip 1pole applies only to devices with single-pole or three-pole trip-
ping. Set 1-/3pole if single-pole is also desired, i. e. if the device is supposed to op-
erate with single-pole or with single-pole/three-pole automatic reclosure. A pre-condi-
tion is that the device is equipped with an automatic reclosure function or that an ex-
ternal device is used to carry out automatic reclosure. Additionally the circuit breaker
must be suited for single-pole tripping.
Note:
When having changed address 110, then first save this alteration by clicking OK. Re-
open the dialogue box, since there are other settings which are dependent on the se-
lection in address 110.
7SD52 Manual 13
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
If the device provides an automatic reclosure function (AR), the addresses 133 and
134 are relevant. If no automatic reclosure is desired for the feeder the device 7SD52
is connected to, or if an external device carries out the automatic reclosure, address
133 Auto Reclose is set to Disabled. Automatic reclosure is only permitted for
overhead lines. It must not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists
of a combination of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in unit with
a transformer or overhead line/cable), reclosure is only permissible if it can be ensured
that it can only take place in the event of a fault on the overhead line.
In the address mentioned the number of desired reclosure cycles is set. Choose the
desired number of AR-cycles from a total scope of 8 AR-cycles. You can also set
ADT (adaptive dead time): in this case the behaviour of the automatic reclosure de-
pends on the cycles of the remote end. However, at one end of the line the number of
cycles must be configured. This end must provide an infeed. The other end (or ends
in case of more than 2 ends) may operate with adaptive dead time. See Subsection
2.9.1 for detailed information.
The AR control mode under address 134 allows a total of four options. You can
determine whether the sequence of automatic reclosure cycles is defined by the fault
situation of the pickup of the starting protection function(s) or by the type of trip com-
mand. The automatic reclosure can also operate with or without action time.
The Trip w/ Tact or Trip w/o Tact setting is preferred when single-pole or
single/three-pole automatic reclosure cycles are desired and are possible. In this
case, different dead times (for every AR-cycle) are possible after single-pole tripping
and after three-pole tripping. The tripping protection function determines the type of
tripping: single-pole or three-pole. The dead time is controlled dependent on this.
The Pickup w/ Tact or Pickup w/o Tact setting is only possible for three-pole
trip, i.e. if the device is ordered for exclusively three-pole trip or three-pole trip is con-
figured (address 110 Trip 1pole = 3pole only). In this case, different dead times
can be set for the auto-reclosure cycles after single, two- and three-phase pickup on
faults. The fault detection (pickup) image of the protection functions at the instant the
trip command disappears is decisive. This operating mode also enables the dead
times to be made dependent on the type of fault; but tripping is always three-pole.
The Trip w/ Tact or Pickup w/ Tact (with action time) setting provides an action
time for every AR-cycle. This is started by the general pickup signal (i. e. logic OR
combination of all internal and external pickup signals of all protection functions which
are configured to start the automatic reclosure function). If there is yet no trip com-
mand when the action time has expired, the corresponding automatic reclosure cycle
cannot be executed. See Subsection 2.9.1 for more information. For time graded pro-
tection this setting is recommended. If the protection function to operate with reclosure
does not have a general fault detection signal for starting the action times, select the
setting Trip w/o Tact or Pickup w/o Tact (without action time).
For the trip circuit supervision the number of trip circuits that shall be monitored is set
in address 140 Trip Cir. Sup. with the following settings: 1 trip circuit, 2
trip circuits or 3 trip circuits.
The number of relays (address 143 NUMBER OF RELAY must be equal to the number
of measuring locations at the ends of the protected object. Take into consideration
each set of current transformers that limits the protected object. The line shown in Fig-
ure 2-1 provides four ends and therefore four devices, as the line is limited by four sets
of current transformers. Two devices would normally be sufficient if current transform-
ers 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4 are connected in parallel at the secondary side and if
connecting each pair of transformer sets to only one device. But, if an external fault
14 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
occurred, causing a high short-circuit current passing the current transformers 1 and
2, the devices would be understabilized.
7SD52 7SD52
1 3
Device 1 Device 3
7SD52 7SD52
2 4
Device 2 Device 4
If the device is connected to voltage transformers, set this condition in address 144
V-TRANSFORMER. Only if set connected, the voltage dependent functions (meas-
ured values of voltages, power and power factor) can be registered by the device.
If a power transformer is located within the protected zone, set this condition in ad-
dress 145 TRANSFORMER. The data of the transformer are registered by the device
during the configuration of the general protection data (see “Topological Data for
Transformers (optional)” in Subsection 2.1.4).
Note: Depending on the type and version of the device it is possible that addresses
are missing or have different default settings.
110 Trip 1pole 3pole only 3pole only 1pole trip permitted
1-/3pole
7SD52 Manual 15
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
134 AR control mode with Pickup and Action time with Trip but wit- AR control mode
with Pickup but without hout Action time
Action time
with Trip and Action time
with Trip but without Action
time
139 BREAKER Disabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection
FAILURE Enabled
16 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
General The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its
functions accordingly, dependent on the actual application. The data required include
for instance rated data of the substation and the measuring transformers, polarity and
connection of the measured quantities, if necessary features of the circuit breakers,
and others. Furthermore, there is a number of settings associated with several func-
tions rather than a specific protection, control or monitoring function. These Power
System Data 1 can only be changed from a PC running DIGSI® and are discussed in
this Subsection.
Polarity of the Cur- Address 201 CT Starpoint asks for the polarity of the current transformers, i.e. the
rent Transformers position of the transformer starpoint (Figure 2-2). The setting defines the measuring
direction of the device (current in line direction is defined as positive at all ends). The
reversal of this parameter also reverses the polarity of the residual current input IE.
Busbar
IL1 IE
IL2
IL3
IL1
IE IL2
IL3
Line Line
201 CT Starpoint 201 CT Starpoint
= towards Line = towards Busbar
Rated Quantities of In principle, the differential protection is designed such that it can operate without
the Instrument measured voltages. However, voltages can be connected. These voltages allow to
Transformers display and log voltages, and to calculate various components of power. If necessary,
they can also serve for determining the life line condition in case of automatic reclos-
ure. During configuration of the device functions (Subsection 2.1.1), it has been deter-
mined whether the device is to work with or without measured voltages.
In the addresses 203 Unom PRIMARY and 204 Unom SECONDARY you inform the de-
vice of the primary and secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the voltage trans-
formers. These settings are not relevant if no voltage transformers are connected and
configured when determining the functional scope according to Subsection 2.1.1.
In the addresses 205 CT PRIMARY and 206 CT SECONDARY you inform the device
of the primary and secondary rated currents of the current transformers (phases).
Address 206 CT SECONDARY must correspond to the nominal current of the device,
otherwise the processor system cannot be started. Also make sure that the secondary
rated CT currents are in accordance with the rated current of the device, because
otherwise the device will calculate wrong primary values (refer also to Subsection
3.1.3.3 under margin header “Input/Output Board I/O-2”).
The correct primary data are required for the calculation of the proper primary infor-
mation of the operational measured values. If the settings of the device are performed
7SD52 Manual 17
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
with primary values using DIGSI®, these primary data are an indispensable require-
ment for the fault-free operation of the device.
Connection of the Four inputs for measured voltages are available if the device is connected to the volt-
Voltages age transformers. This subtitle is not relevant if no voltages are connected.
Three voltage inputs are connected to the voltage transformer set. Various possibili-
ties exist for the fourth voltage input U4:
· Connection of the input U4 to the open delta winding e-n of the voltage transformer
set, see also Appendix A, Figure A-16:
Address 210 is set in that case to: U4 transformer = Udelta transf..
With U4 connected to the e-n-windings (open delta) of the voltage transformer set,
the voltage transformation of the transformer is normally
U Nprim U Nsec U Nsec
----------------
3
¤ ¤
- --------------- ---------------
3 3
The factor Uph/Uen (secondary voltage, address 211 Uph / Udelta) must then
be set to 3/Ö3 = Ö3 » 1.73. For other transformation ratios, e.g. if the residual voltage
is formed by an interposed transformer set, the factor must be adapted accordingly.
This factor is important for the monitoring of measured quantities and the scaling of
the measured values and fault values.
· If the input U4 is not required, set:
Address 210 U4 transformer = Not connected.
In this case as well, the factor Uph / Udelta (address 211, see above) is impor-
tant, since it is used for the scaling of the measured values and the fault values.
Connection of the The device has four measured current inputs, three of which are connected to the cur-
Currents rent transformer set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth current input I4:
· Connect the input I4 to the residual current of the CT starpoint of the protected line
(standard circuit arrangement, see also Appendix A, Figure A-13):
Address 220 is set in that case to: I4 transformer = In prot. line and
Address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1.
· Connect the input I4 to a separate ground current transformer of the protected line
(e.g. a summation current transformer, see also Appendix A, Figure A-14).
Address 220 is set in that case to: I4 transformer = In prot. line and
Address 221 I4/Iph CT is set to:
Transformation of ground current transformer
I 4 ¤ I ph CT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Transformation of phase current transformers
Example:
Phase-current transformers 500 A/5 A
Ground-current transformer 60 A/1 A
60 ¤ 1
I 4 ¤ I ph CT = ----------------- = 0.600
500 ¤ 5
· If the input I4 is not required, set:
Address 220 I4 transformer = Not connected,
Address 221 I4/Iph CT is not relevant.
In this case, the residual current is calculated from the sum of the phase currents.
18 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
Rated Frequency The rated frequency of the network is set under address 230 Rated Frequency.
The default setting is made in the factory in accordance with the design variant and
needs to be changed only if the device is to be used for a different purpose than or-
dered for. It can be set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Command The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set in address 240A. This
Duration duration is valid for all protection and control functions which can issue a trip com-
mand. It also determines the duration of a tripping pulse during the circuit breaker test
via the device. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Set-
tings”.
The maximum duration of a closing command TMax CLOSE CMD is set in address
241A. This setting is valid for all closing commands of the device. It also determines
the duration of a closing pulse during the circuit breaker test via the device. This du-
ration must be long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has closed. There is no
risk in setting it too long, because the closing command is interrupted in any case as
soon as a protective function trips the circuit breaker again. This parameter can only
be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
Circuit Breaker 7SD52 allows a circuit breaker test during operation by means of a tripping and a clos-
Test ing command entered on the front panel or via DIGSI®. The duration of the trip com-
mands is set as explained above. Address 242 T-CBtest-dead determines the time
from the end of the tripping command until the beginning of the closing command dur-
ing the test. It should not be less than 0.1 s.
Current Transform- The basic principle of the differential protection assumes that all currents flowing into
er Characteristics a healthy protected section add up to zero. If the current transformer sets at the line
ends have different transformation errors in the overcurrent range, the sum of the sec-
ondary currents can reach considerable peaks due to the saturation of the transform-
ers when a high fault current flows through the line. These peaks may feign an internal
fault. The features included in the 7SD52 to prevent errors in case of current trans-
former saturation work completely satisfying if the protection knows the response
characteristic of the current transformers.
For this, the characteristic data of the current transformers and of their secondary cir-
cuits are set (see also Figure 2-9 in Subsection 2.2.1). The preset values are adequate
in most cases; they correspond to usual current transformers for protection purposes.
The rated accuracy limit factor n of the current transformers and the rated power PN
are usually stated on the rating plate of the current transformers. The information
stated refers to reference conditions (rated current, rated burden). For example (ac-
cording to IEC 60044)
Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA ® n = 10; PN = 30 VA
Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA ® n = 20; PN = 20 VA
The operational accuracy limit factor n' is derived from this rated data and the actual
secondary burden P':
n' PN + P i
---- = ------------------
-
n P' + P i
7SD52 Manual 19
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
with n' = operational accuracy limit factor (effective accuracy limit factor)
n = rated accuracy limit factor of CTs (distinctive number behind P)
PN = rated burden of current transformers [VA] at rated current
Pi = internal burden of the current transformers [VA] at rated current
P' = actually connected burden (devices + secondary lines) [VA] at
rated current
Usually, the internal burden of current transformers is stated in the test report. If un-
known, it can be calculated roughly from the DC resistance Ri of the secondary wind-
ing.
P i » Ri · I N 2
The ratio between the operational accuracy limit factor and the rated accuracy limit
factor n'/n is parameterized under address 251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N.
The CT error at rated current, plus a safety margin, is set under address 253 E% ALF/
ALF_N. It is equal to the “current measuring deviation for primary rated current inten-
sity F1” according to IEC 60044.
The CT error at rated accuracy limit factor, plus a safety margin, is set under address
254 E% K_ALF_N. It is derived from the number preceding the “P” of the transformer
data.
Table 2-1 illustrates some usual current transformer types with their characteristic
data and the recommended settings.
With this data the device establishes an approximate CT error characteristic and cal-
culates the restraint quantity (see also Subsection 2.2.1).
20 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
Exemplary calculation:
Current transformers 5P10; 20 VA
transformation 600 A/5 A
internal burden 2 VA
Secondary lines 4 mm2 Cu
length 20 m
Device 7SD52 IN = 5 A
burden at 5 A 0.3 VA
The resistance of secondary lines is (with the resistivity for copper rCu =
0.0175 Wmm2/m)
2
Wmm 20 m
R i = 2 × 0.0175 ------------------ × ----------------- = 0.175 W
m 2
4 mm
Here, the most unfavourable case is assumed, i.e. the current (as it is the case with
single-phase faults) flows back and forth via the secondary lines (factor 2). From that
the power for rated current IN = 5 A is calculated
Pi = 0.175 W · (5 A)2 = 4.375 VA
The entire connected burden consists of the burden of the incoming lines and the bur-
den of the device:
P' = 4.375 VA + 0.3 VA = 4.675 VA
Thus the ratio of the accuracy limit factors is as follows
n' PN + Pi 20 VA + 2 VA
- = -------------------------------------------- = 3.30
---- = ------------------
n P' + P i 4.375 VA + 2 VA
According to the above table, address 251 should be set to 1.50 if the calculated ratio
is higher than 1,50. This results in the following setting values:
Address 251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N = 1.50
Address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N = 3.0
Address 254 E% K_ALF_N = 10.0
The presettings correspond to current transformers 10P with rated burden.
Of course, only those settings are reasonable where address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N is
set lower than address 254 E% K_ALF_N.
Power Transformer If the protected object covers a power transformer with voltage regulation, a differen-
with Voltage Regu- tial current may occur even during normal healthy operation under steady-state con-
lation ditions. This differential current depends on the current intensity as well as on the
position of the tap changer of the transformer. Since this differential current is current-
proportional it is meaningful to consider it like a current transformer error. You may
calculate the maximum differential current at the limits of the tap changer under nom-
inal conditions (referred to the mean current) and add it to the current transformer error
as discussed above (addresses 253 and 254). This correction is performed only at
that relay facing the regulated winding of the power transformer.
7SD52 Manual 21
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Exemplary calculation:
Transformer YNd5
35 MVA
110 kV/25 kV
Y-side regulated ±10 %
From this resulting:
rated current at nominal voltage IN = 184 A
rated current at UN + 10 % Imin = 167 A
rated current at UN – 10 % Imax = 202 A
I min + I max
- = 167
mean current value Imean = -------------------------- A + 202 A- = 184.5 A
------------------------------------
2 2
The maximum deviation from this mean current is
I max – I mean 202 A – 184.5 A
max. deviation d max = ------------------------------
- = ------------------------------------------ = 0.095 = 9.5 %
I mean 184.5 A
This maximum deviation dmax [in %] has to be added to the current transformer errors
as determined above, addresses 253 E% ALF/ALF_N and 254 E% K_ALF_N.
It must be considered that this deviation is referred to the mean current value between
the extrema of the tap changer position at rated apparent power, not to the current val-
ue at rated voltage and rated power. This demands a further correction of the data of
the protected object as discussed in Subsection 2.1.4 under subtitle “Topological Data
for Transformers (optional)” (page 25).
Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current
value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are
to be multiplied by 5.
The presetting of the rated frequency corresponds to the rated frequency according to
the device version.
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI®, under “Additional Settings”.
22 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
240A TMin TRIP CMD 0.02..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command Dura-
tion
241A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01..30.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Duration
242 T-CBtest-dead 0.00..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Dead Time for CB test-autore-
closure
Purpose of Setting In the 7SD52 relay, four independent setting groups (A to D) are possible. During op-
Groups eration, you may switch between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so config-
ured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the sys-
tem interface. For reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups
during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as
Enabled or another active option during configuration (see Subsection 2.1.1). Whilst
setting values may vary among the four setting groups, the scope of functions of each
setting group remains the same.
Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application.
While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group is active at a
given time.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the
rest of this subsection is of no importance.
If multiple setting groups are desired, address 103 Grp Chge OPTION must have
been set to Enabled in the relay configuration. Refer to Subsection 2.1.1. Each of
these sets (A to D) is adjusted one after the other. You will find more details how to
navigate between the setting groups, to copy and reset setting groups, and how to
7SD52 Manual 23
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
switch over between the setting groups during operation, in the SIPROTEC® System
Manual, order number E50417–H1176–C151.
The preconditions to switch from one setting group to another via binary inputs is de-
scribed in Subsection 3.1.2 under margin header “Changing Setting Groups with Bi-
nary Inputs”, page 199.
Group B Group B
Group C Group C
Group D Group D
24 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
General protection data (P.System Data2) includes settings associated with all
functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the
P.System Data1 as discussed in Subsection 2.1.2, these settings can be changed
over with the setting groups and can be configured via the operator panel of the de-
vice.
The nominal operating data under Power System Data 2 should be set to the same
values at all ends of the protected object. This ensures uniform measured values dis-
played during commissioning and operation and sent to a central computer station.
Rated Values of The statements under this subtitle refer to protected lines (cables or overhead lines) if
Protected Lines no power transformer is situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models without
transformer option or if the transformer option is disabled during configuration of the
scope of function (address 145 TRANSFORMER = NO, see Subsection 2.1.1). If a trans-
former is part of the protected zone, proceed with the next subtitle “Topological Data
for Transformers (optional)”.
With address 1103 FullScaleVolt. you inform the device of the primary rated volt-
age (phase-to-phase) of the equipment to be protected (if voltages are applied). This
setting influences the displays of the operational measured values in %.
The primary rated current (address 1104 FullScaleCurr.) is that of the protected
object. For cables the thermal continuous current-loading capacity can be selected.
For overhead lines the rated current is usually not defined; set the rated current of the
current transformers (as set in address 205, Subsection 2.1.2). If the current trans-
formers have different rated currents at the ends of the protected object, set the high-
est rated current value for all ends.
This setting will not only have an impact on the indication of the operational measured
values in per cent, but must also be exactly the same for each end of the protected
object, since it is the base for the current comparison at the ends.
Topological Data The statements under this subtitle apply to protected objects which cover a power
for Transformers transformer being situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models with transformer
(optional) option and if the transformer option is enabled during configuration of the scope of
function (address 145 TRANSFORMER = YES, see Subsection 2.1.1). If no transformer
is part of the protected zone, this subtitle can be passed over.
The topological data make it possible to relate all measured quantities to the rated
data of the power transformer.
With address 1103 FullScaleVolt. you inform the device of the primary rated volt-
age (phase-to-phase) of the transformer to be protected. This setting is also needed
for computing the current reference value of the differential protection. Therefore, it is
important to set the correct rated voltage for each end of the protected object
even if no measured voltages are applied to the relay.
In general, select the rated voltage of the transformer winding facing the device. But,
if the protected transformer is equipped with a voltage tap changer at one winding,
then do not use the rated voltage of that winding but the voltage that corresponds to
the mean value of the currents at the ends of the control range of the tap changer. In
this way the fault currents caused by voltage regulation are minimized.
7SD52 Manual 25
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Exemplary calculation:
Transformer YNd5
35 MVA
110 kV/25 kV
Y-side regulated ±10 %
Thus resulting for the regulated winding (110 kV):
maximum voltage Umax = 121 kV
minimum voltage Umin = 99 kV
Setting value for the rated voltage at this side (address 1103)
2 2
FullScaleVolt. = -------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------- = 108.9 kV
1 1 1 1
------------- + ------------ ------------------ + ---------------
U max U min 121 kV 99 kV
The OPERATION POWER (address 1106) is the direct primary rated apparent power
for transformers and other machines. The same operation power value must be set
for each end of the protected object since it is the basis for the current comparison
at the ends.
The power must always be entered as a primary value, even if the device is generally
configured in secondary values. The device calculates the rated current of the protect-
ed object from this power.
The VECTOR GROUP I (address 1162) is the vector group of the power transformer,
always from the device’s perspective. The device which is used for the reference end
of the transformer, normally the one at the high voltage side, must keep the numerical
index 0 (default setting). The relevant vector group index must be stated for the other
winding(s).
Example:
Transformer Yy6d5
For the Y-end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 0,
for the y-end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 6,
for the d-end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 5.
If a different winding is chosen as reference winding, e.g. the d-winding, this has to be
taken into consideration:
For the Y-end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 7 (12 – 5),
for the y-end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 1 (6 – 5),
for the d-end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 0 (5 – 5 = 0 = reference side).
Address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U is normally set to the same value as address 1162
VECTOR GROUP I.
If the vector group of the transformer is matched with external means, e.g. because
there are matching transformers in the measuring circuit that are still used, set VEC-
TOR GROUP I = 0, at all ends. In this case the differential protection operates without
proper matching computation. But, the measuring voltages transmitted via the trans-
former would not be adapted in the 7SD52 and therefore not correctly calculated and
displayed. Address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U serves to remove this disadvantage. Set
the correct vector group of the transformer according to the above-mentioned consid-
erations.
26 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
Address 1162 VECTOR GROUP I is therefore relevant for the differential protection,
whereas address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U serves as a basis for the computation of
measured voltages beyond the transformer.
Address 1163 TRANS STP IS is used to set whether the power transformer starpoint
facing the device is earthed or not. If the starpoint is earthed, the device will eliminate
the zero sequence current of the relevant side, since this zero sequence current may
cause a spurious tripping in case of an earth fault outside of the protected zone.
Circuit Breaker Various protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the cir-
Status cuit breaker for faultless operation. The device has a circuit breaker status recognition
which processes the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and it also contains
a metrological opening and closing recognition (see also Section 2.13).
The open-pole current PoleOpenCurrent which is safely undershot when the circuit
breaker pole is open, is set in address 1130A. High sensitivity may be set if parasitic
currents (e.g. from induction) can be excluded when the line is de-energized. Other-
wise the value must be increased correspondingly.
The seal-in time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132A) determines how long the pro-
tection functions that are effective when the line is energized (e.g. the increased pick-
up threshold for the differential protection) are enabled when the internal status rec-
ognition has recognized the closing of the breaker or when the device receives a sig-
nal via a binary input and the CB auxiliary contact that the circuit breaker has been
closed. Therefore, this seal-in time should be longer than the CB operating time during
the closing plus the command time of the relevant protective function plus the CB op-
erating time during opening. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under
“Additional Settings”.
Address 1134 Line status determines the criteria for the functioning of the inte-
grated status recognition. With CurrentOpenPole the rise of the open-pole current
above the threshold set in address 1130A (PoleOpenCurrent, see above) is inter-
preted as the closing of the circuit breaker. Current AND CB, on the other hand,
means that both the currents and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
are processed for the status recognition. This means, that Current AND CB should
be set if the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker exist and are connected and allo-
cated to corresponding binary inputs, and CurrentOpenPole in all other cases. Note
that the I>>>-stage of the instantaneous high-speed trip (see Section 2.7) can only
work if the auxiliary contacts for all devices at the ends of the protected object are con-
nected.
Whilst the SI Time all Cl. (address 1132A, see above) becomes effective with
each energization of the line, the seal-in time SI Time Man.Cl (address 1150A) de-
termines the time during which a possible influence on the protection functions be-
comes effective after the manual closing (e.g. the switch-on pickup threshold for dif-
ferential protection or overcurrent protection, see loc cit). This parameter can only be
altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
Three-Pole Three-pole coupling is only relevant if single-pole auto-reclosures are carried out. If
Coupling not, tripping is always three-pole. The rest of this subtitle is then irrelevant.
Address 1155 3pole coupling determines whether any multi-phase pickup leads
to a three-pole tripping command or whether only multi-pole tripping decision results
in a three-pole tripping command. This setting is only relevant for versions with single-
pole and three-pole tripping and is only available there. It does not have an impact on
7SD52 Manual 27
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
the differential protection since pickup and tripping are equivalent. The time overcur-
rent protection function, however, can also pick up in the event of a fault occurred out-
side the protected object, without tripping. More information on the functions is also
contained in Subsection 2.13.3, “Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device”.
With the setting with PICKUP, each multi-phase pickup causes a three-pole tripping,
even if only a single-phase ground fault has occurred in the protected area and a fur-
ther external fault, e.g. through overcurrent, is recognized. Even if a single-pole trip-
ping command is already present, each further pick-up will lead to a three-pole cou-
pling.
If, on the other hand, the address is set on with TRIP (normal setting for differential
protection), only multi-pole tripping commands will lead to a three-pole tripping. There-
fore, if a single-phase fault occurs within the protected zone and a further fault outside
of it, single-pole tripping is possible. A further fault during the single-pole tripping will
only lead to a three-pole coupling, if it occurs within the protected zone.
This parameter is valid for all protection functions of 7SD52 which are capable of
single-pole tripping. Standard setting: with TRIP.
Applying the time overcurrent protection function the difference is noticeable when
multiple faults occur, which means faults that nearly occur at the same time at different
places in the system.
If, for example, two single-phase ground faults occur on different lines — these may
also be parallel lines — (Figure 2-3), the protective relays of all four line ends detect a
fault L1–L2–E, i.e. the pickup image is consistent with a two-phase ground fault. But
since each of the two lines has only a single-phase fault, a single-phase auto-reclos-
ure on each of the two lines is desirable. This is possible with setting 1155 3pole
coupling to with TRIP. Each of the four devices recognizes a single-pole internal
fault and is therefore able to perform a single-pole trip.
L1–E
L2–E
In some cases, however, a three-pole trip would be preferable in this fault scenario,
e.g. if the double-circuit line is located close to a large generator unit (Figure 2-4). This
is because the generator considers the two single-phase ground faults as one double
ground fault, with correspondingly high dynamic stress of the turbine shaft. With 1155
3pole coupling set to with PICKUP, the two lines are switched off, since each
device picks up as with L1–L2–E, i.e. as with a multi-phase fault.
28 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
L1–E
L2–E
Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current
value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are
to be multiplied by 5.
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI®, under “Additional Settings”.
1132A SI Time all Cl. 0.01..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Seal-in Time after ALL closures
7SD52 Manual 29
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
1150A SI Time Man.Cl 0.01..30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after MANUAL clo-
sures
30 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.1 General
7SD52 Manual 31
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
The differential protection is the main feature of the device. It is based on current com-
parison. For this, one device must be installed at each end of the zone to be protected.
The devices exchange their measured quantities via communications links and com-
pare the received currents with their own. In case of an internal fault the allocated cir-
cuit breaker is tripped.
7SD52 is — depending on the ordered model — designed for protected objects with
up to 6 ends. A version which covers power transformers or machines in unit connec-
tion is available as an option. The protected zone is limited selectively at its ends by
the current transformer sets.
Basic Principle with Differential protection is based on current comparison. It makes use of the fact that
Two Ends e.g. a line section L (Figure 2-5) carries always the same current i (dashed line) at its
two ends in healthy operation. This current flows into one side of the considered zone
and leaves it again on the other side. A difference in current is a clear indication of a
fault within this line section. If the actual current transformation ratios are the same,
the secondary windings of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 at the line ends can
be connected to form a closed electric circuit with a secondary current I; a measuring
element M which is connected to the electrical balance point remains at zero current
in healthy operation.
When a fault occurs in the zone limited by the transformers, a current I1 + I2 which is
proportional to the fault currents i1 + i2 flowing in from both sides is fed to the meas-
uring element. As a result, the simple circuit shown in Figure 2-5 ensures a reliable
tripping of the protection if the fault current flowing into the protected zone during a
fault is high enough for the measuring element M to respond.
i i1 L i2 i
Station 1 Station 2
CT1 CT2
I i1 + i 2 I
I1 I2
I1 + I2
Figure 2-5 Basic principle of differential protection for a line with two ends
32 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
Basic Principle with For lines with three or more ends or for busbars, the principle of differential protection
Multiple Ends is extended in that the total sum of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero
in healthy operation, whereas in case of a fault the total sum is equal to the fault cur-
rent (see Figure 2-6 as an example for four ends).
Protected
object
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4
I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 + I2
M
+ I3 + I4
i1 i2 i3 i4
Transmission of If the entire protected object is located in one place — as is the case with generators,
Measured Values transformers, busbars —, the measured quantities can be processed immediately.
This is different for lines where the protected zone spans a certain distance from one
substation to the other. To be able to process the measured quantities of all line ends
at each line end, these have to be transmitted in a suitable form. In this way, the trip-
ping condition at each line end can be checked and the respective local circuit breaker
can be operated if necessary.
7SD52 transmits the measured quantities as digital telegrams via communication
channels. For this, each device is equipped with at least one protection data interface.
Figure 2-7 shows this for a line with two ends. Each device measures the local current
and sends the information on its intensity and phase relation to the opposite end. The
interface for this communication between protection devices is called the protection
data interface. As a result, the currents can be added up an processed in each device.
1 2
i1 i2
I1 I2
I1 I1
I1 + I2 I1 + I2
I2 I2
7SD52 7SD52
In case of more than two ends, a communication chain is built up by which each device
is informed about the total sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure
2-8 shows an example for four ends. Ends 1 and 2 are derived from the arrangements
of the current transformers shown on the left. Although this is actually only one line
end, it should be treated in terms of differential protection as two ends because the
current is measured in two places. Line end 3 is situated on the opposite side. The line
is also equipped with a branch feeder leading to end 4.
7SD52 Manual 33
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Each device receives its local currents from the current transformers. Device 1 meas-
ures the current i1 and transmits its data as complex phasor I1 to device 2. Device 2
adds the share I2 to its own measured current i2 and sends this partial sum to device
4. Device 4 proceeds in the same way so that I4 is added. The partial sum I1 + I2 + I4
finally reaches device 3 which then adds I3. Vice versa, a corresponding chain leads
from device 3 via device 4 and device 2 to device 1. In this way, the total sum of the
four currents measured at the measuring points is available to all four devices.
The sequence of the devices in the communication chain need not correspond to the
indexation, as shown in Figure 2-8. The allocation is carried out during the parameter-
ization of the protection data topology, as explained in Section 2.4.
I1
i1 7SD52
I1
I2 +I3 +I4 i3 3
I1
I2 +I3 +I4
I3
I2 +I3 +I4
I1
I2 7SD52
i2
I1 +I2 7SD52
I3 +I4
I1 +I2 +I4
I3
2 I1 + I2 I1 +I2 +I4
I4 I3
I3 +I4
i4 I1 +I2 +I4
I3
7SD52
4
I1 +I2
I3 +I4
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown in dashed lines
in Figure 2-8. This provides for redundancy of transmission: even if one communica-
tion link fails, the entire differential protection system will be fully operational. The de-
vices recognize a disturbance in communication and switch over automatically to a dif-
ferent way of communication. It is also possible to switch off one line end, e.g. for a
check or a revision, and put the local protection out of operation. With a communica-
tion ring, the rest of the operation can proceed without disturbances.
You will find detailed information on the topology of device communication in Section
2.4.
Measured Value The devices measure the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device
Synchronization measures, digitizes and pre-processes the associated currents of the current trans-
formers with its own, random processor pulse. If the currents of two or more line ends
34 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
are to be compared, it is necessary, however, to process all currents with the same
time base.
All devices which belong together exchange their time with each telegram. The device
with index 1 functions as a “timing master” thus determining the time base. The other
devices then calculate the time delay from the transmission and processing times re-
lated on the timing master. With this rough synchronization the equality of the time
bases with a precision of ± 0.5 ms is provided.
To achieve a sufficiently precise synchronization all current values are marked with a
“time stamp” before they are transmitted from one device to the other as digital tele-
grams. This time stamp indicates at which point in time the transmitted current data
were valid. Therefore, the receiving devices can carry out an optimized synchroniza-
tion of the current comparisons based on the received time stamp and their own time
management, i.e. they can compare the currents which were actually measured at ex-
actly the same time (<5 µs tolerance).
The transmission periods are permanently monitored by the devices using the time
stamps and considered at the respective receiving end.
The frequency of the measured quantities, which is decisive for the comparison of
complex phasors, is also continuously measured and, if necessary, corrected to
achieve a synchronous comparison of the phasors. If the device is connected to volt-
age transformers and at least one voltage of a sufficient level is available, the frequen-
cy is derived from this voltage. If not, the measured currents are used for the determi-
nation of the frequency. The measured frequencies are interchanged between the de-
vices via the communication link. Under these conditions all devices work with the cur-
rently valid frequency.
Restraint The precondition for the basic principle of differential protection is that the total sum of
all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation. This precon-
dition is only valid for the primary system and even there only if shunt currents of a
kind produced by line capacitances or magnetizing currents of transformers and reac-
tors can be neglected.
The secondary currents which are applied to the devices via the current transformers,
are subject to measuring errors caused by the response characteristic of the current
transformers and the input circuits of the devices. Transmission errors such as signal
jitters can also cause deviations of the measured quantities. As a result of all these
influences, the total sum of all currents processed in the devices in healthy operation
is not exactly zero. Therefore, the differential protection is stabilized against these in-
fluences.
Charging Currents Due to the capacitances of the three phases against ground and against one another,
charging currents are flowing even in healthy operation and cause a difference of cur-
rents at the ends of the protected zone. Especially when cables are used, the capac-
itive charging currents can reach considerable magnitude.
Charging currents do not depend on the intensity of the measured currents. In healthy
operation they can be considered as being almost constant under steady-state condi-
tions, since they are only determined by the voltage and the capacitances of the lines.
They can therefore be taken into account during the setting of the sensitivity of the dif-
ferential protection (see also Subsection 2.2.2 under “Pickup Value of Differential Cur-
rent”). The same is true for the steady-state magnetizing currents across shunt reac-
7SD52 Manual 35
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
tances. For transient inrush currents 7SD52 has a separate inrush restraint feature
(see below under the subtitle “Inrush Restraint”).
Current To consider the influences of current transformer errors, each device calculates a self-
Transformer Errors restraining quantity DI. This is calculated by estimating the possible local transformer
errors from the data of the local current transformers and the intensity of the measured
currents. The transformer data have been parameterized under the power system
data (cf. Subsection 2.1.2 under “Current Transformer Characteristics”, page 19) and
apply to each individual device. Since each device transmits its estimated errors to the
other devices, each device is capable to form the total sum of possible errors; this sum
is used for restraint.
Ifault
IN
Approximation
n'/n Itransformer/IN
Figure 2-9 Approximation of the current transformer errors
Further Influences Further measuring errors which may arise in the device itself by hardware tolerances,
calculation tolerances, deviations in time or which are due to the “quality” of the meas-
ured quantities such as harmonics and deviations in frequency, are also estimated by
the device and increase the local self-restraining quantity automatically. Here, the per-
missible variations in the protection data transmission and processing periods are also
considered.
Deviations in time are caused by residual errors during the synchronization of meas-
ured quantities, data transmission and operating time variations, and similar events.
When GPS-synchronization is used, these influences are eliminated and do not in-
crease the self-restraining quantity.
If an influencing parameter cannot be determined — e.g. the frequency if no sufficient
measured quantities are available — the measuring error will be set by definition to
the maximum permissible deviation. For the frequency this means that if the frequency
cannot be determined, because no sufficient measured quantities are available, the
device will assume rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from
the rated frequency within the permissible range (±20 % of the rated frequency), the
restraint will be increased automatically. As soon as the frequency has been deter-
mined (max. 100 ms after reappearance of a suitable measured quantity), the restraint
will be decreased correspondingly. This is of interest during operation if no measured
quantities are existing in the protected zone before a fault occurs, e.g. if a line with the
voltage transformers on the line side is switched onto a fault. Since the frequency is
not yet known at this point of time, an increased restraint will be active until the actual
frequency is determined. This may delay the tripping somewhat, but only close to the
pickup threshold, i.e. in case of very low-current faults.
36 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
These self-restraining quantities are calculated by each device from the total sum of
the possible deviations and transmitted to the other devices. In the same way as the
total currents (differential currents) are calculated (see above, “Transmission of Meas-
ured Values“), each device calculates thus the total sum of the restraining quantities
and thereby stabilizes the differential currents.
It is due to the self-restraint that the differential protection works with a maximum of
sensitivity at all times, since the restraining quantities adapt themselves automatically
in a dynamic way to possible errors. In this way, even high-resistance faults, with high
load currents at the same time, can be detected effectively. Using GPS-synchroniza-
tion, the self-restraining is minimized once more since differences in the transmission
times are compensated automatically.
Inrush Restraint If the protected area includes a power transformer, a high inrush current can be ex-
pected when connecting the transformer. This inrush current flows into the protected
zone but does not leave it again.
The inrush current can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a
relatively high content in second harmonics (double rated frequency) which is almost
absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the content in second harmonics exceeds an
adjustable threshold in differential current, the tripping will be prevented.
The inrush restraint has an upper limit: if a certain (adjustable) current value is exceed-
ed, it will not be effective any more, since there must be an internal current-intensive
short-circuit.
Figure 2-10 shows a simplified logic diagram. The conditions for the inrush restraint
are examined in each device in which this function has been activated. The blocking
condition is transmitted to all devices so that it is effective at all ends of the protected
object.
fN
ILx
& Inrush detect. Lx
2fN
Figure 2-10 Logic diagram of the inrush restraint for one phase
Since the inrush restraint works individually for each phase, the protection is fully ef-
fective even with the transformer switched onto a single-phase fault, whereas it is pos-
sible that an inrush current may be flowing in a different, healthy phase. It is, however,
possible to set the protection in a way that when the permissible harmonic content in
the current of only one single phase is exceeded, not only the phase with the inrush
current but also the remaining phases of the differential stage are blocked. This so-
7SD52 Manual 37
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
called “crossblock” function can be limited in time. Figure 2-11 shows the logic dia-
gram.
The “crossblock” function affects all devices as well, since it extends the inrush re-
straint to all three phases.
Opposite end(s)
Inrush detect. L1
³1 Inrush block. L1
Inrush detect. L2
³1 Inrush block. L2
Inrush detect. L3
³1 Inrush block. L3
Figure 2-11 Logic diagram of the “crossblock” function for one end
Evaluation of The evaluation of measured values is performed separately for each phase. Addition-
Measured Values ally, the residual current is evaluated.
Each device calculates a differential current from the total of the current phasors that
were formed at each end of the protected zone and transmitted to the other ends. The
differential current value is equal to the value of the fault current that is registered by
the differential protection system. In the ideal case it is equal to the fault current value.
In a healthy system the differential current value is low and similar to the charging cur-
rent.
The restraining current counteracts the differential current. It is the total of the maxi-
mum measured errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated from the
actual measured values and power system parameters that were set. Therefore the
highest possible error value of current transformers within the nominal range and/or
the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the current flowing through each end
of the protected object. The total value, including the measured internal errors, is then
transmitted to the other ends. This is the reason why the restraining current is always
an image of the greatest possible measurement error of the entire differential protec-
tion system.
The pickup characteristic of the differential protection (Figure 2-12) derives from the
restraining characteristic Idiff = Irest (45°-curve) that is cut below the setting value I-
DIFF>. It complies with the formula
Irest = I-DIFF> + S (current errors)
If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup limit and the greatest possible
measurement error, the fault must be internal (shaded area in Figure 2-12).
38 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
Idiff
Tripping
I-DIFF> Irest
High-Speed Charge The charge comparison protection function is a differential stage which is superim-
Comparison posed on the current comparison (the actual differential protection). If a high-current
fault occurs, high-speed tripping decision is then possible.
The charge comparison protection function does not sum up the complex current
phasors at the ends of the protected object, but the integral of currents calculated ac-
cording to the following formula:
t2
Q = ò i(t) dt
t1
It includes the integration interval from t1 to t2, for the 7SD52 device determined as a
quarter AC cycle.
The calculated charge Q is a scalar value which is faster to determine and to transmit
than a complex phasor.
The charges of all ends of the protected object are added in the same way as done
with the current phasors of the differential protection. Thus the total of the charges is
available at all ends of the protected zone.
Right after a fault occurrence within the protected zone a charge difference emerges.
For high fault currents which can lead to saturation of current transformers, decision
is made before the saturation begins.
The charge difference of external faults is theoretically equal to zero at the beginning.
The charge comparison protection function immediately detects the external fault and
blocks its own function. If saturation begins in one or more current transformers which
limit the protected zone, blocking remains effective. Thus possible differences result-
ing from the saturation are excluded. Generally it is assumed that an initial saturation
7SD52 Manual 39
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
of current transformers only takes place after the expiration of at least one integration
interval (1/4 cycle) that commenced with the occurrence of a fault.
When the power line is switched on, the pickup value of the charge comparison is au-
tomatically redoubled for a period of approximately 1.5 s. This is to prevent from mal-
function caused by transient current in the CT secondary circuit due to remanence of
the CTs (e.g. during auto-reclosure). This current would simulate a charge value which
is not found in the primary quantities.
Each phase is subject to the charge comparison. Therefore an internal fault (evolving
fault) in a different phase after the external fault occurred is registered immediately.
The functional limitation of the charge comparison is reached in the less probable case
that an internal fault (evolving fault) appears after occurrence of an external fault with
considerable current transformer saturation in the same phase; this must then be de-
tected by the actual differential protection.
Furthermore the charge comparison is influenced by charge currents from lines and
shunt currents from transformers (steady-state and transient) that also cause a charge
difference. Therefore the charge comparison is, as aforesaid, a function suited to com-
plete the differential protection ensuring a fast tripping for high-current short-circuits.
FNo 03525
> Diff block
see Figure 2-14
Diff>> L1
Diff>> L3
–
Diff>> L2
Qrest L1
Qrest L2 + Q>
Qrest L3
1233 I-DIFF>>
&
FNo 03137
Qdiff L1 ³1
Q> I-Diff>> Flt.
Qdiff L2
Qdiff L3
Idiff L1
I> & FNo 03139
Idiff L2 ³1
³1 I-Diff> Flt.
Idiff L3
1213 I-DIF>SWITCH ON
I> &
Diff> L1
Diff> L2
Diff> L3
Rushblock. L1
Rushblock. L2 see Figure 2-14
Rushblock. L3
L1
L2
L3
Switch-on recognition
40 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
Blocking/Inter- The differential protection can be blocked via a binary input. The blocking at one end
blocking of a protected object affects all ends via the communications link (interblocking). If the
overcurrent protection is configured as an emergency function, all devices will auto-
matically switch over to this emergency operation mode.
Pickup of the Differ- Figure 2-13 shows the logic diagram of the differential protection. The phase-segre-
ential Protection gated stages are totalled to phase information. Additionally the device provides infor-
mation of which stage picked up.
As soon as the differential protection function registers a fault within its tripping zone,
the signal “Diff. Gen. Flt.” (general fault detection of the differential protection)
is issued. For the differential protection function itself, this pickup signal is of no con-
cern since the tripping conditions are available at the same time. This signal, however,
is necessary for the initiation of internal or external supplementary functions (e.g. fault
recording, automatic reclosure).
Tripping Logic of The tripping logic of the differential protection combines all decisions of the differential
the Differential Pro- stages and forms output signals which are also influenced by the central tripping logic
tection of the entire device (Figure 2-14).
The pickup signals that identify the concerned stages of the differential protection can
be delayed via the time stage T-DELAY I-DIFF>. Independently from this condition,
a single-phase pickup can be blocked for a short time in order to bridge the transient
oscillations on occurrence of a single earth fault in a resonant-earthed system.
Diff>> L1
from Figure 2-13
FNo 03141
Diff>> L2 Diff. Gen. TRIP
Diff>> L3
1218 T3I0 1PHAS
L1 FNo 03142
L2 =1 Diff TRIP 1p L1
T
L3
FNo 03143
Diff TRIP 1p L2
1217 T-DELAY I-DIFF>
L1 Tripping logic FNo 03144
T 0
L2 of the unit Diff TRIP 1p L3
³1
L3
&
FNo 03145
L1 L1
Diff> L1 Diff TRIP L123
from Figure 2-13
&
L2 L2 FNo 03146
Diff> L2 Diff TRIP 1pole
FNo 03147
& Diff TRIP 3pole
L3 L3
Diff> L3
7SD52 Manual 41
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
The output signals generated by the stages are combined to the output signals
“Diff. Gen. TRIP”, “Diff TRIP 1p L1”, “Diff TRIP 1p L2”, “Diff TRIP 1p
L3”, “Diff TRIP L123” in the tripping logic. Here, the single-pole information indi-
cates that only single-pole tripping is to be carried out. The actual generation of the
commands for the tripping (output) relay is executed within the “Tripping Logic of the
Entire Device” (see Subsection 2.13.4).
General The differential protection can be switched ON or OFF with address 1201 STATE OF
DIFF.. If a single device is switched off at any end of a protective object, the calcula-
tion of measured values becomes impossible. The entire differential protection system
of all ends then is blocked.
Pickup Value of The current sensitivity is set with address 1210 I-DIFF>. It is determined by the en-
Differential Current tire current flowing into a protected zone in case of a fault. This is the total fault current
regardless of how it is distributed between the ends of the protected object.
This pickup value must be set to a value that is higher than the total steady-state shunt
current of the protected object. For cables and long overhead lines, the charging cur-
rent is to be considered in particular. It is calculated from the operational capacitance:
IC = 3.63 · 10–6 · UN · fN · CB' · s
With IC Charging current to be calculated in A primary
UN Rated voltage of the network in kV primary
fN Rated frequency of the network in Hz
CB' Per unit line length service capacitance of the line in nF/km or nF/mile
s Length of the line in km or miles
For lines with multiple ends, the total sum of all line sections is taken as the length.
Considering the variations of voltage and frequency, the value set should be at least
2 to 3 times higher than the calculated charging current. Moreover, the pickup value
should not be less than 15 % of the operating rated current. The operating rated cur-
rent either derives from the rated apparent power of a transformer in the protected
area (see “Topological Data for Transformers (optional)” in Subsection 2.1.4, page 25)
or from the addresses 1104 FullScaleCurr. according to Subsection 2.1.4, “Rated
Values of Protected Lines” (page 25). It must be equal at all ends of the protected ob-
ject.
If setting is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI®, the parameters can be
set either as primary or as secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are set, all
currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
Exemplary calculation:
110 kV single-conductor oil-filled cable 240 mm2 in a 50-Hz-network with the data:
s (length) = 16 km
CB ' = 310 nF/km
Current transformers 600 A/5 A
42 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
If a power transformer with voltage regulation is installed within the protected zone
consider that a differential current may be present even during normal operation, de-
pendent on the position of the tap changer. Therefore it is essential to calculate the
maximum differential current at the end positions of the tap changer and to add this
current to the pickup value setting for I-DIFF> (referred to the rated transformer cur-
rent).
Pickup Value When switching on long, unloaded cables, overhead lines and arc-compensated lines,
during Switch-on considerable higher-frequency transient reactions may occur. Although these are
damped considerably by means of digital filters in the differential protection, a pickup
value I-DIF>SWITCH ON (address 1213) can be set to reliably prevent single-sided
pickup of the protection. This pickup value is always active when a device has recog-
nized the connection of a dead line at its end. For the duration of the seal-in time SI
Time all Cl. which was set with the general protection data under address 1132A
(Subsection 2.1.4 under margin “Circuit Breaker Status”, page 27), all devices are
then switched over to this particular pickup value. A setting to three to four times the
steady-state charging current ensures usually the stability of the protection during
switch-on of the line. For switch-on of a transformer or shunt reactor, an inrush re-
straint is incorporated (see below under Subtitle “Inrush Restraint”, page 44).
Final dynamic checks will be carried out during commissioning (see Subsection
3.3.13).
Delays In special cases of application it may be useful to delay the tripping of the differential
protection with an additional timer, e.g. in case of reverse interlocking. The delay time
T-DELAY I-DIFF> (address 1217A) is only started upon detection of an internal
fault. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
If the differential protection is applied to an isolated or resonant-earthed network, it
must be ensured that tripping is avoided during the transient oscillations of a single
earth fault. With address 1218A T3I0 1PHAS the pickup to a single earth fault is
therefore delayed for 0.04 s. In extended resonant-earthed networks this time should
be increased. Setting the address to ¥ the single-phase tripping is totally suppressed.
This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
Pickup Value of The pickup threshold of the charge comparison stage is set in address 1233 I-
Charge Compari- DIFF>>. The RMS value of the current is decisive. The conversion into charge value
son Stage is carried out by the device itself.
Setting near the operational nominal current is adequate in most cases. Please also
remember that the setting is related to the operational rated values that must be equal
(primary) at all ends of the protected object.
7SD52 Manual 43
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Since this stage reacts very fast, a pickup of capacitive charging currents (for lines)
and inductive magnetizing currents (for transformers or reactors) — also for switch-on
condition — must be excluded.
In resonant-earthed systems also the value of the non-compensated system earth
fault current may not be undershot. It derives from the total capacitive earth fault cur-
rent without considering the Petersen coil. As the Petersen coil serves to compensate
nearly the total earth fault current, its rated current can be taken as a base.
For transformers set the value INTrafo/ukTrafo.
Final dynamic checks will be carried out during commissioning (Subsection 3.3.13).
Inrush Restraint The inrush restraint of the differential protection is only necessary when the devices
are operated on a transformer or on lines which end on transformers. It can be
switched ON and OFF with address 2301 INRUSH REST..
It is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic which exists in the inrush current.
Ex-works a ratio of 15 % of the 2nd HARMONIC I2fN/IfN is set under address 2302,
which can normally be taken over. The fraction necessary for the restraint can how-
ever be changed. In order to be able to achieve a higher degree of restraint in case of
exceptionally unfavourable inrush conditions, you may also set a smaller value.
However, if the local measured current exceeds a value set in address 2305 MAX IN-
RUSH PEAK, there will be no inrush restraint. The peak value is decisive. The set value
should be higher than the maximum inrush current peak value that can be expected.
For transformers a value of above Ö2·INTrafo/ukTrafo can be set. If a line ends on a
transformer, a smaller value may be selected, considering the damping of the current
by the line.
The “crossblock” function can be activated (YES) or deactivated (NO) with address
2303 CROSS BLOCK. The time after exceeding of the current threshold for which this
crossblock is to be activated is set under address 2310 CROSSB 2HM. With setting ¥
the “crossblock” function is always active until the second harmonic content in all
phases has dropped below the set value.
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be
multiplied by 5.
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI®, under “Additional Settings”.
44 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.2 Differential Protection
1218A T3I0 1PHAS 0.00..60.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol.
star-point)
2310 CROSSB 2HM 0.00..60.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec Time for Crossblock with 2nd
harmonic
7SD52 Manual 45
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
46 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping
7SD52 allows to transmit a tripping command created by the local differential protec-
tion to the other end or ends of the protected object (intertripping). Likewise, any de-
sired command of another internal protection function or of an external protection,
monitoring or control equipment can be transmitted for remote tripping.
The reaction when such a command is received can be set individually for each de-
vice. Thus, selection can be made for which end(s) the intertrip command should be
effective.
Commands are transmitted separately for each phase, so that a simultaneous single-
pole auto-reclosure is always possible, provided that devices and circuit breakers are
designed for single-pole tripping.
Transmission The transmission signal can originate from two different sources (Figure 2-15). If the
Circuit parameter I-TRIP SEND is set to YES, each tripping command of the differential pro-
tection is routed immediately to the transmission function “ITrp.sen. L1” to “... L3” (in-
tertrip) and transmitted via the protection data interfaces and communications links.
Furthermore, it is possible to trigger the transmission function via binary inputs (re-
mote tripping). This can be done either separately for each phase via the input func-
tions “>Intertrip L1”, “>Intertrip L2” and “>Intertrip L3”, or for all phases
together (three-pole) via the binary input function “>Intertrip 3pol”. The transmis-
sion signal can be delayed with T-ITRIP BI and prolonged with T-ITRIP PROL BI.
1303 T-ITRIP BI
NO
Diff TRIP L1 YES
Diff TRIP L2
Diff TRIP L3
FNo 03501 ... 03503 ³1
>Intertrip L1 ITrp.sen. L1
T T ITrp.sen. L2
>Intertrip L2 ³1
ITrp.sen. L3
>Intertrip L3
L1
L2
L3
FNo 03504
>Intertrip 3pol
Protection Protection
Data Interface Data Interface
7SD52 Manual 47
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
In order to ensure that the transmission signal reaches all devices in objects with more
than two ends, it is also looped through the protection data interface.
Receiving Circuit On the receiving end the signal can lead to a trip. Alternatively it can also cause an
alarm only. In this way it is possible to determine for each end of the protected object
whether the received signal is to trip at this particular end or not.
Figure 2-16 shows the logic diagram. If the received signal is supposed to cause a trip,
it will be forwarded to the tripping logic. The tripping logic of the entire device (see also
Subsection 2.13.4) ensures, if necessary, that the conditions for single-pole tripping
are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, auto-reclosure function ready).
FNo 03518
1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE
ITrp.TRIP 1p L1
FNo 03519
ITrp.TRIP 1p L2
Trip FNo 03520
³1 ITrp.TRIP 1p L3
Alarm only Tripping logic
Protection Data FNo 03521
Interface
ITrp.TRIP L123
FNo 03522
Diff TRIP 1pole
FNo 03523
Diff TRIP 3pole
FNo 03517
ITrp. Gen. TRIP
Further Facilities Since the signals for remote tripping can be set to cause only an alarm, any other de-
sired signals can be transmitted in this way as well. After the binary input(s) have been
activated, the signals which are set to cause an alarm at the receiving end are trans-
mitted. These alarms can in turn execute any desired actions at the receiving end. It
should be noted that for the transmission of remote alarms and remote commands a
further 24 transmission channels and, in addition, 4 fast transmission channels are op-
tionally available (see also Section 2.6).
48 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping
General The intertrip function for tripping caused by the differential protection can be activated
(YES) or deactivated (NO) with address 1301 I-TRIP SEND. Since the differential pro-
tection devices theoretically operate with the same measured values at all ends of the
protected object, a tripping in the event of an internal fault normally is also carried out
at all ends, regardless of the infeed conditions at the ends. In special cases, i.e. if fault
currents are to be expected near to the pickup threshold, it may occur that one or more
ends do not issue a tripping command due to inevitable device tolerances. For these
cases I-TRIP SEND = YES ensures the tripping at all ends of the protected object.
Intertrip/Remote If the intertrip function is activated, it will automatically start when the differential pro-
Tripping tection trips.
If the relevant binary inputs are allocated and activated by an external source, the in-
tertrip signal is transmitted as well. In this case, the signal to be transmitted can be
delayed with address 1303 T-ITRIP BI. This delay stabilizes the originating signal
against dynamic interferences which may possibly occur on the control cabling. Ad-
dress 1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI is used to extend a signal after it has been effectively
injected from an external source.
The reaction of a device to receiving an intertrip/remote tripping signal is set in ad-
dress 1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE. If it is supposed to cause tripping, Trip must be set.
If the received signal, however, is supposed to cause an alarm only, Alarm only
must be set even if this annunciation is to be further processed externally.
The setting times depend on the individual case of application. A delay is necessary if
the external control signal originates from a disturbed source and a stabilization
seems appropriate. Of course, the control signal has to be longer than the delay for
the signal to be effective. If the signal is processed externally at the receiving end, a
prolongation time might become necessary for the transmitting end so that the reac-
tion desired at the receiving end can be executed reliably.
1303 T-ITRIP BI 0.00..30.00 sec 0.02 sec Delay for intertrip via binary
input
1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Prolongation for intertrip via
bin.input
7SD52 Manual 49
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
50 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
Protection Data For a standard layout of lines with two ends, you require one protection data interface
Topology for each device. This is the protection data interface PI 1 (see also Figure 2-17). The
corresponding protection data interface must be configured as Enabled during con-
figuring the scope of functions (Subsection 2.1.1).
1 2
PI1 PI1
Index 1 Index 2
7SD522 7SD522
Figure 2-17 Differential protection with two 7SD52 devices, each of them having one
protection data interface (transmitter/receiver)
With 7SD523 it is also possible to connect both protection data interfaces with each
other provided the two devices have two protection data interfaces each and the rele-
vant means for transmission are available. This provides for 100 % redundancy as far
as the transmission is concerned (Figure 2-18). The devices autonomously search for
the fastest communication link. If this link is faulty, the devices automatically switch
over to the other link which is then used until the faster one is healthy again.
7SD52 Manual 51
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
1 2
PI1 PI1
Index 1 Index 2
7SD523 7SD523
PI2 PI2
Figure 2-18 Differential protection for two ends with two 7SD523 devices, each of them hav-
ing two protection data interfaces (transmitter/receiver)
For more than two ends, a communication chain or a communication ring can be
formed. A setup with a maximum of six devices is possible.
Figure 2-19 shows a communication chain with four devices. Ends 1 and 2 originate
from the arrangement of the current transformers shown on the left-hand side. Al-
though this is actually only one line end, it should be treated in terms of differential pro-
tection as two ends because the current is measured in two places. This is to make
sure that the transformation errors of both transformer sets are considered by the re-
straint, especially for a high fault current flowing from end 1 to end 2 (external fault).
7SD52
PI1
Index 1
3
7SD523 PI1
Index 2
7SD52
PI2
Index 3
2 PI1
PI1
7SD523
4 Index 4
PI2
The communication chain begins at the protection data interface PI1 of device with in-
dex 1, continues in the device with index 2 at PI1, extents from device with index 2 at
PI2 to the device with index 4, etc. until it reaches the device with index 3 at PI1. The
example shows that the indexing of the devices must not necessarily have to corre-
spond to the sequence of the communication chain. It is also irrelevant which protec-
52 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
tion data interfaces are connected to which protection data interfaces. A device with 1
protection data interface is sufficient at each end of the chain: 7SD522 or 7SD523.
Figure 2-20 shows the same line arrangement as Figure 2-19. The communication
links, however, have been complemented to form a closed ring. A 7SD523 device with
2 protection data interfaces is necessary for each terminal. This communication ring
has the advantage, as compared to the chain shown in Figure 2-19, that the entire
communication system works even if one communications link fails. The devices de-
tect the failure and switch automatically over to the remaining paths of communication.
In this example PI1 is always connected to PI2 of the following device.
By the way, the two above possibilities for two devices can be regarded as special cas-
es of chain and ring: The connection as shown in Figure 2-17 forms a communication
chain with only one chain element, and Figure 2-18 shows a ring which is compressed
into one two-way connection.
1
PI2
7SD523
PI1
Index 1
3
7SD523 PI2
Index 2
PI 1 7SD523
PI1
Index 3
2 PI2
PI1
7SD523
4 Index 4
PI2
Communication The communication is achieved by direct optical fibre connections or via communica-
Media tion networks. Which kind of media is used, depends on the distance and on the com-
munication media available. For shorter distances a direct connection via optical fibres
having a transmission rate of 512 kBit/s is possible. Otherwise we recommend com-
munication converters. A transmission via modem and communication networks can
also be realized. Please take into consideration that the tripping times of the differen-
tial protection devices depend on the transmission quality and that they are prolonged
in case of a reduced transmission quality and /or an increased transmission time.
Figure 2-21 shows some examples for communication connections. In case of a direct
connection the distance depends on the type of the optical fibre. Table 2-2 lists the
available options. Different types of communication modules can be installed in the
devices. For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.
7SD52 Manual 53
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Communication Communication
typical 1.5 km with Converter Converter typical 1.5 km with
62.5/125 µm Multimode fibre 62./125 µm Multimode fibre
o e 7SD52
7SD52 e o
FO5 with 2-wire FO5 with
ST-connector telephone ST-connector
at both ends cable at both ends
Communication Communication
typical 1.5 km with Converter Converter typical 1.5 km with
62.5/125 µm Multimode fibre 62.5/125 µm Multimode fibre
7SD52
o Communication Network e 7SD52
e o
FO5 with FO5 with
ST-connector X.21 or X.21 or ST-connector
at both ends G703.1 or G703.1 or at both ends
S0 (ISDN) S0 (ISDN)
54 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
If communication converters are used, the device and the communication converter
are always linked with a FO5 module via optical fibres. The converters themselves are
available with different interfaces for the connection to the communication network.
For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.
Note:
The redundancy of communication connections (ring topology) requires a consequent
separation of all devices participating in the communication. For example, different
communication routes should not be conducted via the same multiplexer, as there is
no alternative which could be used if the multiplexer should fail.
Establishing the When the devices are linked to each other and switched on, they will automatically es-
Protection Data tablish the protection data communication. The successful link is indicated by an an-
Communication nunciation, e.g. “Rel2 Login”, when relay 1 has contacted relay 2. All devices of a
differential protection system inform each device of the successful communication.
Additionally, the protection data interface is indicated via which a healthy link is estab-
lished.
These are helpful features during commissioning and are described — together with
further commissioning tools — in Subsection 3.3.5. But even during operation, the reg-
ular communication of the devices can be checked.
7SD52 Manual 55
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Transmission time jumps that, for example, can occur in case of switchover in the
communication network are recognized (e.g. “PI1 jump”, FNo 03254 for interface 1)
and corrected by the devices. The differential protection system continues to operate
without loss of sensitivity. The transmission times are measured again and actualized
within less than 2 seconds. If GPS-synchronization (with satellite receiver) is used,
asymmetric transmission times are recognized and corrected immediately.
The permissible transmission time difference can be set. This has a direct influence
on the sensitivity of the differential protection system. The automatic self-restraint of
the protection adapts the restraint quantities to these differences so that a spurious
operation of the differential protection due to these influences is prevented. Thus,
higher difference values reduce the sensitivity of the protection, which may be notice-
able in case of very low-current faults. With GPS-synchronization, transmission time
differences do not affect the sensitivity of the protection as long as GPS-synchroniza-
tion is intact. When the GPS-synchronization detects that the permissible time differ-
ence is exceeded during operation, the message “PI 1 PD unsym.” (FNo 03250
for interface 1) will be issued.
When a transmission time jump exceeds the maximum permissible transmission time,
this is annunciated. If transmission time jumps occur frequently the regular operation
of the differential protection is no longer ensured. The differential protection can be
blocked (selectable). An alarm is issued (e.g. “PI1 unsym.”, FNo 03256 for interface
1). This blocking can only be cancelled via a binary input (e.g. “>SYNC PI1 RESET”,
FNo 03252 for interface 1).
Changeover of During protection test, plant inspection, but also during operational switch-off of a
Operating Mode feeder, it is possible to change the operating mode of a devices in order to perform
such work without effect on running operation.
The following modes are available:
· Log out device: logging out a device from the differential protection system with the
circuit breaker being switched off. The differential protection continues to be active
at the other end(s); thus, the other end(s) may remain switched on. As the local cir-
cuit breaker is open (as well as the line disconnector) revision work can be done at
the local feeder without affecting operation at the other end(s).
This mode can also be set via a binary input (FNo 03451 “>Logout”) if this has
been configured when allocating the binary inputs.
· Test mode: All currents from the other devices are set to zero in the local device.
Thus the local device has been isolated from the differential protection system and
can be checked. If the device has been logged out before (see above), all the other
devices can operate normally. Otherwise, the differential protection system is
blocked in all linked devices. Emergency operation with time overcurrent protection
is feasible.
· Commissioning mode: All tripping commands of the differential protection system
are blocked. The differential system as an entity can be checked using primary or
secondary values.
56 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
General about The protection data interfaces connect the devices with the communication media.
Protection Data The communication is permanently monitored by the devices. Address 1509 T-DATA
Interfaces DISTURB defines after which delay time the user is informed about faulty or missing
data telegrams. Address 1510 T-DATAFAIL is used to set the time after which a
transmission failure alarm is output. Address 1512 Td ResetRemote determines
how long time remote information remains standing after a transmission fault has been
cleared.
Protection Data The protection data interface 1 can be switched ON or OFF with address 1501 STATE
Interface 1 PROT I 1. If it is switched OFF, this corresponds to a transmission failure. In case of
a ring topology, the differential protection and all functions which require the transmis-
sion of data, can continue their operation, but not in case of a chain topology.
In address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER, set the transmission media that you want to con-
nect to protection data interface PI 1. The following media are possible:
F.optic direct, i.e. communication directly by fibre-optic cable with 512 kBit/s;
Com conv 64 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 64 kBit/s (G703.1 or X.21);
Com conv 128 kB, i.e. via communication converters 128 kBit/s (X.21) or 2-wire
copper bidirectional;
Com conv 512 kB, i.e. via communication converters 512 kBit/s (X.21).
The possibilities may vary for the different device versions. The data must be identical
at both ends of a communication route.
The setting depends on the features of the communication media. As a general rule,
it can be stated that the higher the transmission rate the shorter the response time of
the differential protection system.
The devices measure and monitor the transmission times. Deviations are corrected,
as long as they are within the permissible range. These permissible ranges are set un-
der addresses 1505A and 1506A and can normally be left at their default values.
The maximum permissible transmission time (address 1505A PROT 1 T-DELAY) is
preset to a value that does not exceed the usual delay of communication networks.
This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”. If it is
exceeded during operation (e.g. because of switchover to a different transmission
route), the message “PI1 TD alarm” (FNo 03239) will be issued. Increased trans-
mission times only have an impact on the tripping time of the differential protection
system.
The maximum transmission time difference (outgoing telegram vs. return telegram)
can be altered in address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.. This parameter can only be al-
tered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”. With a direct fibre-optic connection,
this value can be set to 0. For transmission via communication networks a higher val-
ue is needed. The standard value is 100 µs (presetting). The permissible transmission
time difference has a direct influence on the sensitivity of the differential protection.
If GPS-synchronization is used this value is relevant only in case the GPS-signal is
missing. As soon as the GPS-synchronization is restored the transmission time differ-
ences are compensated again. As long as GPS-synchronization is intact transmission
time differences do not affect the sensitivity of the protection.
Address 1511 PI1 SYNCMODE is only relevant if GPS-synchronization is used. It de-
termines the conditions for differential protection operation when the protection data
communication has been re-established (initially or after transmission failure):
7SD52 Manual 57
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
· PI1 SYNCMODE = TEL or GPS means that the differential protection will become
active as soon as the protection communication has been established (data tele-
grams are received). Until the GPS-synchronization is effective, the differential pro-
tection operates with increased self-restraint determined by the maximum transmis-
sion time difference without GPS (address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.).
· PI1 SYNCMODE = TEL and GPS means that the differential protection is active,
after reception of proper protection data telegrams, first when GPS-synchronization
has taken place. The operator can determine by manual acknowledgement (via a
binary input) that the differential protection starts operation with increased self-
restraint determined by the maximum transmission time difference without GPS
(address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.). When the GPS-synchronization is re-estab-
lished, full sensitivity is regained since transmission time differences are compen-
sated by the GPS-synchronization.
· PI1 SYNCMODE = GPS SYNC OFF means that no GPS-synchronization takes place
for this protection data interface. This is meaningful if no transmission time differ-
ences are expected (e.g. for fibre-optic direct data link). This setting option can also
be used to remove this protection data interface from the GPS synchronization.
You can determine a limit for the permissible rate of faulty protection data telegrams
under address 1513A PROT1 max ERROR. This parameter can only be altered with
DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”. The preset value 1 % means that one faulty tel-
egram per 100 telegrams is permissible. The sum of telegrams in both directions is
decisive.
If frequent transmission time jumps occur the regular operation of the differential pro-
tection is endangered. Under address 1515A PI1 BLOCK UNSYM you can decide
whether the differential protection shall be blocked in this case. This parameter can
only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”. Normal setting is YES (pre-
setting).
Protection Data If protection data interface 2 exists and is used, the same possibilities apply as for pro-
Interface 2 tection data interface 1. The corresponding parameters are set with addresses 1601
STATE PROT I 2 (ON or OFF), 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER, 1605A PROT 2 T-DELAY,
and 1606A PROT 2 UNSYM.. Here again, the last two settings can only be changed
with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”. If GPS-synchronization is used, address
1611 PI2 SYNCMODE applies, too. The maximum permissible rate of faulty protection
data telegrams PROT2 max ERROR (address 1613A) and the reaction to impermis-
sible transmission time difference PI2 BLOCK UNSYM (address 1615A) (blocking of
differential protection YES or NO) can also be changed under “Additional Settings”.
GPS Satellite If GPS synchronization (order option) is used, this synchronization mode can be
Synchronization switched ON or OFF in address 1801 GPS-SYNC..
Address 1803A TD GPS FAILD is used to set the delay time after which an alarm is
output “GPS loss” (FNo 03247) after a GPS failure is detected.
Further parameters concerning GPS-synchronization were set for the individual pro-
tection data interfaces (see above).
Protection Data First of all, define your protection data communication topology: number the devices
Topology consecutively. This number is a consecutive device index that serves for your own
overview. It starts for each differential protection system (i.e. for each protected object)
with 1. For the differential protection system the device with index 1 is always the tim-
58 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
ing master, i.e. the absolute time management of all devices which belong together
depends on the absolute time management of this device. As a result the time infor-
mation of all devices is comparable at all times. The device index serves for unique
definition of the devices within the differential protection system (i.e. for one protected
object).
Allocate also an identification number (device-ID) for each device. The device-ID is
used by the communication system to identify each individual device. It must be be-
tween 1 and 65534 and must be unique within the communication system. The ID
number identifies the devices in the communication system since the exchange of in-
formation between several differential protection systems (thus also for several pro-
tected objects) can be performed via the same communication system.
Please make sure that the possible communications links and the existing interfaces
are in accordance with each other. If not all devices are equipped with two protection
data interfaces, those with only one protection data interface must be located at the
ends of the communication chain. In Figure 2-19 these are the devices with index 1
and 3. A ring topology is only possible, if all devices of a differential protection system
provide two protection data interfaces.
If you use different physical interfaces and/or communication links ensure that each
protection data interface is compatible with the planed communication link.
For a protected object with two ends (e.g. a line) the addresses 1701 ID OF RELAY
1 and 1702 ID OF RELAY 2 are set, e.g. for device 1 the device-ID 16 and for device
2 the device-ID 17 (Figure 2-22, compare also with Figures 2-17 and 2-18). The indi-
ces of the devices and the device-IDs do not have to match here, as mentioned above.
Figure 2-22 Differential protection topology for 2 ends with 2 devices — example
For a protected object with more than two ends (and corresponding number of devic-
es), the further devices are assigned to their device IDs with the parameter addresses
1703 ID OF RELAY 3, 1704 ID OF RELAY 4, 1705 ID OF RELAY 5, and 1706
7SD52 Manual 59
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Figure 2-23 Differential protection topology for 4 ends with 4 devices — example
Finally, you enter in address 1710 LOCAL RELAY the index of the actual local device.
Enter the index of each device (according the consecutive numbering used). Each in-
dex from 1 to the entire number of devices must be used only once, none must be
used twice.
Make sure that the settings of the differential protection topology for the complete dif-
ferential protection system are consistent:
· Each device index must only be used once.
· Each device index must be assigned unambiguously to one device ID.
· Each device index must be the index of a local device once.
· The device with index 1 is the source for the absolute time management (timing
master).
· The number of devices must be equal at all devices.
During the start-up of the protection system, the above listed conditions are checked.
If one out of these conditions is not fulfilled, no differential protection operation is pos-
sible. The device signals “DT inconsistent” (“Device table inconsistent”).
60 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI®, under “Additional Settings”.
Protection Data
Interfaces
1510 T-DATAFAIL 0.0..60.0 sec 6.0 sec Time del for transmission failure
alarm
1512 Td ResetRemote 0.00..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec Remote signal RESET DELAY
for comm.fail
1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER Direct connection with fibre Direct connection Connection 1 over
optic cable with fibre optic
Communication converter cable
with 64 kBit/s
Communication converter
with 128 kBit/s
Communication converter
with 512 kBit/s
1506A PROT 1 UNSYM. 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 1: Diff. in send and receive
time
1511 PI1 SYNCMODE Telegram and GPS Telegram and PI1 Synchronizationmode
Telegram or GPS GPS
GPS synchronization OFF
1515A PI1 BLOCK UNSYM YES YES Prot.1: Block. due to unsym.
NO delay time
1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER Direct connection with fibre Direct connection Connection 2 over
optic cable with fibre optic
Communication converter cable
with 64 kBit/s
Communication converter
with 128 kBit/s
Communication converter
with 512 kBit/s
7SD52 Manual 61
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
1611 PI2 SYNCMODE Telegram and GPS Telegram and PI2 Synchronizationmode
Telegram or GPS GPS
GPS synchronization OFF
1615A PI2 BLOCK UNSYM YES YES Prot.2: Block. due to unsym.
NO delay time
1803A TD GPS FAILD 0.5..60.0 sec 2.1 sec Delay time for local GPS-pulse
loss
Topological Data
62 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology
Protection Data
Interfaces
7SD52 Manual 63
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Topological Data
64 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.5 Direct Local Trip
Direct Trip of the Any signal from an external protection, monitoring or control device can be injected
Local Circuit into the processing of 7SD52 via binary inputs. It can be delayed, output as an alarm
Breaker and be routed to one or more output relays. Figure 2-24 shows the logic diagram. If
the devices and circuit breakers are designed for single-pole control, single-pole trip-
ping is possible. The tripping logic of the device ensures that the conditions for single-
pole tripping are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, reclosure function
ready).
The direct local trip can be switched on and off by parameters, and blocked via a bi-
nary input.
A precondition for the direct local trip is that during the configuration of the functions
(Subsection 2.1.1) DTT Direct Trip = Enabled has been configured in address
122. It can also be switched ON and OFF with address 2201 FCT Direct Trip.
For direct local trip a trip time delay can be set in address 2202 Trip Time DELAY.
This delay can be used as a grading margin.
A tripping command which has been issued is maintained for at least the minimum trip-
ping command duration TMin TRIP CMD which was configured for the device in ad-
dress 240A (Subsection 2.1.2). This ensures that the circuit breaker can be operated
reliably even if the control pulse is very short.
7SD52 Manual 65
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
2202 Trip Time DELAY 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.01 sec Trip Time Delay
04417 >DTT Trip L123 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT 3ph L123
66 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
7SD52 allows the transmission of up to 28 items of binary information of any type from
one device to the others via the communications links provided for protection tasks.
Four of them are transmitted like protection signals with high priority, i.e. very fast, and
are therefore especially suitable for the transmission of external protection and trip sig-
nals which are generated outside of 7SD52. The other 24 are transmitted in the back-
ground and are therefore suitable for any information that does not depend on high-
speed transmission, such as information on the events taking place in a substation
which may also be useful in other substations as well. See also for Technical Data in
Section 4.4.
The information is injected into the device via binary inputs and can be output at the
other ends again via binary outputs. The integrated user-defined CFC logic allows to
perform on both the transmitting and the receiving side logical operations on the sig-
nals and on other information from the device’s protection and monitoring functions.
Also an internal indication can be assigned via CFC to a transmission input and trans-
mitted to the remote end(s).
The binary outputs and the binary inputs to be used must be allocated appropriately
during the configuration of the inputs and outputs. The 4 high-priority signals are in-
jected into the device via the binary inputs “>Remote Trip1” to “>Remote Trip4”,
are transmitted to the devices at the other ends and can be processed at each receiv-
ing side with the output functions “RemoteTrip1 rec” to “RemoteTrip4 rec”.
The other 24 items of information are injected into the device via the binary inputs
“>Rem. Signal 1” to “>Rem.Signal24” and are available under “Rem.Sig
1recv” to “Rem.Sig24recv” at each receiving end.
When allocating the binary inputs and outputs with DIGSI® you can provide the infor-
mation to be transmitted with your own designation. If, for example, a line has a unit
connected power transformer at one end and you wish to transmit trip by the Buchholz
protection to the other end, you may use the input “>Remote Trip1” and designate
it “>Buchholz Trip”. At the other end, you designate the incoming information
“RemoteTrip1 rec” as “Buchholz remote” and assign it to an output trip relay. In
case of Buchholz protection trip the annunciations will then be given according to your
designations.
Even devices that have logged out functionally (Subsection 2.4.1 under margin
“Changeover of Operating Mode”) can send and receive remote information and com-
mands.
The annunciations “Relx Login” of the topology exploration can be used to deter-
mine whether the signals of the sending devices are still available. They are issued if
device x is involved in the communication topology and this state is stable.
Once a transmission fault has been detected, the time Td ResetRemote at address
1512 is started for resetting the remote signals.
No further settings are required for the transmission of binary information. Each device
sends the injected information to all other devices at the ends of the protected object.
Where a selection is necessary, it will have to be carried out via appropriate routing
and, if necessary, a logical operation at the receiving side.
7SD52 Manual 67
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
68 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
7SD52 Manual 69
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
I>>> Stage The pickup of the I>>> stage measures each phase current and compares it to the set-
ting value I>>>. The currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental
component is evaluated. This high-current pickup is practically unaffected by DC com-
ponents in the fault current as well as in the secondary current after switching off high
currents. If the setting value is exceeded by more than twice its value, the stage will
automatically use the peak value of the unfiltered measured quantity so that extremely
short command times are possible.
This stage is only enabled when the local circuit breaker is closed while all remaining
line ends of the protected object are open. The devices exchange the status of their
respective circuit breakers continuously via the communication link. If the protected
object is already live (from a different end) the stage is not effective. An indispensable
precondition for the functioning of the I>>> stage is that the auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breakers are connected at all ends of the protected object and allocated to the
relevant binary inputs. If this is not the case, this stage is not effective. The central
function control communicates the information of the circuit breaker position to the
high-current instantaneous tripping (see also Subsection 2.13.2).
Figure 2-25 shows the logic diagram. The I>>> stage at the bottom of the diagram op-
erates separately for each phase. During the manual closing of the circuit breaker all
three phases are enabled via the internal signal “SOTF enab. L123” which is issued
by the central functional control of the protection, provided that the manual closing can
be recognized there (see Section 2.13).
Tripping can also be enabled separately for each phase by the signals “SOTF enab.
Lx”. This applies also to e.g. automatic reclosure after single-pole tripping. Then,
single-pole tripping with this stage is possible, but only if the device is designed for
single-pole tripping.
I>>>> Stage The I>>>> stage trips regardless of the position of the circuit breakers. Here, the cur-
rents are also numerically filtered and the peak-value of the currents is measured from
the double setting value onwards. Figure 2-25 shows the logic diagram in the upper
part.
Therefore, this stage is used when current grading is possible. This is possible with a
small source impedance and at the same time a high impedance of the protected ob-
ject (example can be found with the advice on setting, Subsection 2.7.2).
The I>>>> stage is enabled automatically by the current-step monitoring dI/dt of the de-
vice for a duration of 50 ms. This stage operates separately for each phase.
70 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection
2405 I>>>>
A precondition for the use of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function
is that during the configuration of the device functions (Subsection 2.1.1) HS/SOTF-
O/C = Enabled has been configured in address 124. It can also be switched ON and
OFF with address 2401 FCT HS/SOTF-O/C.
I>>> Stage The magnitude of fault current which leads to the pickup of the I>>> stage is set as
I>>> in address 2404. This stage is active only during the connecting of local end
while the circuit breakers at all other ends of the protected object are open. Choose a
value which is high enough for the protection not to pickup on the RMS value of the
inrush current produced during the connection of the protected object. On the other
hand, fault currents flowing through the protected object need not be considered.
During setting with a personal computer and DIGSI® the values can be entered in pri-
mary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents are
converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
I>>>> Stage The I>>>> stage (address 2405A) works regardless of the circuit breaker position.
Since it trips extremely fast it must be set high enough not to pickup on a fault current
flowing through the protected object. This means that it can be used only if the protect-
ed object allows current grading, as is the case with transformers, series reactors or
long lines with small source impedance. In other cases it is set to ¥ (default setting).
This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
7SD52 Manual 71
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
During setting with a personal computer and DIGSI® 4 the values can be entered in
primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents
are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
Exemplary calculation:
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data:
s (length) = 60 km
R1/s = 0.19 W/km
X1/s = 0.42 W/km
Short-circuit power at the feeding end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, since the I>>>> stage can respond to the first
peak value)
Current transformers 600 A/5 A
From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated:
Z1/s = Ö0.192 + 0.422 W/km = 0.46 W/km
ZL = 0.46 W/km · 60 km = 27.66 W
2 2
110 kV
Z S = ------------------------------ = 3.46 W
3500 MVA
The three-phase short-circuit current at the line end is I"sc end (with source voltage
1.1·UN):
1.1 × U N 1.1 × 110 kV
I" sc end = ------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- = 2245 A
3 × (ZV + ZL ) 3 × (3.46 W + 27.66 W )
i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2470 A (primary) or 20.6 A (secondary) you can
be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. This line can be discon-
nected immediately.
Note: The calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently pre-
cise for overhead lines. Only if the angles of the source impedance and the line im-
pedance vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.
72 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be
multiplied by 5.
Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI®,
under “Additional Settings”.
7SD52 Manual 73
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
General Informa- The 7SD52 has a time overcurrent protection function which can be used as either a
tion back-up or an emergency overcurrent protection.
Whereas the differential protection can only operate correctly if each device receives
the protection data of the other devices properly, the emergency overcurrent protec-
tion requires only the local currents. The emergency overcurrent protection is auto-
matically activated when the data communication of the differential protection is dis-
turbed (emergency operation) and the differential protection is blocked as a result.
This means that emergency operation will replace the differential protection for short-
circuit protection if the protection data communication fails and cannot be re-estab-
lished by a data bypass (e.g. in a ring topology).
If the overcurrent protection is set as a backup overcurrent protection, it will work in-
dependently of other protection and monitoring functions, i.e. also independently of
the differential protection. The backup overcurrent protection can also be used as sole
short-circuit protection if no suitable channels for the communication between the pro-
tection devices are available during the initial commissioning.
The overcurrent protection has a total of four stages for each phase current and for
the residual current; these are:
· Two overcurrent stages with independent trip time (definite time overcurrent protec-
tion),
· One overcurrent stage with current-dependent trip time (inverse time overcurrent
protection),
· A further overcurrent stage which has an additional enable input and can therefore
be used as an emergency stage e.g. if the remaining stages are used as backup
stages, or as a stub protection.
These four stages do not depend on one another and can be combined as desired.
Blocking from external criteria is possible via binary inputs just like instantaneous trip-
ping. It is also possible to switch to any one or more of the stages if the protected ob-
ject is switched onto a fault. The stages not required can be deactivated by setting the
pickup value to ¥.
Measured Quanti- The phase currents are fed to the device via the input transformers of the measure-
ties ment input. The residual current 3·I0 is either measured directly or calculated, de-
pending on the version ordered and the use of the device’s fourth current input I4.
If I4 is connected to the starpoint of the current transformer set, the residual current
will be available directly as measured quantity.
If I4 is connected to a separate residual current transformer, this will be used, while
considering the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, see Subsection 2.1.2) of the “Power
System Data 1”.
74 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
If the residual current is not connected to the fourth current input I4 (address 220 I4
transformer = Not connected, see Subsection 2.1.2 under margin “Connection
of the Currents”), the device will calculate the residual current from the phase currents.
Of course, all three phase currents of three star-connected current transformers must
be available and connected in this case.
Definite Time High- Each phase current is compared with the setting value Iph>> after numerical filtering;
current Stage I>> the residual current is compared with 3I0>> PICKUP. Currents above the associated
pickup value are detected and annunciated. When the relevant delay time T Iph>>
or T 3I0>> has expired, a tripping command is issued. The reset value is approxi-
mately 5 % less than the pickup value, but at least 1.5 % of the rated current below it.
Figure 2-26 shows the logic diagram of the I>> stages. They can be blocked via the
binary input “>BLOCK O/C I>>”. In addition, the residual current stage can be
blocked separately via the binary input “>BLOCK O/C Ie>>”, e.g. during a single-pole
dead time before reclosure in order to avoid a spurious tripping with the zero phase-
sequence system which is present then.
I>> PU L1
I>> PU L2
IL1 T 0
I>> PU L3
Iph>> &
IL2
³1 I>> TRIP L1
IL3
I>> TRIP L2
I>> TRIP L3
&
L1
L2
L3
I>> PU E
IE
3I0>> T 0
& ³1 I>> TRIP E
&
E
FNo 07107
>BLOCK O/C Ie>>
FNo 07104
>BLOCK O/C I>>
2614 I>> Telep/BI
FNo 07110 YES
>O/C InstTRIP ³1
NO
Switching YES
onto a T 0
fault NO
7SD52 Manual 75
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
The binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” and the function block “Switch onto fault” are the
same for all stages and explained in detail below. They can, however, affect the phase
and/ or residual stages separately. This can be achieved with two parameters:
· I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether an instantaneous tripping without
delay of this stage is possible (YES) via the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” or im-
possible (NO). This parameter is also used for instantaneous tripping before auto-
matic reclosure.
· I>> SOTF (address 2615) defines whether an instantaneous tripping is to be per-
formed by this stage (YES) or not (NO) if the line is switched onto a fault.
Definite Time Over- The logic of the overcurrent stages I> is designed like the I>> stages, except that in all
current Stage I> designations Iph>> is replaced by Iph> and 3I0>> PICKUP by 3I0>.
Inverse Time Over- The logic of the current-dependent (inverse time) stage operates basically like the
current Stage Ip other stages. However, the time delay is calculated here based on the type of the set
characteristic (parameter IEC Curve), the intensity of the current and a time multi-
plier (Figure 2-27). A preselection of the possible characteristics has been made dur-
ing the configuration of the protection functions. Moreover, a constant additional time
T Ip Add or T 3I0p Add can be selected which is added to the current-dependent
time. The possible characteristics are shown in Section 4.6 in the Technical Data.
Figure 2-27 shows the logic diagram. Here, exemplary setting addresses for the IEC
characteristics are shown. The setting notes (Subsection 2.8.2) explain the various
setting addresses in detail.
76 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
Ip PU L1
Ip PU L2
Ip PU L3
IL1
t
IL2 IP & T 0
IL3 I ³1 Ip TRIP L1
Ip TRIP L2
Ip TRIP L3
2646 T Ip Add
T 3I0P
&
L1
L2
L3
Ip PU E
IE
T 0 t
3I0P
& ³1 Ip TRIP E
I
&
FNo 07109
>BLOCK O/C Iep
FNo 07106
>BLOCK O/C Ip
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI
FNo 07110 YES
>O/C InstTRIP ³1
NO
Switching YES
onto a T 0
fault NO
Additional Overcur- The additional definite time or instantaneous overcurrent stage I-STUB has an extra
rent Stage I-STUB enable input (Figure 2-28) and is therefore also suitable e.g. as a stub protection or as
an emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as backup stages. The enable
input “>I-STUB ENABLE” can be assigned to the output signal “Emer. mode” (either
via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions). The stage
is then automatically active when the differential protection is not effective, e.g. due to
a data disturbance.
7SD52 Manual 77
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
The I-STUB stage can, however, also be used as a standard additional and independ-
ent overcurrent stage, since it works independent of the other stages. In this case, the
release input “>I-STUB ENABLE” must be permanently activated (via a binary input
or CFC).
I-STUB PU L1
I-STUB PU L2
IL1 T 0 I-STUB PU L3
Iph &
IL2
³1 I-STUB TRIP L1
IL3
I-STUB TRIP L2
I-STUB TRIP L3
&
L1
L2
L3
3I0> STUB 2632 2633 T 3I0 STUB
I-STUB PU E
IE
3I0 & T 0
³1 I-STUB TRIP E
&
E
FNo 07132
>BLOCK O/CIe>>>
FNo 07130
>BLOCK I-STUB
FNo 07131 ³1
>I-STUB ENABLE
Switching YES
onto a T 0
fault NO
Instantaneous If automatic reclosure is to be carried out, a rapid clearing of the fault is usually desir-
Tripping before able before reclosure. A “ready for reclosure” signal from an external automatic reclos-
Automatic ure device can be injected via binary input “>O/C InstTRIP”. The internal automatic
Reclosure reclosure function — if existent — acts on this input as well. Any stage of the overcur-
rent protection can thus perform an instantaneous trip before reclosure via the param-
eters I...Telep/BI.
78 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
Switching onto a To perform an instantaneous trip when the circuit breaker is manually closed onto a
Dead Fault dead fault, the manual closing command of the control discrepancy switch can be fed
to the device via a binary input. The overcurrent protection then performs a three-pole
trip with no or almost no delay. The stage(s) for which the instantaneous trip after man-
ual closing is valid are determined by parameters (see also logic diagrams Figure 2-
26, 2-27 and 2-28).
Pickup and Trip- The pickup signals of the individual phases (or the residual) and of the stages are
ping Logic linked in such a way that both the phase information and the stage which has picked
up are output (Table 2-3).
For the tripping signals, the stage which caused the tripping is output as well. For
single-pole tripping, the pole is identified (see also Subsection 2.13.4 Tripping Logic
of the Entire Device).
7SD52 Manual 79
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
General During the configuration of the device functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, address 126)
Information the available characteristics have been pre-selected. Depending on the configuration
and depending on the version ordered, only those parameters are accessible which
are valid for the available characteristics.
Address 2601 is set according to the desired mode of operation of the overcurrent
protection: Operating Mode = ON means that the overcurrent protection works in-
dependently of other protection functions, i.e. as a backup overcurrent protection. If it
is to work only as an emergency function in case of a transmission failure, Only Em-
er. prot must be set. Finally, it can also be set to OFF.
If some stages are not needed, those not needed can be deactivated by setting the
pickup value to ¥. But if you set only an associated time delay to ¥ this does not sup-
press the pickup signals but prevents the timers from running.
The I-STUB stage is even effective if Only Emer. prot has been set for the oper-
ating mode of the overcurrent protection.
One or several stages can be set as instantaneous tripping stages when switching
onto a fault. This is chosen during the setting of the individual stages (see below). To
avoid a spurious tripping due to transient overcurrents a delay SOTF Time DELAY
(address 2680) can be set. Normally the default setting 0.00 is correct. A short delay
can be useful in case of long cables for which high inrush currents can be expected,
or for transformers. This delay depends on the intensity and duration the of the trans-
ient phenomena and on the stages used for the instantaneous tripping.
High-Current The I>> stages Iph>> (address 2610) and 3I0>> PICKUP (address 2612) together
Stages Iph>>, 3I0>> with the I> stages or the Ip stages result in a two-stage characteristic. Of course, all
Definite Time three stages can be combined as well. If a stage is not required, the pickup value is
set to ¥. The I>> stages always operate with a defined delay.
If the I>> stages are used for instantaneous tripping before the automatic reclosure,
the current-setting corresponds to the I> or Ip stages. In this case only the different de-
lay times are of interest. The times T Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address
2613) can than be set to 0.00 or a very low value, as the fast clearance of the fault
takes priority over the selectivity before the automatic reclosure is initiated. These
stages have to be blocked before final trip in order to achieve the selectivity.
For very long lines with a small source impedance or on applications with large reac-
tances (e.g. transformers, series reactors), the I>> stages can also be used for current
grading. In this case they must be set in such a way that they do not pick up in case
of a fault at the end of the line. The times can then be set to 0.00 or to a small value.
During the parameterization from a personal computer using DIGSI®, the parameters
can be set as primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all
currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
Exemplary calculation:
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data:
s (length) = 60 km
R1/s = 0.19 W/km
X1/s = 0.42 W/km
80 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
The three-phase fault current at the line end is Isc End (presumed source EMF =
1.1·UN):
1.1 × U N 1, 1 × 110 kV
I scEnd = ------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- = 2150 A
3 × ( ZS + ZL ) 3 × ( 4.84 W + 27.66 W )
i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary) you can
be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. It can be disconnected
by the overcurrent protection immediately.
Note: the calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise
for overhead lines. Only if the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance
vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.
A similar calculation can be carried out for ground faults, with the maximum earth cur-
rent occurring at the line end during a short-circuit being decisive.
The set times are pure additional delays which do not include the inherent operating
time of the protection.
The parameter I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether the time delays T
Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address 2613) can be bypassed by the binary
input “>O/C InstTRIP” (FNo 07110) or by the operational automatic reclosure func-
tion. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protec-
tion. With I>> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I>> stages trip without delay after
pickup if the binary input was activated. For I>> Telep/BI = NO the set delays are
always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function
should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since
the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-
reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-
selective trip, even before auto-reclosure.
If the I>> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched onto a
fault) or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to
“General Information” above), set the parameter I>> SOTF (address 2615) to YES.
Any other stage can be selected as well for this instantaneous tripping.
7SD52 Manual 81
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Overcurrent Stages For the setting of the current pickup value, Iph> (address 2620), the maximum oper-
Iph>, 3I0> ating current is most decisive. Pickup through overload must be excluded, since the
Definite Time device works in this operating mode as a short-circuit protection, not as an overload
protection, and the command times are relatively short. The pickup value should
therefore be set to a higher value than the maximum (over-)load to be expected, i.e.
approx. 10 % for lines and approximately 20 % for transformers and motors.
During configuration from a personal computer using DIGSI® the parameters can be
set either to primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all cur-
rents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
Exemplary calculation:
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 as above:
Maximum transmitted power
Pmax = 120 MVA corresponding to
Imax = 630 A
Current transformers 600 A/5 A
Safety factor 1.1
With settings in primary quantities the following setting value is calculated:
Setting value I> = 1.1 · 630 A = 693 A
With settings in secondary quantities the following setting value is calculated:
630 A
Setting value I> = 1.1 × ---------------- × 5 A = 5.8 A
600 A
The residual current stage 3I0> (address 2622) should be set to detect the smallest
ground fault current to be expected.
The time delay T Iph> (address 2621) results from the time grading schedule de-
signed for the network. For use as an emergency overcurrent protection, shorter delay
times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this
function is to work only in case of an interruption of the protection data communication
of the differential protection system.
The time T 3I0> (address 2623) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate
time grading schedule for residual currents.
The set times are mere additional delays for the independent stages, which do not in-
clude the inherent operating time of the protection. If only the phase currents are to be
monitored for a stage, set the pickup value of the residual current stage to ¥.
The parameter I> Telep/BI (address 2624) defines whether the time delays T
Iph> (address 2621) and T 3I0> (address 2623) can be bypassed by the binary
input “>O/C InstTRIP” (FNo 07110) or by the operational automatic reclosure func-
tion. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protec-
tion. With I> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I> stages trip without delay after
pickup if the binary input was activated. For I> Telep/BI = NO the set delays are
always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function
should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since
the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-
reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection must not perform a non-
selective trip, even before auto-reclosure.
82 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
If the I> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched onto a fault,
or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to “General
Information” above), set the parameter I> SOTF (address 2625) to YES. However,
the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong
fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the
selected stage on switching on must be avoided.
Overcurrent Stages Various characteristics can be chosen for the inverse time stages, depending on the
IP, 3I0P the configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address 126). For Back-Up O/C = TOC IEC, the
Inverse Time with following IEC characteristics are available under address 2660 IEC Curve:
IEC Characteristics
Normal Inverse (Type A in accordance with IEC 60255–3),
Very Inverse (Type B in accordance with IEC 60255–3),
Extremely Inv. (Type C in accordance with IEC 60255–3), and
LongTimeInverse (Type B in accordance with IEC 60255–3).
The characteristics and the formulae on which they are based, are shown in the Tech-
nical Data (Section 4.6).
The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values Ip> (address 2640)
and 3I0p PICKUP (address 2650). It should be noted that a safety margin has al-
ready been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the pro-
tection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %.
Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can
be set here:
Primary: Setting value Ip> = 630 A,
Secondary: Setting value Ip> = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) · 5 A.
The time multiplier T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) derives from the time grading
schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter
delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since
this function is to work only in case of an interruption of the protection data communi-
cation of the differential protection.
The time multiplier T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) can normally be set shorter,
according to a separate time grading schedule for residual currents. If only the phase
currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the residual current stage to ¥.
In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if
necessary. The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p
Add (address 2656 for residual current) are added to the times of the set characteris-
tics.
The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays
T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) including the additional time T Ip Add (address
2646) and T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) including the additional time T 3I0p
Add (address 2656) can be bypassed by the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” (FNo
07110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocat-
ed) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/BI
= YES you define that the IPstages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was
activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instantane-
ous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the
overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection
guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the overcurrent
7SD52 Manual 83
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
protection as a backup protection must not perform a non-selective trip, even before
auto-reclosure.
If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched
onto a fault, or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer
to “General Information” above), set the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671)
to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sen-
sitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and
transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided.
Overcurrent Stages Various characteristics can be chosen for the inverse time stages, depending on the
IP, 3I0P configuration (Subsection 2.1.1, address 126). For Back-Up O/C = TOC ANSI, the
Inverse Time with following ANSI characteristics are available under address 2661 ANSI Curve:
ANSI Characteris-
Inverse,
tics
Short Inverse,
Long Inverse,
Moderately Inv.,
Very Inverse,
Extremely Inv. and
Definite Inv.
The characteristics and the formulae on which they are based, are shown in the Tech-
nical Data (Section 4.6).
The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values Ip> (address 2640)
and 3I0p PICKUP (address 2650). It should be noted that a safety margin has al-
ready been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the pro-
tection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %.
Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can
be set here:
Primary: setting value Ip> = 630 A,
Secondary: setting value Ip> = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) · 5 A.
The time multiplier Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) derives from the time grading
schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter
delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since
this function is to work only in the case of an interruption of the data communication of
the differential protection.
The time multiplier TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) can normally be set shorter,
according to a separate time grading schedule for residual currents. If only the phase
currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the residual current stage to ¥.
In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if
necessary. The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p
Add (address 2656 for residual current) are added to the times of the set characteris-
tics.
The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays
Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) including the additional time T Ip Add (ad-
dress 2646) and TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) including the additional time T
3I0p Add (address 2656) can be bypassed by the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP”
(FNo 07110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if
84 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p
Tele/BI = YES you define that the IP stages trip without delay after pickup if the bi-
nary input was activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always ac-
tive. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be
chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential
protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the
overcurrent protection as a back-up protection must not perform a non-selective trip,
even before auto-reclosure.
If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched
onto a fault) or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer
to “General Information” above), set the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671)
to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sen-
sitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and
transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided.
Additional Stage The I-STUB stage can be used as an additional definite time overcurrent stage, since
I-STUB it works independently of the other stages. In this case, the enable input “>I-STUB
ENABLE” (FNo 07131) must be activated permanently (via a binary input or CFC). Al-
ternatively, it can be used as a stub bus protection. In this case, the enable input “>I-
STUB ENABLE” is activated by the indication of the open line disconnector.
Since the I-STUB stage has an additional enable input, it is also suitable e.g. as an
emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as backup stages. The release in-
put “>I-STUB ENABLE” (FNo 07131) can be assigned the output signal “Emer.
mode” (FNo 02054) (either via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic
CFC functions).
The considerations for the use of the I-STUB stage as an emergency function are the
same as for the I> stages. The setting value Iph> STUB (address 2630) must here
too be higher than the maximum operational current to be expected, in order to avoid
pickup without fault. The delay T Iph STUB (address 2631), however, can be shorter
than defined in the time grading schedule, since this stage works only in emergency
operation, i.e. in case of a communication failure of the differential protection. Normal-
ly, one time step above the base time of the differential protection is sufficient.
The residual current stage 3I0> STUB (address 2632) should correspondingly pick
up on the smallest residual current to be expected during a ground fault and the delay
T 3I0 STUB (address 2633) should exceed the base time of the differential protec-
tion by a grading time. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup
value of the ground fault stage to ¥.
The I-STUB stage can also be accelerated by the enable signal “>O/C InstTRIP”
(FNo 07110), e.g. before an auto-reclosure. This is defined with parameter I-STUB
Telep/BI (address 2634). Set it on YES if the I-STUB stage is to trip without delay
as long as the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” is activated or the internal auto-reclos-
ure function is ready to operate. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclos-
ure should only be chosen if the I-STUB stage is set as an emergency function. If the
differential protection is out of operation, this emergency stage guarantees instanta-
neous tripping before auto-reclosure.
Instantaneous tripping when the line is switched onto a fault is also possible with the
I-STUB stage. Set parameter I-STUB SOTF (address 2635) to YES, if instantaneous
tripping is desired.
7SD52 Manual 85
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be
multiplied by 5.
Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI®,
under “Additional Settings”.
2680 SOTF Time DELAY 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
2652 T 3I0p TimeDial 0.05..3.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec T 3I0p Time Dial
2656 T 3I0p Add 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T 3I0p Additional Time Delay
86 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
2631 T Iph STUB 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.30 sec T Iph STUB Time delay
2633 T 3I0 STUB 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec T 3I0 STUB Time delay
7SD52 Manual 87
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
88 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.9 Automatic Reclosure
Experience shows that about 85 % of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished
automatically after being tripped by the protection. The line can therefore be reclosed.
Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclosure function (AR). An example of the
normal time sequence of a double-shot reclosure is shown in Figure 2-29.
Automatic reclosure is only permitted on overhead lines because the possibility of
automatic extinguishing of a fault arc only exists there. It must not be used in any other
case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equip-
ment (e.g. overhead line in block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), it must be
ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the overhead
line.
If the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, a single-pole trip followed by
an auto-reclosure is often initiated in the case of single-phase faults and a three-pole
trip with auto-reclosure in the case of multi-phase faults in the network with earthed
system starpoint. If the fault still exists after reclosure (arc not extinguished or metallic
short-circuit), the protection issues a final trip. Repeated reclosure attempts are made
in some networks.
In the version with single-pole tripping, 7SD52 allows phase-segregated, single-pole
tripping. A single- and three-pole, single and multiple shot automatic reclosure func-
tion is integrated, depending on the order version.
7SD52 can also operate together with an external automatic reclosure device. In this
case the signal exchange between 7SD52 and the external reclosure device must
take place via the binary inputs and outputs.
It is also possible to have the integrated automatic reclosure function controlled by an
external protection (e.g. alternate protection). The use of two 7SD52 with auto-reclos-
ure or the use of one 7SD52 with auto-reclosure and a second protection with its own
auto-reclosure are equally possible.
Pickup
aborted aborted
Action
time
Trip
command
dead time dead time
Close 1st reclosure 2nd reclosure
command
Figure 2-29 Timing diagram of a double-shot reclosure with action time (2nd reclosure successful)
7SD52 Manual 89
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Switching On and The automatic reclosure function can be switched on and off, by means of the param-
Off eter 3401 AUTO RECLOSE, or via the system interface (if available) or via binary input
(if this is allocated). The switched state is saved internally (refer to Figure 2-30) and
secured against loss of auxiliary supply. It is only possible to switch on from the source
where previously it had been switched off from. To be active, it is necessary that the
function is switched on from all three switching sources.
Alteration of the switching state via setting or the system interface is not possible dur-
ing a running fault.
Selectivity before In order for the automatic reclosure to be successful, all faults on the whole overhead
Reclosure line must be cleared at all line ends at the same — as short as possible — time. This
is the usual case in differential protection schemes because the strict selective zone
definition of the protected object by the current transformer sets always allows unde-
layed tripping.
However, fast tripping of the protection may also be desired before reclosure after trip-
ping by other short-circuit protection functions. For this purpose, every short-circuit
protection which can start the automatic reclosure function has the possibility of initi-
ating undelayed tripping in at least one stage when the automatic reclosure function
is ready for the first reclosure cycle.
Fast tripping before reclosure is also possible for multiple reclosures. Appropriate links
between the output messages (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: “AR 2.CycZoneRel”) and
the inputs for undelayed tripping of the protective functions can be established via the
binary inputs and outputs or the integrated user-definable logic functions (CFC).
90 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.9 Automatic Reclosure
Start Starting the automatic reclosure function means storing the first trip signal of a system
fault generated by a protection function operating with automatic reclosure. In the case
of multiple reclosure, starting therefore only takes place once which is with the first trip
command. Storing this signal is the prerequisite for all subsequent activities of the au-
tomatic reclosure function.
The starting is important when the first trip command has not appeared before expiry
of an action time (see below under “Action Times”).
Automatic reclosure is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least
one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP-cycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be
achieved by setting parameters. See also subtitle “Interrogation of Circuit Breaker
Ready” (page 93).
Setting parameters can be used for every short-circuit protection function to determine
whether or not this is to operate with reclosure, i.e. whether or not it is to start the
automatic reclosure function. The same applies accordingly for trip commands which
are applied externally via binary inputs and/or generated by transfer trip signals/re-
mote tripping.
The protection and monitoring functions of the device which do not react to short-
circuit-like phenomena do not start the automatic reclosure because reclosure is of no
use here. In 7SD52, for example, this is the overload protection. The breaker failure
protection must not start the auto-reclosure either.
Action Times It is often desirable to suppress the readiness for reclosure if the short-circuit has ex-
isted for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned in to such
an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic extinguishing during the
dead time. For reasons of selectivity also (see above), frequently faults with delayed
trip should not lead to reclosure.
The automatic reclosure function of 7SD52 can be operated with or without action
times (configuration parameter AR control mode, address 134, see Subsection
2.1.1). Provision of a pickup signal is not necessary from the protective functions or
external protection equipment if the auto-reclosure function is operated without action
time. Starting of the auto-reclosure takes place then as soon as the first trip command
appears.
In operation with action time, an action time is available for each reclosure cycle. The
action times are always started by the pickup signals linked with OR of all protective
functions which can start the automatic reclosure function. If there is still no trip com-
mand available at the end of an action time, the corresponding reclosure cycle cannot
be performed.
For each reclosure cycle, it can be set whether or not it allows a start. With the first
general fault detection, only those action times the cycles of which allow a start have
a meaning because the other cycles may not start. Using the action times and the start
permission you can control which cycles can be run under different command time
conditions.
Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the
first cycle. It is assumed that the action times are set as follows:
1.AR: T-ACTION = 0.2 s;
2.AR: T-ACTION = 0.8 s;
3.AR: T-ACTION = 1.2 s;
Since reclosure is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip of a time overcurrent pro-
tection following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. The automatic
7SD52 Manual 91
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
reclosure function is started as a result. After unsuccessful reclosure the 2nd cycle
would then become active; but the time overcurrent protection would not trip in this ex-
ample until after 1 s according to its grading time. Since the action time for the second
cycle was exceeded here, it is blocked. The 3rd cycle with its parameters is therefore
performed now. If the trip command after the 1st reclosure had not appeared within
1.2 s after the 1st reclosure, there would be no further reclosure.
Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is only allowed for the first.
The action times are set as in example 1.
The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st
cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the automatic reclosure func-
tion. However, the 2nd and 3rd cycles cannot take place because they are not set to
start. There is therefore no reclosure, because no starting at all can take place.
Example 3: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the
first two cycles. The action times are set as in example 1.
The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st
cycle has already expired at this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosure function
but the 2nd cycle, for which starting is allowed, is activated immediately. This starts
the automatic reclosure function, the 1st cycle is practically skipped.
Control Modes of The dead times — these are the times from elimination of the fault (drop off of the trip
the Automatic command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the initiation of the automatic close
Reclosure command — may vary, depending on the automatic reclosure control mode selected
when determining the function scope (Subsection 2.1.1, address 134 AR control
mode) and the resulting signals of the starting protective functions.
In the Trip... control mode single-pole or single/three-pole reclosure cycles are pos-
sible if the device and the circuit breaker are suitable for single-pole trip. In this case
different dead times after single-pole tripping on the one hand and after three-pole trip-
ping on the other hand are possible (for every reclosure cycle). The tripping protective
function determines the type of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. Control of the dead
time depends on this.
In the Pickup... control mode, different dead times can be set for every reclosure
cycle after single-, two- and three-phase faults. Decisive here is the pickup situation
of the protective functions at the instant the trip command disappears. This control
mode enables the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault in the case
of three-pole reclosure cycles.
Blocking Reclosure Different events lead to blocking of automatic reclosure. No reclosure is possible for
example if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosure has not yet been
started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclosure cycle is already in progress, dynamic
lockout takes place (see below).
Every cycle can also be blocked individually by a binary input. In this case the cycle
concerned is invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible cycles. If block-
ing takes place while the cycle concerned is in progress, this leads to aborting of the
reclosure, i.e. no reclosure takes place even if other valid cycles have been parame-
terized.
Internal blockings restricted with certain time periods are processed during the course
of reclosure cycles:
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM begins with every automatic reclosure command. If the
reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic reclosure return to the idle
92 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.9 Automatic Reclosure
state at the end of the reclaim time; a fault after expiry of the reclaim time is treated as
a new fault in the network. Re-tripping of a protective function within the reclaim time
initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclos-
ure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful in the case of re-tripping
within the reclaim time. The automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically.
The dynamic lock-out locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic lock-out time
(0.5 s). This occurs for example after a final tripping or other events which block the
automatic reclosure after it has been started. Restarting is blocked for this time. When
this time has elapsed, the automatic reclosure returns to its idle position and is ready
to process a new fault in the network.
If the circuit breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch connected
to a binary input, via the integrated control functions, or via the system interface, see
also Subsection 2.13.1), the automatic reclosure is blocked for a manual-close-block-
ing time T-BLOCK MC. When a trip command is given during this time, it can be as-
sumed that a metallic short-circuit be present (e.g. closed earthing isolator). Every trip
command within this time is therefore final. With the user definable logic functions
(CFC) further control functions can be processed in the same way as a manual-close
command.
Interrogation of Precondition for a reclose attempt after trip is that the circuit breaker is ready for at
Circuit Breaker least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP-cycle at the instant the automatic reclosure function is
Ready started (i.e. before the first trip command). The ready status of the circuit breaker is
signalled to the device through the binary input “>CB1 Ready” (FNo 00371). If no
such signal is available, the circuit breaker interrogation can be suppressed (preset-
ting) because otherwise automatic reclosure would not be possible at all.
This interrogation usually suffices for a single reclosure scheme. Since, for example,
the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker mechanism drops after the
trip, no further interrogation should take place.
It is of advantage, particularly in the case of multiple reclosure, to check the ready sta-
tus of the circuit breaker not only at the instant of the first trip command but also before
every subsequent reclosure. The reclosure is blocked as long as the CB does not in-
dicate its ready status for another CLOSE-TRIP-cycle.
The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 7SD52. This moni-
toring time CB TIME OUT begins as soon as the CB ready signal becomes inactive.
The dead time may be extended if no readiness is signalled at the end of it. However,
if the circuit breaker does not indicate its ready status for a longer period than the mon-
itoring time, reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under subtitle “Block-
ing Reclosure” page 92).
Processing the If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the
Auxiliary Contact circuit breaker is also checked for plausibility.
Position of the
In the case of individual control of the individual breaker poles this concerns each in-
Circuit Breaker
dividual breaker pole. This assumes that the auxiliary contacts are connected to the
appropriate binary inputs for each pole (“>CB1 Pole L1”, FNo 00366); “>CB1 Pole
L2”, FNo 00367); and “>CB1 Pole L3”, (FNo 00368).
If the series connections of the make and break auxiliary contacts are connected in-
stead of the individual pole auxiliary contacts, the CB is assumed to have all poles
open when the series connection of the break contacts is closed (binary input “>CB1
3p Open”, FNo 00411). It is assumed to have all poles closed when the series con-
7SD52 Manual 93
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
nection of the make contacts is closed (binary input “>CB1 3p Closed”, FNo 00410).
If none of these input messages is active, it is assumed that the breaker is open at one
pole (even if this condition also exists theoretically when two poles are open).
The device checks the position of the circuit breaker continuously: As long as the aux-
iliary contacts indicate that the CB is not closed (three-pole), the automatic reclosure
function cannot be started. This guarantees that a close command can only be given
when the CB was previously tripped (out of the closed state).
The valid dead time begins when the trip command disappears or signals taken from
the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB (pole) has opened.
If the CB opens three-pole after a single-pole trip command, this is considered as a
three-pole tripping. If three-pole reclosure cycles are allowed, the dead time for three-
pole tripping becomes active in the control mode with trip command (see above under
subtitle “Control Modes of the Automatic Reclosure”, page 92); in control by pickup,
the pickup configuration of the starting protective function(s) is still decisive. If three-
pole cycles are not allowed, the reclosure is locked out dynamically. The trip command
then was final.
The latter also applies if the CB is tripped at two poles after a single-pole trip com-
mand. The device only detects this if the auxiliary contacts for each pole are connect-
ed individually. The device couples the poles immediately resulting in a three-pole trip
command.
If the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that at least one further pole has opened during
the dead time after single-pole tripping, a three-pole reclosure cycle is initiated with
the dead time for three-pole reclosure provided this is permitted. If the auxiliary con-
tacts are connected for each pole individually, the device can detect a two-pole open
CB. In this case the device immediately sends a three-pole trip command provided the
forced three-pole trip is activated (see below under subtitle “Forced Three-pole Trip”,
page 97).
Sequence of a If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips all three poles for
Three-pole all faults within the stages parameterized for auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure
Auto-reclose Cycle function is started. When the trip command drops off or the circuit breaker opens (aux-
iliary contact criterion) an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time
the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) re-
claim time is started. If AR control mode = Pickup ... was set under address 134
during configuration of the protective functions, different dead times can be parame-
terized depending on the type of fault detected by the protection.
If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all
functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared.
If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protec-
tion initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure.
Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final tripping.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is locked out dy-
namically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 92).
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD52 multiple reclos-
ure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
94 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.9 Automatic Reclosure
Sequence of a Single-pole auto-reclosure cycles are only possible if the device includes the option
Single-pole for single-pole tripping and this had been enabled in the protective function configura-
Auto-reclose Cycle tion (address 110, see also Subsection 2.1.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also
be suitable for single-pole tripping.
If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-pole for all
single-phase faults within the stages parameterized for reclosure. It can also be deter-
mined, by setting (address 1156A Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 2.1.4), that
single-pole tripping should take place for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole trip-
ping is of course only possible by short-circuit protective functions which can deter-
mine the faulty phase.
In the case of multi-phase faults, the short-circuit protection performs a final three-pole
trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Every three-pole tripping is
final. The automatic reclosure is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle
“Blocking Reclosure”, page 92).
The automatic reclosure is started in the case of single-pole tripping. The (adjustable)
dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle starts with drop-off of the trip com-
mand or opening of the circuit breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). At the end of
this dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (ad-
justable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time fol-
lowing a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option
(“Forced Three-pole Trip”, see below, page 97).
If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all
functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared.
If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protec-
tion initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure.
Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final three-pole tripping.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dy-
namically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 92).
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD52 multiple reclos-
ure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Sequence of a This operating mode is only possible if the device includes the option for single-pole
Single and Three- tripping and this had been enabled in the protective functions configuration (address
pole Auto- 110, see also Subsection 2.1.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable
reclosure for single-pole tripping.
If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-pole for
single-phase faults within the stage(s) configured for automatic reclosure and three-
pole for multi-phase faults. It can also be determined, by setting (address 1156A
Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 2.1.4), that single-pole tripping should take place
for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole tripping is of course only possible for
short-circuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. The stages
parameterized for reclosure apply for all fault types.
The automatic reclosure is started at the moment of tripping. Depending on the type
of fault the (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle or the (sep-
arately adjustable) dead time for the three-pole auto-reclosure cycle starts with the
drop off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole). At the end of the
dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjust-
able) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following
7SD52 Manual 95
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (“Forced
Three-pole Trip”, page 97).
If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all
functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared.
If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protec-
tion initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without auto-
reclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final three-pole tripping.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure is blocked dynam-
ically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 92).
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In 7SD52 multiple reclosure
(up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Multiple Auto- If a fault still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be made.
reclosure Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function integrat-
ed in 7SD52.
The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate
action and dead times, can operate with single- or three-pole trip and can be blocked
separately via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth
cycle also apply for the fifth cycle and further cycles.
The sequence is in principle the same as in the different reclosure programs described
above. However, in this case, if the first reclosure attempt was unsuccessful, the re-
closure is not blocked but the next reclosure cycle begins. The respective dead time
starts with drop-off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (auxil-
iary contact criterion). The circuit breaker receives a further close command after this.
At the same time the reclaim time is started.
Until the set maximum number of permissible auto-reclose cycles has been reached,
the reclaim time is reset with every new trip command after reclosure and started
again with the next close command.
If one of the cycles is successful, i.e. the fault has been eliminated after reclosure, the
reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent states. The fault is
cleared.
If none of the cycles is successful, the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole
trip after the last permissible reclosure, following a protection stage active without
auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under
subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 92).
Handling If single-pole or single- and three-pole reclosure cycles are executed in the network,
Evolving Faults particular attention must be paid to evolving faults.
Evolving faults are faults which occur during the dead time after clearance of the first
fault.
There are various ways of handling evolving faults in the 7SD52 depending on the re-
quirements of the network:
For detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of a pro-
tective function during the dead time or every further fault detection (pickup) is the cri-
terion for an evolving fault.
96 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.9 Automatic Reclosure
There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal auto-
reclose function to a detected evolving fault.
a) EV. FLT. MODE Stops AutoRecl:
The reclosure is blocked as soon as a evolving fault is detected. Tripping caused
by the evolving fault is three-pole. This applies irrespective of whether three-pole
cycles have been permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the
auto-reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Re-
closure”, page 92).
b) EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR:
As soon as an evolving fault is detected the auto-reclosure function is switched over
to a cycle for three-pole auto-reclosure. Every trip command is three-pole. The sep-
arately settable dead time for evolving faults begins with elimination of the evolving
fault; after this the circuit breaker receives a close command. The further procedure
is the same as for single- and three-pole cycles.
The complete dead time in this case consists of the part of the dead time for the
single-pole reclosure up to the elimination of the evolving fault plus the dead time
for the evolving fault. This is useful because the duration of the dead time after the
three-pole tripping is essential for the stability of the network.
If auto-reclosure is blocked due to an evolving fault without the protection issuing a
three-pole trip command (e.g. for evolving fault detection with pickup), the device can
send a three-pole trip command so that the circuit breaker does not remain open with
one pole (“Forced Three-pole Trip”).
Forced Three-pole If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole
Trip trip command having been initiated, the breaker would remain open at one pole. In
most cases, the circuit breaker is equipped with a pole discrepancy supervision which
will trip the remaining poles after a few seconds. You can achieve by a setting param-
eter that the tripping logic of the device sends immediately a three-pole trip command
in this case. This forced three-pole trip pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of
the CB because the forced three-pole trip of the device is initiated as soon as the re-
closure is blocked following a single-pole trip or if the CB auxiliary contacts report an
implausible breaker state.
When different internal protection functions of the device initiate a single-pole trip in
different phases the device will issue a three-pole trip command due to the tripping
logic of the entire device (Subsection 2.13.4), independent of this forced three-pole trip
function. This is true also for trip commands given via the direct local trip inputs (Sec-
tion 2.5 or the reception of a remote trip (Section 2.6) since theses signals are passed
through the tripping logic of the entire device.
But, when the device issues a single-pole trip command while an external single-pole
trip signal reaches the device via one of the binary inputs “>Trip Lx AR” then this is
not routed to the tripping logic but only to the auto-reclosure function. In this case,
three-pole trip is ensured only if the forced three-pole trip is effective.
The forced three-pole trip is also initiated when only three-pole cycles are allowed but
a single-pole open position is indicated externally through the binary inputs.
7SD52 Manual 97
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
Dead Line Check If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear after tripping on a fault,
(DLC) auto-reclosure can be prevented. This presupposes that the voltage transformers are
installed on the line side and connected to the device. This has to be in accordance
with the configuration described in Subsection 2.1.1. The dead line check must be
switched active. The automatic reclosure function then checks the disconnected line
for no-voltage. This requires an adequate measuring time within the dead time. If the
voltage has not disappeared the reclosure is blocked dynamically.
This dead-line check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind gener-
ator) is connected along the line.
Adaptive In all the previous possibilities it has been assumed that defined and equal dead times
Dead Time (ADT) have been set at all line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or auto-reclos-
ure cycles.
It is also possible to set the dead times at one line end only and to configure the adap-
tive dead time at all other ends. This presumes that voltage transformers are arranged
on the line side and connected to the device.
Figure 2-31 shows an example. It is assumed that the device I is operating with de-
fined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is configured at position II. It is im-
portant that the line is fed at least from busbar A, i.e. the side with the defined dead
times.
With the adaptive dead time the automatic reclosure function at the line end II decides
independently whether and when reclosure is useful and permissible and when it is
not. The criterion is the line voltage at end II, which was re-applied from end I following
reclosure there. Reclosure therefore takes place at end II as soon as it is detected that
voltage has been re-applied to the line from end I.
In the illustrated example, the line is disconnected at positions I and II. In I reclosure
takes place after the parameterized dead time.
If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line A–B is re-connected to the
voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses
after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is ended.
If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), the line
is re-connected at I but no healthy voltage appears at II. The device there detects this
and does not reclose.
In the case of multiple reclosure the process may be repeated at I several times until
one of the reclosure attempts is successful or a final trip takes place.
I Diff–zone II A, B busbars
(defined dead times) (ADT) I, II relay locations
98 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2.9 Automatic Reclosure
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages:
· The circuit breaker at position II is not reclosed at all if the fault persists and is not
unnecessarily stressed as a result.
· With non-selective tripping on an external fault due to an overreaching time-graded
protection at position I no further auto-reclosure attempts occur at position II be-
cause the fault current path via busbar B and position II remains interrupted even
after several reclosure attempts at I.
· At position I overreaching is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in
the case of final tripping because the open breaker at position II forms the limit of
any overreaching zone at I.
Close Command With close command transmission the dead times are only set at one line end. The
Transmission other ends are set to “adaptive dead time”. The latter only react to the received close
(Remote Close) commands from the transmitting end.
The transmission of the close command at the transmitting line end is delayed until it
is sure that the local reclosure was successful. This means a further possible local
fault detection is checked after reclosure. This prevents unnecessary closing at the re-
mote end on the one hand but also extends the time until reclosure takes place there.
This is not critical for a single-pole auto-reclosure or in radial or meshed networks be-
cause no stability problems are to be expected.
In the 7SD52 relay the existing protection data interfaces are used to transmit the
close command.
Connecting an If 7SD52 is to work with an external reclosure device, specific binary inputs and out-
External Auto- puts must be taken into consideration. The following inputs and outputs are recom-
Reclosure Device mended to be used:
Binary inputs:
00383 >Enable ARzones Through this binary input the external reclosure device
controls stages of the individual protective functions be-
ing active before reclosure (e.g. accelerated stages).
The input can be omitted if no accelerated stage is re-
quired (e.g. differential protection, see also above under
subtitle “Selectivity before Reclosure”, page 90).
00382>Only 1ph AR The external reclosure device is programmed only as 1-
pole; the stages of the individual protective functions be-
ing active before reclosure are activated via FNo 383
only in the case of single-phase faults; in the case of mul-
tiple-phase faults the corresponding stages are not en-
abled. The input can be omitted if no overreaching stage
is required (e.g. differential protection, see also above
under subtitle “Selectivity before Reclosure”, page 90).
7SD52 Manual 99
C53000–G1176–C132–4
2 Functions
00381>1p Trip Perm The external reclosure device allows 1-pole tripping (log-
ic inversion or 3-pole coupling). If the input is not activat-
ed or not allocated, 3-pole tripping takes place by the
protective functions for every fault type. If the external re-
closure device cannot supply this signal but supplies a
“3-pole coupling” signal instead, this must be taken into
account in the allocation of the binary inputs: The signal
must be inverted there (L-active = active without volt-
age).
Binary outputs:
00501Relay PICKUP General pickup of the device (if required by the external
auto-reclosure device).
00515Relay TRIP 3ph. General trip of the device 3-pole,
00512Relay TRIP 1pL1 Trip of the device 1-pole L1.
00515Relay TRIP 3ph. General trip of the device 3-pole,
00513Relay TRIP 1pL2 Trip of the device 1-pole L2.
00515Relay TRIP 3ph. General trip of the device 3-pole,
00514Relay TRIP 1pL3 Trip of the device 1-pole L3.
In order to obtain a phase-segregated trip indication, the respective single-pole trip
commands must be combined with the three-pole trip commands as one output.
Figure 2-32 shows the interconnection between 7SD52 and an external reclosure de-
vice with a program selector switch, as a connection example.
Depending on the requirement of the external reclosure device, the three single-pole
outputs (FNo 00512, 00513, 00514) can be combined into one “single-pole tripping”-
output, the FNo 00515 sends the “three-pole tripping” signal to the external AR de-
vice.
For exclusively three-pole auto-reclosure cycles, the general pickup (FNo 00501, if re-
quired by the external reclosure device) and general trip signal (FNo 00511) from
7SD52 (see Figure 2-33) usually suffice.
external
7SD52 AR device
Relay PICKUP
L+ L–
>Enable ARzones
L+
>Only 1ph AR
L– L–
3-pole
1-pole 1-/3-pole
Selector
L+ switch
Figure 2-32 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 1-/3-pole AR with
mode selector switch
external
7SD52 AR device
Relay PICKUP
Relay TRIP
L+ L–
>Enable ARzones
L– L+
Figure 2-33 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 3-pole AR
Control of the Inter- If 7SD52 is equipped with the internal automatic reclosure function, this can also be
nal Auto-Reclosure controlled by an external protection device. This is useful for example for line ends with
by an External redundant protection or backup protection when the second protection is used for the
Protection Device same line end and is to work with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the
7SD52.
Specific binary inputs and outputs must be considered in this case. It must be decided
whether the internal auto-reclosure is to be controlled by the starting (pickup) or by the
trip command of the external protection (see also above under “Control Modes of the
Automatic Reclosure“, page 92).
If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and out-
puts are recommended to be used:
The auto-reclosure is started via the binary inputs:
02711 >AR Start general fault detection (pickup) for the automatic reclosure
(only required for action time),
02712 >Trip L1 AR trip command L1 for automatic reclosure,
02713 >Trip L2 AR trip command L2 for automatic reclosure,
02714 >Trip L3 AR trip command L3 for automatic reclosure.
The general fault detection is decisive for starting the action times. It is also necessary
if the automatic reclosure is to detect evolving faults by fault detection. In other cases
this input information is superfluous.
The trip commands decide whether the dead time for single-pole or three-pole auto-
reclosure cycles is activated or whether the reclosure is blocked in three-pole tripping
(depending on the parameterization of dead times).
Figure 2-34 shows the interconnection between the internal automatic reclosure of
7SD52 and an external protection device, as a connection example for single- and
three-pole auto-reclosure.
To couple the external protection three-pole and to release its accelerated stages be-
fore reclosure if necessary, the following output functions are suitable:
02864 AR 1p Trip Perm internal automatic reclosure ready for 1-pole reclose
cycle, i.e. allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion of the
3-pole coupling).
02889 AR 1.CycZoneRel internal automatic reclosure ready for the first reclose
cycle, i.e. enables the stage of the external protection
decisive for reclosure, the corresponding outputs can
be used for other cycles. The output can be omitted if
the external protection does not require an overreach
stage (e.g. differential protection).
02820 AR Program1polei internal automatic reclosure is programmed for single-
pole AR, i.e. only reclosures after single-pole tripping.
The output can be omitted if no overreach stage is used
(e.g. differential protection).
Instead of the individual phase-dedicated trip commands, the single-pole and three-
pole tripping can be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure — provided the ex-
ternal protection device supports it —, i.e. you can assign the following binary inputs
of the 7SD52:
02711 >AR Start general fault detection for the internal automatic
reclosure (only required for action time),
02715 >Trip 1p for AR trip command 1-pole for the internal automatic reclos-
ure,
02716 >Trip 3p for AR trip command 3-pole for the internal automatic reclos-
ure.
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup >AR Start
Tripping L1 >Trip L1 AR
Tripping L2 >Trip L2 AR
Tripping L3 >Trip L3 AR
L+ L–
Enable AR-stages AR 1.CycZoneRel
(if nec. for further AR)
L– L–
Figure 2-34 Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure;
AR control mode = Trip
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup >AR Start
L+ L–
Figure 2-35 Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure;
AR control mode = Trip
If only three-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the bi-
nary input “>Trip 3p for AR” (FNo 02716) for the trip signal. Figure 2-35 shows an
example. Any overreaching stages of the external protection are enabled again by “AR
1.CycZoneRel” (FNo 02889) and of further cycles if applicable.
If the internal automatic reclosure function is controlled by the pickup, the phase-
dedicated pickup signals of the external protection must be connected if distinction
shall be made between different types of fault. The general trip command is sufficient
to indicate tripping (FNo 02746). Figures 2-36 and 2-37 show connection examples.
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup L1 >Pickup L1 AR
Pickup L2 >Pickup L2 AR
Pickup L3 >Pickup L3 AR
L+ L–
Enable AR-stage AR 1.CycZoneRel
(if nec. for other AR)
L– L+
Figure 2-36 Connection example with external protection device for fault detection depend-
ent dead time — dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device for
each phase;
AR control mode = Pickup
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup 1-phase >Pickup 1ph AR
L+ L–
Enable AR Stage AR 1.CycZoneRel
(if nec. for other AR)
L– L+
Figure 2-37 Connection example with external protection device for fault detection depend-
ent dead time — dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device
1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase;
AR control mode = Pickup
2 Protection If redundant protection is provided for a feeder and each protection operates with its
Systems with 2 own automatic reclosure function, certain signal exchanges are necessary between
Automatic Reclo- the two protection systems. The connection example in Figure 2-38 shows the neces-
sure Functions sary cross-connections.
If the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are connected phase segregated, a
three-phase coupling is guaranteed when more than one CB pole is tripped by the
7SD52. This requires that the three-pole intertrip is activated (see Subsection 2.9.2
under subtitle “Forced Three-pole Trip”, page 97). An external automatic three-pole
coupling is therefore unnecessary if the above conditions are satisfied. This prevents
two-pole tripping under all circumstances.
BI >Trip L1 AR Trip L1 BI
BI >Trip L2 AR Trip L2 BI
BI >Trip L3 AR Trip L3 BI
L– L–
Prot. function
L+ 2nd prot. device L+
SO Pickup*) Pickup SO
L+ L+
Relay TRIP 1pL1
K Relay TRIP 3ph. Trip L1 C
BI – Binary input
SO – Signal output
C – Commands
*) – for all protective functions
L1 L2 L3
operating with AR to circuit breaker
Figure 2-38 Connection example for 2 protection devices with 2 auto-reclosure functions
General If no reclosure is required on the feeder for which the differential protection 7SD52 is
used (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure func-
tion must be disabled during configuration (see Subsection 2.1.1, address 133). The
automatic reclosure is then totally removed, i.e. the automatic reclosure is not proc-
essed in the 7SD52. No signals are generated, binary inputs for the automatic reclos-
ure are ignored. All parameters for setting the automatic reclosure are inaccessible
and insignificant.
If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure is to be used, the type of reclos-
ure must be set in the configuration of the device scope (see Subsection 2.1.1) under
address 133 Auto Reclose and the AR control mode under address 134.
Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the integrated automatic reclosure func-
tion of 7SD52. Whereas the settings in the addresses 3401 to 3441 are common to
all reclosure cycles, the individual settings of the cycles are made from address 3450
onwards. You can set different individual parameters for the first four reclosure cycles.
The same parameters of the fourth cycle apply to the fifth cycle and further.
Under address 3401 AUTO RECLOSE the automatic reclosure function can be
switched ON or OFF.
Prerequisite for an automatic reclosure being possible after trip on a fault is that the
circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP-CLOSE-TRIP-cycle at the instant the
auto-reclosure is started (i.e. at the initiation of the first trip command). The ready
status of the circuit breaker is indicated to the device through the binary input “>CB1
Ready” (FNo 00371). If no such signal is available, leave the setting under address
3402 CB? 1.TRIP = NO because otherwise no auto-reclosure would be possible at
all. If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set CB? 1.TRIP = YES.
Furthermore, the ready status of the circuit breaker can be interrogated before every
reclosure. This is stated when setting the individual reclosure cycles (see below).
To check the ready status of the circuit breaker is regained during the dead times, you
can set a circuit breaker ready monitor time under address 3409 CB TIME OUT. The
time is set slightly longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIP-
CLOSE-TRIP-cycle. If the circuit breaker has not been ready again within this time,
there is no reclosure, the auto-reclosure is blocked dynamically.
Waiting for the circuit breaker charge mechanism can lead to a lengthening of the
dead times. Interrogation of a synchronism check (if used) can also delay reclosure.
To avoid uncontrolled prolongation you can set a maximum extension of the dead time
in this case under address 3411A T-DEAD EXT.. This extension is unlimited if you
set ¥. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after three-pole tripping when
no stability problems occur or a synchronism check takes place before reclosure.
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM (address 3403) is the time after which the network fault
is considered to be cleared after a successful reclosure. Re-tripping of a protective
function within this time initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclos-
ures; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful.
The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest command time of a pro-
tective function which can start the automatic reclosure function.
Configuration of This configuration concerns the interaction between the protective and supplementary
the Automatic functions of the device and the automatic reclosure function. Here you can determine
Reclosure which functions of the device are to start the automatic reclosure and which not.
In 7SD52 this concerns:
Address 3420 AR WITH DIFF, i.e. with differential protection,
Address 3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C, i.e. with instantaneous high-speed overcurrent
tripping,
Address 3423 AR WITH I.TRIP, i.e. with intertrip and remote trip,
Address 3424 AR w/ DTT, i.e. with externally coupled direct trip command,
Address 3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C, i.e. with time overcurrent protection.
For the functions which are to start the auto-reclosure function, the corresponding ad-
dress is set to YES, for the others to NO. The remaining functions (overload protection,
breaker failure protection) cannot start the auto-reclosure because reclosure is of no
use here.
Forced Three-pole If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole
Trip trip command having been initiated, the breaker remains open at one pole. With ad-
dress 3430 AR TRIP 3pole you determine that the tripping logic of the device sends
a three-pole trip command in this case (pole discrepancy prevention). Set this address
to YES if the breaker can be controlled single-pole and has no pole discrepancy super-
vision itself. Nevertheless, the device pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of
the CB because the forced three-pole trip of the device is immediately initiated as soon
as the reclosure is blocked following a single-pole trip or if the CB auxiliary contacts
report an implausible breaker state.
The forced three-pole trip is unnecessary if only a common three-pole control of the
circuit breaker is possible.
Dead Line Check Under address 3431 the dead line check can be switched active. It presupposes that
(DLC) voltage transformers are installed on the line side of the feeder and connected to the
device. If this is not the case or the function is not used, set DLC / RDT = WITHOUT.
DLC / RDT = DLC means that the dead line check is used. An automatic reclosure is
only possible if it was determined that the line had been dead. In this case, the phase-
earth voltage limit is set in address 3441 U-dead< below which the line is considered
voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is made in secondary Volts. This value can
be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI®. Address
3438 T U-stable determines the minimum measuring time for determining the volt-
age-free condition.
Adaptive When operating with adaptive dead time, it must be ensured in advance that one end
Dead Time (ADT) per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other (or others in
multi-branch lines) may operate with adaptive dead time. You will find details about
the procedure in Subsection 2.9.1 under subtitle “Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)” on page
98 and “Close Command Transmission (Remote Close)“, page 99.
For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclosure cycles must
be set in the configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1) under address
133 Auto Reclose. Additionally the intertrip command of the differential protection
should be activated (see Subsection 2.4.2, address 1301 I-TRIP SEND = YES). For
the devices operating with adaptive dead time, Auto Reclose = ADT must be set in
the configuration of the protective functions (Subsection 2.1.1) under address 133.
Only the parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. Then no set-
tings are made for the individual reclosure cycles.
The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or Remote-CLOSE-controlled.
Both is even possible at the same time. In the first case, reclosure after tripping takes
place as soon as the voltage from the re-energized remote end is detected. This re-
quires that the voltage transformers are installed on the line side of the feeder and con-
nected to the device. With Remote-CLOSE-controlled adaptive dead time, the auto-
reclosure function waits for the reception of the remote close command from the re-
mote end.
The action time T-ACTION ADT (address 3433) is the time after pickup of any pro-
tective function which can start the automatic reclosure within which the trip command
must appear. If the trip command has not appeared before expiry of the action time,
there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see
Subsection 2.1.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a
starting protective function does not provide a pickup indication.
The dead times are controlled by the reclosure command of the device at the line end
with defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command is missing, e.g. be-
cause reclosure has been blocked there during the dead time, the auto-reclosure func-
tion of the device with adaptive dead time must return to the quiescent state after some
time. This takes place after the maximum wait time T-MAX ADT (address 3434). This
must be long enough to include the last possible reclosure of the initiating end. In the
case of single-shot reclosure, the total sum of maximum dead time plus reclaim time
of the device of the initiating end is sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the
worst case is that all reclosures of the initiating end except the last one are unsuccess-
ful. The time of all these cycles must be taken into account. To save having to make
exact calculations, you may use the total sum of all dead times and all command times
of the trippings plus a reclaim time.
Under address 3435 ADT 1p allowed you determine whether single-pole tripping
is to be allowed (on condition that single-pole tripping is possible at all). If NO, the pro-
tection trips three-pole for all fault types. If YES the possible tripping situations of the
starting protective functions are decisive.
Under address 3436 ADT CB? CLOSE you determine whether circuit breaker ready
is to be interrogated before reclosure after adaptive dead time. If you set YES the dead
time may be extended if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a
CLOSE-TRIP-cycle. The dead time is extended by the circuit breaker monitoring time
at the most; this was set for all reclosure cycles under address 3409 (see above). You
will find details about the circuit breaker monitoring in the function description, Sub-
section 2.9.1, under subtitle “Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready“, page 93.
If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure
cycle, you should set address 3437 ADT SynRequest to YES. In this case a check
is made before reclosure following a three-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder
and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This requires that an external synchro-check
device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no sta-
bility problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to a high
degree of interconnection within the network or in radial networks), set address 3437
to NO.
Addresses 3438 and 3440 are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead
time is used. Set under address 3440 U-live> the limit for the phase-earth voltage
above which the line is to be considered fault-free. The setting must be lower than the
smallest operating voltage to be expected. The setting is made in secondary Volts.
This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and
DIGSI®. Address 3438 T U-stable determines the measuring time available for
determining the voltage. It should be longer than any transient voltage oscillations
resulting from line energization.
1st Reclosure If working on a line with adaptive dead time, no other parameters are needed for the
Cycle individual reclosure cycles here. All following parameters assigned to the individual
cycles are then superfluous and inaccessible.
Address 3450 1.AR: START is only available, if the automatic reclosure is configured
with action time, i.e. if the address 134 AR control mode = Pickup w/ Tact or
Trip w/ Tact (the first only for three-pole tripping) was set during the configuration
of the protective functions (refer to Subsection 2.1.1). It determines whether an auto-
matic reclosure start is to take place at all with the first cycle. This address is included
mainly for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every reclosure attempt and is
set to YES for the first cycle. If several cycles are to be executed you can control the
effect of the individual cycles with this parameter together with different action times.
Notes and examples can be found in Subsection 2.9.1 under subtitle “Action Times”
(page 91).
The action time 1.AR: T-ACTION (address 3451) is the time after pickup of any pro-
tective function which can start the automatic reclosure within which the trip command
must appear. If the trip command has not appeared before expiry of the action time,
there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see
Subsection 2.1.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a
starting protective function does not provide a pickup indication.
Depending on the configured control mode of the automatic reclosure (see Subsection
2.1.1 under address 134 AR control mode) only addresses 3456 and 3457 (if con-
trol mode Trip...) or the addresses 3453 to 3455 (if control mode Pickup...) are
available.
In the control mode Trip... you can set different dead times for single-pole and three-
pole reclose cycles. Whether single-pole or three-pole tripping takes place depends
solely on the protective functions which start the auto-reclosure function. Single-pole
tripping is only possible of course if the device and the corresponding protective func-
tion are also capable of single-pole tripping.
Address 3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip is the dead time after 1-pole tripping,
Address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip is the dead time after 3-pole tripping.
If you only want to allow a single-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for three-pole
tripping to ¥. If you only want to allow a three-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time
for single-pole tripping to ¥; the protection then trips three-pole for every fault type.
The dead time after single-pole tripping (if set) 1.AR Tdead1Trip (address 3456)
should be long enough to allow for the fault arc to be extinguished and the surrounding
air be de-ionized so that the reclosure is likely to be successful. The longer the line,
the longer is this time due to the charging of the conductor capacitances. The typical
values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s.
For three-pole tripping (address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip) the stability of the network
is the main concern. Since the disconnected line cannot transfer any synchronizing
forces, only a short dead time is often permitted. The usual values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s.
If the device is operating with a synchronism check device, a longer dead time may be
tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer three-pole dead times are also possible
in networks with a high degree of interconnection or in radial networks.
In the control mode Pickup... you can make the dead times dependent on the type of
fault detected by pickup of the starting protective function(s):
Address 3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt is the dead time after 1-phase pickup,
Address 3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt is the dead time after 2-phase pickup,
Address 3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt is the dead time after 3-phase pickup.
If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters to
the same value. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different
pickups. The tripping can only be three-pole.
If you have set starts 3p AR when setting the reaction to evolving faults (see above
under “General”, page 108) address 3407 EV. FLT. MODE, you can set a separate
value 1.AR: Tdead EV. (address 3458) for the three-pole dead time after clearance
of the evolving fault. Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally it can be set
equal to address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip.
Under address 3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE you determine whether circuit breaker ready
is to be interrogated before this first reclosure. If you set YES the dead time may be
extended if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSE-TRIP-
cycle. The dead time is extended by the circuit breaker monitoring time at the most;
this was set for all reclosure cycles under address 3409 (see above). You will find de-
tails about the circuit breaker monitoring in the function description, Subsection 2.9.1,
under subtitle “Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready”, page 93.
If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure
cycle, you should set address 3460 1.AR SynRequest to YES. In this case a check
is made before reclosure following a three-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder
and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This requires that an external synchro-check
device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no sta-
bility problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to close
meshing of the network or in radial networks), set address 3460 to NO.
2nd to 4th If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Subsection
Reclosure Cycle 2.1.1), you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The pos-
sibilities are the same as for the 1st cycle. Only some of the following parameters may
be available here depending on the configuration of the protective function (Subsec-
tion 2.1.1).
For the 2nd cycle:
Address 3461 2.AR: START; start in 2nd cycle allowed at all
Address 3462 2.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 2nd cycle
Address 3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting
Address 3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt; dead time after 2-phase starting
Address 3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt; dead time after 3-phase starting
Address 3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping
Address 3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip; dead time after 3-pole tripping
Address 3469 2.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault
Address 3470 2.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure
Address 3471 2.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping
For the 3rd cycle:
Address 3472 3.AR: START; start in 3rd cycle allowed at all
Address 3473 3.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 3rd cycle
Address 3475 3.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting
Address 3476 3.AR Tdead 2Flt; dead time after 2-phase starting
Address 3477 3.AR Tdead 3Flt; dead time after 3-phase starting
Address 3478 3.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping
Address 3479 3.AR Tdead3Trip; dead time after 3-pole tripping
Address 3480 3.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault
Address 3481 3.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure
Address 3482 3.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping
For the 4th cycle:
Address 3483 4.AR: START; start in the 4th cycle allowed at all
Address 3484 4.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 4th cycle
Address 3486 4.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting
Address 3487 4.AR Tdead 2Flt; dead time after 2-phase starting
Address 3488 4.AR Tdead 3Flt; dead time after 3-phase starting
Address 3489 4.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping
Address 3490 4.AR Tdead3Trip; dead time after 3-pole tripping
Address 3491 4.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault
Address 3492 4.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure
Address 3493 4.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping
5th to 8th If more than 4 cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Sub-
Reclosure Cycles section 2.1.1), the cycles following the fourth cycle operate with the same settings as
the fourth cycle.
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI®, under “Additional Settings”.
3403 T-RECLAIM 0.50..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful
AR cycle
3407 EV. FLT. MODE Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR- Evolving fault (during the dead
starts 3pole AR-cycle cycle time)
3408 T-Start MONITOR 0.01..300.00 sec 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
3409 CB TIME OUT 0.01..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision
Time
3410 T RemoteClose 0.00..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.20 sec Send delay for remote close
command
3411A T-DEAD EXT. 0.50..300.00 sec; ¥ ¥ sec Maximum dead time extension
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults
3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults
3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ ¥ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
3469 2.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3476 3.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults
3477 3.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults
3478 3.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ ¥ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3479 3.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
3480 3.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3486 4.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3487 4.AR Tdead 2Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase faults
3488 4.AR Tdead 3Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase faults
3489 4.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ ¥ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3490 4.AR Tdead3Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
3491 4.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3434 T-MAX ADT 0.50..3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time
3438 T U-stable 0.10..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/live
voltage
The following paragraphs explain some important device information signals in brief
insofar as they are not explained in the following lists or covered in detail in the pre-
ceding subsections.
“>BLK 1.AR-cycle” (FNo 02742) to “>BLK 4.-n. AR” (FNo 02745)
The respective auto-reclose cycle is blocked. If the blocking signal is already active
when the auto-reclosure is started, the concerned cycle is not executed and may be
skipped (if further cycles are allowed). The same applies accordingly if auto-reclosure
was already started ignoring a possibly blocked cycle. If a cycle is blocked during its
execution, automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically; there are then no further au-
tomatic reclosures.
“AR 1.CycZoneRel” (FNo 02889) to “AR 4.CycZoneRel” (FNo 02892)
The automatic reclosure is ready for the respective reclosure cycle. The information
indicates which cycle will be executed next. For example, external protective functions
can be set to enable accelerated or overreaching stages before the respective reclos-
ure.
“AR is blocked” (FNo 02783)
The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). The information in-
dicates to the system management that any trip will be a final tripping, i.e. without re-
closure for an impending system fault. If the automatic reclosure has been started, this
information does not appear.
“AR is NOT ready” (FNo 02784)
The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the
“AR is blocked” (FNo 02783) mentioned above there are also obstructions during
the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as “action time run out” or “last reclaim
time running”. The information is particularly helpful during relay testing because no
reclosure can be initiated while this indication is active.
02715 >Trip 1p for AR >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl.
02716 >Trip 3p for AR >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl.
General The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid backup fault clearance, in the
event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a feeder protec-
tion.
Whenever e.g. a short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the
circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 2-39). A timer
T–BF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip com-
mand is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.
Busbar
Protection
trip Circuit breaker failure protection
T–BF 0
Feeder
I> BF &
Feeder protection Trip
(internal or external) busbar
Figure 2-39 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow
monitoring
Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring
stage I> BF quickly resets (typical 1/2 AC cycle) and stops the timer T–BF.
If the trip command is not executed (breaker failure case), current continues to flow
and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a com-
mand to trip the backup breakers which interrupt the fault current.
The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure pro-
tection itself detects the interruption of the current.
For protection functions where the tripping criteria is not dependent on current (e.g.
Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion to determine the correct re-
sponse of the breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from
the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the
condition of the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 2-40). For this purpose, the
outputs from the auxiliary contacts must be connected to binary inputs on the relay (re-
fer also to Subsection 2.13.2).
Busbar
L+
Protection
trip Circuit breaker failure protection
T–BF 0
Feeder protection
Feeder &
Trip
(internal or external) busbar
Figure 2-40 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection controlled by the
circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s)
Current Flow Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are fil-
Monitoring tered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental frequency is used for
further evaluation.
Special features detect the instant of current interruption. With sinusoidal currents,
current interruption is detected after approx. 1/2 AC cycle. With aperiodic DC current
components in the fault current and/or in the current transformer secondary circuit
after interruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core), or saturation of the
current transformers caused by the DC component in the fault current, it can take one
AC cycle before the interruption of the primary current is reliably detected.
The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. In addition to the
three phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a
plausibility check (see Figure 2-41):
As plausibility current, the earth current (residual current IE = 3·I0) is preferably used.
If the residual current from the starpoint of the current transformer set is connected to
the device this is used for 3·I0. If the residual current is not available the device calcu-
lates it according to the formula:
3·I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3.
Additionally, the value of three times the negative sequence current 3·I2 is used for
plausibility check. This is calculated by the 7SD52 according to the formula:
3·I2 = IL1 + a2 · IL2 + a · IL3
where
a = ej120°.
These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality
of the breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two
current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the breaker failure delay
times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation.
3902 I> BF
Current
criterion
IL1
I> & >1 L1>
&
IL2
I> & >1 L2>
&
IL3
I> & >1 L3>
&
3I2
I>
>1
plausi-
bility
3I0
I>
Figure 2-41 Current flow monitoring with the plausibility currents 3·I0 and 3·I2
Processing of the The position of the circuit breaker is derived from the central function control of the de-
Circuit Breaker vice (refer also to Subsection 2.13.2). Evaluation of the breaker auxiliary contacts is
Auxiliary Contacts carried out in the breaker failure protection function only when the current flow moni-
toring has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the trip
signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon
as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contact does not (yet) indi-
cate that the circuit breaker has opened (Figure 2-42). This gives preference to the
more reliable current criterion and avoids false operation due to a defect e.g. in the
auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature is provided for each indi-
vidual phase as well as for three-pole trip.
It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch
Chk BRK CONTACT (Figure 2-44 top) to NO, the breaker failure protection can only be
started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then not
evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device.
On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the
circuit breaker for faults which do not necessarily cause detectable current flow (e.g.
Buchholz protection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary
contacts is required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker.
For this purpose, the binary input “>BF Start w/o I” (FNo 01439) is provided (Fig-
ure 2-44 left). This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow
is detected.
L1>
& S Q
Start only L1 R
>CB Aux. L1
1) if phase segregated auxiliary contacts available
FNo 00380 2) >1 2
>CB 3p Open ) if series connection of NC contacts available
Figure 2-42 Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion — example for phase L1
Common Phase Common phase initiation is used, for example, for lines without automatic reclosure,
Initiation for lines with only three-pole automatic reclosure, for transformer feeders, or if the bus-
bar protection trips. This is the only available initiation mode if the applied 7SD52
model is able to trip three-pole only.
If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection
devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the
7SD52 device: the trip command to the input “>BF Start 3pole” (FNo 01415) and
an additional release signal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) to the input “>BF release”
(FNo 01432). For Buchholz protection it is recommended that the trip command is
connected to the 7SD52 by two separate wire pairs in order to achieve dual-channel
initiation of the breaker failure protection.
Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel
mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input “>BF re-
lease” (FNo 01432) must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device
during configuration.
The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-44. When the trip signal is given from
any internal or external feeder protection and at least one current flow criterion (ac-
cording to Figure 2-41) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the cor-
responding delay time(s) is (are) started.
If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases the position of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contact(s) is interrogated provided that this is available. If the circuit
breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series connection of the three
normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used (all 3 NC contacts are closed when all
3 breaker poles are open). The circuit breaker has operated correctly after a three-
pole trip command only if none of the phases carries current and when all three NC
auxiliary contacts have closed.
Figure 2-43 shows the formation of the signal “CB closed >1-p” (cf. Figure 2-44 left),
when at least one CB pole is closed, i.e. not all three poles open.
L1>
>1
L2>
L3>
& S Q
Start L123 R
>CB Aux. L1
FNo 00352
>CB Aux. L2 >1
FNo 00353
>CB Aux. L3
FNo 00379
>CB 3p Closed
FNo 00380
>CB 3p Open
L1>
L2> >1
L3>
&
Start internal w/o l
>1
FNo 01439 >1 & Start L123
>BF Start w/o I &
FNo 01403
>BLOCK BkrFail &
Internal blocking
Phase Segregated Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit
Initiation breaker poles can be operated individually, e.g. if single-pole automatic reclosure is
used. This is possible if the device is able to trip single-pole.
If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection
devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect an additional release sig-
nal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) at the input “>BF release” (FNo 01432), in addition
to the trip commands at the inputs “>BF Start L1” (FNo 01435), “>BF Start L2”
(FNo 01436), and “>BF Start L3” (FNo 01437). Figure 2-45 shows the connections
of this dual-channel initiation.
Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel
mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input “>BF re-
lease” (FNo 01432) must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device
during configuration.
external 7SD52
prot. device
Trip L1 >BF Start L1
L+ L–
Figure 2-45 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation — example for initia-
tion by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal
If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a
general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a sep-
arate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 2-46.
external 7SD52
prot. device
Trip L1 >BF Start L1
Trip L1
L+
>BF release
L–
Figure 2-46 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation — example for initia-
tion by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip con-
tacts
The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 2-47. In principle, it
is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each of
the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each
individual phase. In case of single-pole trip before an automatic reclose cycle, current
interruption is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only.
Initiation of a single-phase, e.g. “Start L1 only” is active when the starting input (= trip
command of any feeder protection) appears for only this phase and current flow is de-
tected in at least this phase. If current flow is not detected, the auxiliary contact posi-
tion can be interrogated according to Figure 2-42, dependent on the setting (Chk BRK
CONTACT = YES).
The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual breaker pole. If
however the breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual breaker
pole, then a single-pole trip command is assumed to be correctly executed only when
the series connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This
information is given to the breaker failure protection by the central function control of
the device (refer to Subsection 2.13.2).
The three-phase starting signal “Start L123” is generated if trip signals appear in more
than one pole (regardless from which protection function). Phase segregated initiation
is then blocked. The input “>BF Start w/o I” (FNo 01432) (e.g. from Buchholz
protection) operates in three-phase mode as well. The function is the same as with
common phase initiation.
The additional release-signal “>BF release” (FNo 01432) (if assigned to a binary
input) affects all starting conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input
“>BLOCK BkrFail” (FNo 01403) (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay). Ad-
ditionally, an internal blocking option is provided.
YES
CBaux L2 closed
NO >1
L2>
Start internal L2
>1
FNo 01436 & Start only L2
>BF Start L2 &
YES
CBaux L3 closed
NO >1
L3>
Start internal L3
>1
FNo 01437
& & Start only L3
>BF Start L3
>2
YES
CBaux ³1p closed
NO
L1> >1
L2> >1
L3>
&
Delay Timers When the starting conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers of the breaker failure
protection are started. The circuit breaker pole(s) must open before the respective
time has elapsed.
Different delay timers are provided for operation after common phase initiation and
phase segregated initiation. A further time stage can be used for two-stage breaker
failure protection.
With single-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent
circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 2-39 or 2-40). The
adjacent circuit breakers are all those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault cur-
rent, i.e. the breakers which feed the busbar or the busbar section to which the feeder
under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the breaker
failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of the
feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may oc-
cur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always three-pole.
The simplest solution is to start the delay timer T2 (Figure 2-48). The phase-segregat-
ed initiation signals are ignored if the feeder protection always trips three-pole or if the
circuit breaker is not capable of single-pole tripping.
If different delay times are required after a single-pole trip or three-pole trip it is possi-
ble to use the timer stages T1-1pole and T1-3pole according to Figure 2-49.
3906 T2 (Trip
Start only L1 busbar)
Start only L2 FNo 01494
>1 T 0
BF T2-TRIP(bus)
Start only L3
Start L123
Figure 2-48 Single-stage breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
With two-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command of the feeder protection is
usually repeated, after a first time stage, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a sec-
ond trip coil or set of trip coils. That is if the breaker has not responded to the original
trip command. A second time stage monitors the response to this repeated trip com-
mand and is used to trip the breakers of the relevant busbar section, if the fault has
not yet been cleared after the second trip command.
3904 T1-1pole
Start only L1
T 0
Start only L2 >1 (Trip
busbar)
Start only L3
FNo 01476
3905 T1-3pole >1
BF T1-TRIP L123
T 0
Start L123
Figure 2-49 Single-stage breaker failure protection with different delay timers
For the first time stage, different time delays can be selected for a single-pole trip and
three-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select (parameter 1p-
RETRIP (T1)) whether this repeated trip should be single-pole or three-pole.
3906 T2 (Trip
busbar)
FNo 01494
>1 T 0
BF T2-TRIP(bus)
Figure 2-50 Two-stage breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation — one
phase
Circuit Breaker not There may be cases when it is already obvious that the circuit breaker associated with
Operational a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the trip-
ping energy is not available.
In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the correct response of the feeder circuit
breaker. If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control
voltage monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the bi-
nary input “>CB faulty” (FNo 00378) of the 7SD52. On occurrence of this alarm and
a trip command by the feeder protection, a separate timer T3-BkrDefective, which
is normally set to 0, is started (Figure 2-51). In this case, the adjacent circuit breakers
(busbar) are tripped immediately.
T 0 FNo 01493
FNo 00378
>CB faulty
& BF TRIP CBdefec
Transfer Trip to the The 7SD52 has the facility to provide an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker
Remote End Circuit at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this,
Breaker the transmission of the trip command is used.
To perform this intertrip, the desired command — usually the trip command which is
intended to trip the adjacent breakers — is assigned to the input function for intertrip
of the devices. This can be achieved by external wiring: the command output is con-
nected to the binary input “>Intertrip 3pol” (FNo 03504). Refer also to Section
2.3. An easier procedure is to combine the command output with the intertrip input via
the user definable logic functions (CFC).
End Fault An end fault is defined here as a short-circuit which has occurred at the end of a line
Protection or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set.
This situation is shown in Figure 2-52. The fault is located — as seen from the current
transformers (= measurement location) — on the busbar side, thus, it will not be re-
garded by the feeder protection relay as a feeder fault. It can only be detected by a
bus-bar protection. Nevertheless, a trip command given to the feeder circuit breaker
cannot clear the fault since the opposite end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault
current does not stop flowing even though the feeder circuit breaker has properly re-
sponded to the trip command.
Busbar
Trip by
protection
ISC
Feeder
Figure 2-52 End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers
The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip
signal to the remote end of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose, the
output command “BF EndFlt TRIP” (FNo 01495) is available to trigger the intertrip
input of the differential protection — if applicable, together with other commands that
need to be transferred. This can be achieved by external connection or via CFC.
The end fault is detected when the current continues flowing although the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts indicate that the breaker is open. In the 7SD52, an addition-
al criterion is the presence of any breaker failure protection initiate signal. The
scheme’s functionality is shown in Figure 2-53. If the breaker failure protection is initi-
ated and current flow is detected (current criteria “L*>” according Figure 2-41), but no
circuit breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion “any pole closed”), then a timer
T-EndFault is started. At the end of this time an intertrip signal is transmitted to the
opposite end(s) of the protected object.
FNo 01461
BF Start
&
T 0 FNo 01495
³1 pole closed
& BF EndFlt TRIP
Circuit Breaker The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position
Pole Discrepancy of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state conditions, either all three poles
Supervision of the breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrepancy is permit-
ted only for a short time interval during a single-pole automatic reclose cycle.
The scheme’s functionality is shown in Figure 2-54. The signals which are processed
here are the same as those used for the breaker failure protection. The pole discrep-
ancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed (“any pole closed”) and
at the same time not all poles are closed (“any pole open”).
Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 2-41) are processed. Pole discrepancy
can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles (<3), i.e.
through only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three
poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status.
If pole discrepancy is detected, this is indicated by a fault detection signal. This signal
identifies the pole which was open and caused the trip command of the pole discrep-
ancy supervision.
T 0 FNo 01500
any pole closed & BF CBdiscr TRIP
General The breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection, pole dis-
crepancy supervision) can only operate if they were configured as Enabled during
setting of the scope of functions (see Subsection 2.1.1, address 139).
Breaker Failure The complete breaker failure protection including its ancillary functions is switched
Protection OFF or ON under address 3901 FCT BreakerFail.
The current threshold I> BF (address 3902) should be selected such that the protec-
tion will operate with the smallest expected short-circuit current. To ensure this, the
value should be 10 % less than the minimum anticipated fault current. On the other
hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary.
Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as
the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not
available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT to NO.
The breaker failure protection in the 7SD52 can be operated single-stage or two-stage
Two-stage Breaker With two-stage operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the
Failure Protection local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice
can be made whether this trip repetition shall be single-pole or three-pole if the initial
feeder protection trip was single-pole (provided single-pole trip is possible). This
choice is made in address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1). Set this parameter to YES if you
wish single-pole trip for the first stage, otherwise to NO.
If the breaker does not respond to this first stage trip, the adjacent circuit breakers
must be tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. The adjacent breakers are
those of the other feeders on the busbar or busbar section and, if applicable, the
breaker at the remote end of the protected object.
In the 7SD52, after a further delay time T2 (address 3906), the adjacent circuit break-
ers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote
end) are tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. An example of the time
sequence is illustrated in Figure 2-55.
Separate delay times can be set:
- for single- or three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 1-pole
trip of the feeder protection under address 3904 T1-1pole,
- for three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the
feeder protection under address 3905 T1-3pole,
- for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable)
under address 3906 T2.
The delay times are set dependant on the maximum operating time of the feeder cir-
cuit breaker and the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protec-
tion, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time
sequence is illustrated in Figure 2-55. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the
reset time of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer satura-
tion is expected then 25 ms should be assumed.
Fault inception
Fault clearance time normal
Initiation breaker
failure protection
Figure 2-55 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker
failure, using two-stage breaker failure protection
Single-stage With single-stage operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the bus-
Breaker Failure bar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay
Protection time T2 (address 3906) following initiation, should the fault not have been cleared
within this time.
The timers T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (address 3905) are then set to
¥ since they are not needed.
Alternatively, you may use the T1-timers for single-stage protection if you wish to uti-
lize the facility of setting different delay times after single-pole trip and three-pole trip
of the feeder protection. In this case, set the desired times under addresses 3904 T1-
1pole and 3905 T1-3pole but set address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) to NO to avoid
single-pole trip to the busbar. Set T2 (address 3906) to ¥ or equal to T1-3pole (ad-
dress 3905). Be sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the respective
trip relay(s).
The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit
breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus
a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence
is illustrated in Figure 2-56. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the reset time
of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer saturation is ex-
pected then 25 ms should be assumed.
Fault inception
Fault clearance time normal
Initiation breaker
failure protection
Figure 2-56 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker
failure, using single-stage breaker failure protection
Circuit Breaker not If the circuit breaker associated with the feeder is not operational (e.g. control voltage
Operational failure or air pressure failure), it is obvious that the local breaker cannot clear the fault.
Time delay before tripping the adjacent breakers is not necessary in this case. If the
relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input “>CB faulty” (FNo
00378), the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are
tripped after the time T3-BkrDefective (address 3907) which is usually set to 0.
Address 3908 Trip BkrDefect. determines to which output the trip command is
routed in the event that the breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip oc-
curs. Select that output which is intended to trip the adjacent breakers (busbar trip).
End Fault Protec- The end fault protection can be switched ON or OFF separately under address 3921
tion End Flt. stage. An end fault is a short-circuit between the circuit breaker and the
current transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the de-
vice is informed about the circuit breaker position via breaker auxiliary contacts con-
nected to binary inputs.
If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a busbar protection (the fault is
seen as a busbar fault determined from the location of the current transformers), the
fault current will continue to flow, because the fault is fed from the remote end of the
protected object.
The time T-EndFault (address 3922) is started when, during the time of pickup con-
dition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open
poles and, at the same time, current flow is still detected (address 3902). The trip com-
mand of the end fault protection is used for the transmission of an intertrip signal to
the remote end circuit breaker.
Thus, the delay time must be set such that it can bridge out short transient apparent
end fault conditions which may occur during switching of the breaker.
Pole Discrepancy The pole discrepancy supervision can be switched ON or OFF separately under ad-
Supervision dress 3931 PoleDiscrepancy. It is only useful if the breaker poles can be operated
individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local breaker remain open con-
tinuously. It presumes that either the breaker auxiliary contacts of each pole, or the se-
ries connection of the normally open contacts (NO contacts) and of the normally
closed contacts (NC contacts) be connected to binary inputs on the device. If these
conditions are not fulfilled, switch the pole discrepancy supervision OFF.
The delay time T-PoleDiscrep. (address 3932) determines how long a breaker
pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles
open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a three-pole trip
command. This time must clearly be longer than the duration of a single-pole automat-
ic reclose cycle. However, the time should be less than the permissible duration of an
unbalanced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit
breaker poles. Conventional values are 2 s to 5 s.
Note: The indicated secondary current values for setting ranges and default settings
refer to IN = 1 A. For the nominal current 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5.
3904 T1-1pole 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start (local
trip)
3905 T1-3pole 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start (local
trip)
3906 T2 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar
trip)
3907 T3-BkrDefective 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with defective
bkr.
3922 T-EndFault 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage
3932 T-PoleDiscrep. 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole discrepancy
01439 >BF Start w/o I >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current)
The thermal overload protection prevents damage to the protected object caused by
thermal overloading, particularly in case of transformers, rotating machines, power re-
actors and cables. It is in general not applicable for overhead lines, since no reliable
temperature rise can be calculated due to the great variations in the environmental
conditions (temperature, wind). In this case, however, a current-dependent alarm
stage can indicate an imminent overload.
The unit computes the temperature rise according to a thermal single-body model
based on the following thermal differential equation
dQ ------ 1 1 I 2
-------- + - × Q = ------- × æ -------------ö
dt t th t th k × I Nø
è
with Q – current level of temperature rise referred to the final temperature rise
for the maximum continuous permissible line current k · IN
tth – thermal time constant for temperature rise
k – k-factor which states the maximum permissible continuous current
referred to the rated current of the current transformers
I – present RMS current
IN – rated current of current transformers
The solution of this equation under steady-state conditions is an e-function whose
asymptote shows the final temperature rise Qend. When the temperature rise reaches
the first settable temperature threshold Qalarm, which is below the final temperature
rise, a warning alarm is given in order to allow an preventive load reduction. When the
second temperature threshold, i.e. the final temperature rise or tripping temperature,
is reached, the protected object is disconnected from the network. The overload pro-
tection can, however, also be set on Alarm Only. In this case only an alarm is given
when the final temperature rise is reached.
The temperature rises are calculated separately for each phase in a thermal replica
from the square of the associated phase current. This guarantees a true RMS value
measurement and also includes the effect of harmonic content. A choice can be made
whether the maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases, the average
temperature rise, or the temperature rise calculated from the phase with maximum
current should be decisive for evaluation of the thresholds.
The maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current Imax is described as a
multiple of the rated current IN:
Imax = k · IN
In addition to the k-factor, the time constant tth as well as the alarm temperature Qalarm
must be entered in the settings of the protection.
Apart from the thermal alarm stage, the overload protection also includes a current
overload alarm stage Ialarm, which can be provided as early warning that an overload
current is imminent, even when the temperature rise has not yet reached the alarm or
trip temperature rise values.
The overload protection can be blocked via a binary input. In doing so, the thermal rep-
lica are reset to zero.
General Informa- A precondition for the use of the thermal overload protection is that Therm.Overload
tion = Enabled was configured under address 142 (Subsection 2.1.1). It can be switched
ON or OFF under address 4201 Ther. OVERLOAD. Furthermore Alarm Only can
be set. With that latter setting the protection function is active but only provides an
alarm when the tripping temperature rise is reached, i.e. the output function “ThOver-
load TRIP” is not active.
k-Factor The rated current of the device is taken as the base current for detecting an overload.
The setting factor k is set under address 4202 K-FACTOR. It is determined by the re-
lation between the permissible thermal continuous current and this rated current:
I max
k = -----------
-
IN
The permissible continuous current is at the same time the current at which the e-func-
tion of the temperature rise has its asymptote. It is not necessary to determine the trip-
ping temperature since it results automatically from the final rise temperature at k · IN.
Manufacturers of electrical machines usually state the permissible continuous current.
If no data are available, k is set to 1.1 times the rated current of the protected object.
For cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, the in-
sulation material, the design and the way they are laid. It can be derived from the rel-
evant technical tables.
Please note that the overload capability of electrical equipment relates to its primary
current. This has to be considered if the nominal primary current of the equipment dif-
fers from the rated current of the current transformers.
Example:
Belted cable 10 kV 150 mm2
Permissible continuous current Imax = 322 A
Current transformers 400 A/5 A
322 A
k = --------------- = 0.805
400 A
Setting value K-FACTOR = 0.80
Time Constant t The thermal time constant tth is set under the address 4203 TIME CONSTANT. This
value is normally stated by the manufacturer. Please note that the time constant is set
in minutes. Quite often other values for determining the time constant are stated which
can be converted into the time constant as follows:
· 1-s current
t th 1 perm. 1-s current 2
- = ------ × æ --------------------------------------------------------ö
--------
min 60 perm. contin. currentø
è
· permissible current for application time other than 1 s, e.g. for 0.5 s
t th 0.5 perm. 0.5-s current 2
- = -------- × æ --------------------------------------------------------ö
--------
min 60 è perm. contin. currentø
· t6-time; this is the time in seconds for which a current of 6 times the rated current of
the protected object may flow
t th
- = 0.6 × t6
--------
min
Example:
Cable as above with
permissible 1-s current 13.5 kA
t th 1 13500 A 2 1
- = ------ × æ ----------------------ö = ------ × 42 = 29.4
2
--------
min 60 è 322 A ø 60
Alarm Stages By setting a thermal alarm stage Q ALARM (address 4204) an alarm can be provided
before the tripping temperature is reached, so that a trip can be avoided by preventive
load reduction or by switching over. The percentage is referred to the tripping temper-
ature rise.
The current overload alarm setpoint I ALARM (address 4205) is stated as a factor of
the rated device current and should be set equal to or slightly below the permissible
continuous current k · IN. It can also be used instead of the thermal alarm stage. In this
case the thermal alarm stage is set to 100 % and thus practically ineffective.
Calculating the The thermal replica is calculated individually for each phase. Address 4406 CALC.
Temperature Rise METHOD decides whether the highest of the three calculated temperatures (Q max) or
their arithmetic average (Average Q) or the temperature calculated from the phase
with maximum current (Q at Imax) should be decisive for the thermal alarm and trip-
ping stage.
Since an overload usually occurs in a balanced way, this setting is of minor impor-
tance. If unbalanced overloads are to be expected, however, these options lead to dif-
ferent results.
Averaging should only be used if a rapid thermal equilibrium is possible in the protect-
ed object, e.g. with belted cables. If the three phases are, however, more or less ther-
mally isolated (e.g. single conductor cables or overhead lines), one of the maximum
settings should be chosen at any rate.
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be
multiplied by 5.
4206 CALC. METHOD Theta Max Theta Max Method of Acquiring Tempera-
Average Theta ture
Theta @ Imax
The device incorporates comprehensive monitoring functions which cover both hard-
ware and software; the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility, so
that the current and voltage transformer circuits are also included in the monitoring
system to a large extent. Furthermore, binary inputs are available for supervision of
the trip circuits.
The complete hardware including the measurement inputs and the output relays is
monitored for faults and inadmissible states by monitoring circuits and by the proces-
sor.
Auxiliary and The processor voltage is monitored by the hardware as the processor cannot operate
Reference Voltages if the voltage drops below the minimum value. In that case, the device is not opera-
tional. When the correct voltage is re-established the processor system is restarted.
Failure or switch-off of the supply voltage sets the system out of operation; this status
is signalled by a fail-safe contact. Transient dips in supply voltage will not disturb the
function of the relay (see also Subsection 4.1.2 in the Technical Data).
The processor monitors the offset and the reference voltage of the ADC (analog-to-
digital converter). In case of inadmissible deviations the protection is blocked; persist-
ent faults are signalled.
Back-up Battery The back-up battery guarantees that the internal clock continues to work and that me-
tered values and alarms are stored if the auxiliary voltage fails. The charge level of the
battery is checked regularly. If the voltage drops below the permissible minimum the
alarm “Fail Battery” (FNo 00177) is output.
If the device is not supplied with auxiliary voltage for more than 12 to 24 hours, the
internal back-up battery is switched off automatically, i.e. the time is not registered any
more. Messages and fault recordings however remain stored.
Memory Modules All working memories (RAMs) are checked during start-up. If a fault occurs, the start
is aborted and an LED starts flashing. During operation the memories are checked
with the help of their checksum.
For the program memory, the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared
to a stored reference program cross-check sum.
For the parameter memory, the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and com-
pared to the cross-check sum that is refreshed after each parameterization change.
If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
Sampling The sampling frequency and the synchronism between the ADC’s (analog-to-digital
Frequency converters) is continuously monitored. If deviations cannot be corrected by another
synchronization attempt, the device sets itself out of operation and the red LED
“Blocked” lights up; the “Device OK” relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its
life contact.
Measured Value There are four measurement inputs in the current paths. If the three phase currents
Acquisition: and the residual current of the current transformer starpoint or of an separate summa-
Currents tion current transformer of the protected line are connected to the device, the sum of
the four digitized current values must always be zero. A fault in the current path is rec-
ognized when
iF = |iL1 + iL2 + iL3 + kI · iE | > SI THRESHOLD + SI FACTOR · S|i|
Factor kI (parameter I4/Iph CT, address 221) considers the possibly different ratio
of a separate IE-transformer (e.g. summation current transformer). SI THRESHOLD
and SI FACTOR are setting parameters. The component SI FACTOR · S|i| takes
into account permissible current proportional transformation errors in the input con-
verters which may particularly occur under conditions of high fault currents (Figure 2-
58). The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. S|i| is the sum of all rectified currents:
S|i| = |iL1 | + |iL2 | + |iL3 | + |kI · iE |
As soon as a summation current fault is detected after or before a system disturbance,
the differential protection is blocked. This fault is reported with “Failure Si” (FNo
00289). For not causing a blocking due to transformation errors (saturation) in case
of high fault currents, this monitoring function is not effective during a system fault.
Note:
Current sum monitoring can only operate properly when the residual current of the
protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
iF
IN
Slope:
“Failure Si” SI FACTOR
SI THRESHOLD
S|i|
IN
Figure 2-58 Summation current monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a watchdog timer is provided in
the hardware (hardware watchdog) which will reset and completely restart the proces-
sor system in the event of processor failure or if a program falls out of step.
A further software watchdog ensures that any error in the processing of the programs
will be recognized. Such errors also lead to a reset of the processor.
If such an error is not eliminated by restarting, another restart attempt is initiated. If the
fault is still present after three restart attempts within 30 s, the protection system will
take itself out of service, and the red LED “Blocked” lights up. The “Device OK” relay
drops off and signals the malfunction by its live status contact.
The device detects and signals most of the interruptions, short-circuits, or wrong con-
nections in the secondary circuits of current or voltage transformers (an important
commissioning aid). For this the measured values are checked in background routines
at cyclic intervals, as long as no pickup condition exists.
Current Balance In healthy network operation it can be expected that the currents will be approximately
balanced. The monitoring of the measured values in the device checks this balance.
For this the lowest phase current is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is de-
tected when
|Imin | / |Imax | < BAL. FACTOR I provided that
Imax / IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
Imax is the highest, Imin the lowest of the three phase currents. The balance factor
BAL. FACTOR I represents the degree of unbalance of the phase currents, the lim-
iting value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower threshold of the operating range of this
monitoring function (see Figure 2-59). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio
is approx. 97 %.
This fault is indicated with the alarm “Fail I balance” (FNo 00163).
Imin
IN
Slope:
BAL. FACTOR I
“Fail I balance”
Voltage Balance In healthy network operation it can be expected that the voltages are nearly balanced.
If measured voltages are connected to the device, this symmetry is checked by the
device. To ensure the monitoring function not picking up during a single earth fault,
which can also be a permanent operating state in non-earthed networks, the phase-
to-phase voltages are being considered.
Thus the lowest phase-to-phase voltage is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance
is detected when
|Umin | / |Umax | < BAL. FACTOR U provided that |Umax| > BALANCE U-LIMIT
Umax is the highest, Umin the lowest of the three phase-to-phase voltages. The sym-
metry factor BAL. FACTOR U is the measure for the asymmetry of the phase voltages,
the limiting value BALANCE U-LIMIT is the lower threshold of the operating range of
this monitoring function (see Figure 2-60). Both parameters can be set. The resetting
ratio is approx. 97 %.
This fault is indicated with the alarm “Fail U balance” (FNo 00167).
Umin
V Slope:
BAL. FACTOR U
“Fail U balance”
Broken-Wire During steady-state operation the broken wire monitoring registers interruptions in the
Monitoring secondary circuit of the current transformers. In addition to the hazard potential
caused by high voltages in the secondary circuit, this kind of interruptions simulates
differential currents to the differential protection, such as those evoked by faults in the
protected object.
The broken-wire monitor scans the current of each phase and picks up when the cur-
rent drops abruptly to 0 (from > 0.1·IN), while no corresponding drop appears in the
earth current. The differential protection is blocked immediately in the relevant phase.
This blocking has an impact on all ends of the protected object. The device issues the
message “Broken Iwire” indicating also the involved phase.
The blocking is cancelled as soon as the device is again supplied with current in the
relevant phase. It is also suppressed as long as a high fault current is registered by
any device of the differential protection system.
Note:
The broken-wire monitor only operates if the earth current of a separate earth current
transformer of the protected line is connected to the fourth current input (I4) of the re-
lay, or if no earth current is connected to this input.
The differential protection relay 7SD52 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit su-
pervision. Depending on the number of available binary inputs that are not connected
to a common potential, supervision modes with one or two binary inputs can be select-
ed. If the allocation of the necessary binary inputs does not comply with the selected
monitoring mode, an alarm is given (with identification of the non-compliant circuit). If
single-pole tripping is possible, trip circuit supervision can be performed for each cir-
cuit breaker pole provided the binary inputs are available.
Supervision Using If two binary inputs are used, they are connected according to Figure 2-61, one in par-
Two Binary Inputs allel to the assigned command relay contact of the protection and the other parallel to
the circuit breaker auxiliary contact.
A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for
the circuit breaker is higher than the total of the minimum voltages drops at the two
binary inputs (UCtrl > 2·UBImin). As at least 19 V are needed at each binary input, su-
pervision can be used with a control voltage higher than 38 V.
UCtrl
L+ 7SD52
FNo 06854
UBI1 >TripC1 TripRel
7SD52
TR FNo 06855
>TripC1 Bkr.Rel
Legend:
TR — Trip relay contact
CB — Circuit breaker
UBI2 TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
Aux.1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make)
TC Aux.1 Aux.2 Aux.2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)
CB
UCtrl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI1 — Input voltage of 1st binary input
UBI2 — Input voltage of 2nd binary input
Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed
L– state.
Figure 2-61 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Depending on the state of the trip relay and the circuit breaker’s auxiliary contacts, the
binary inputs are triggered (logic state “H” in Table 2-4) or short-circuited (logic state
“L”).
A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (“L”) is only possible in healthy
trip circuits for a short transition period (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not
yet open).
This state is only permanent in the event of interruptions or short-circuits in the trip cir-
cuit, a battery voltage failure. Therefore, this state is one of the supervision criteria.
The states of the two binary inputs are interrogated periodically, approximately every
500 ms. Only after n = 3 of these consecutive state queries have detected a fault an
alarm is given (see Figure 2-62). These repeated measurements result in a delay of
this alarm and thus avoid that an alarm is given during short-time transient periods.
After the fault is removed in the trip circuit, the fault message is reset automatically af-
ter the same time delay.
FNo 06854
>TripC1 TripRel FNo 06865
& T T
FAIL: Trip cir.
FNo 06855
>TripC1 Bkr.Rel T approx. 1 to 2 s
Figure 2-62 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision Using The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of
One Binary Input the protection device according to Figure 2-63. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is
bridged with the help of a high-ohmic substitute resistor R.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be at least twice as high as the min-
imum voltage drop at the binary input (UCtrl > 2·UBImin). Since at least 19 V are nec-
essary for the binary input, this supervision can be used with a control voltage higher
than approximately 38 V.
An calculation example for the substitute resistance of R is shown in Subsection 3.1.2,
margin “Trip Circuit Supervision”, page 200.
In normal operation the binary input is energized when the trip relay contact is open
and the trip circuit is healthy (logic state “H”), as the monitoring circuit is closed via the
auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or via the substitute resistance R. The
binary input is short-circuited and thus deactivated only as long as the tripping relay is
closed (logic state “L”).
If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the
trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed.
UCtrl
L+ 7SD52
FNo 06854
UBI >TripC1 TripRel
7SD52
TR
Legend:
TR — Trip relay contact
CB — Circuit breaker
R TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
Aux.1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make)
UR Aux.2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)
R — Substitute resistor
TC Aux.1 Aux.2
CB UCrtl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI — Input voltage of binary input
UR — Voltage across the substitute resistor
Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.
L–
Figure 2-63 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
As the trip circuit supervision is not operative during a system fault condition (picked-
up status of the device), the closed trip contact does not lead to an alarm. If, however,
the trip contacts of other devices are connected in parallel, the alarm must be delayed
with Alarm Delay (see also Figure 2-64). After the fault in the trip circuit is removed,
the alarm is reset automatically after approximately 1 to 2 seconds.
Figure 2-64 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
Depending on the kind of fault detected, an alarm is given, the processor is restarted
or the device is taken out of operation. If the fault is still present after three restart at-
tempts the protection system will take itself out of service and indicate this condition
by drop-off of the “Device OK” relay, thus indicating the device failure by its life contact.
The red LED “Blocked” on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal
auxiliary voltage, and the green LED “RUN” goes off. If the internal auxiliary voltage
supply fails, all LEDs are dark. Table 2-5 shows a summary of the monitoring functions
and the fault reactions of the device.
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms.
Table 2-6 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.
The sensitivity of the measurement supervision can be altered. Experiential values set
ex works are adequate in most cases. If an extremely high operational unbalance of
the currents and/or voltages is to be expected in the specific application, or if during
operation monitoring functions are activated sporadically, the relevant parameters
should be set less sensitive.
Symmetry The symmetry supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2901 MEASURE.
Supervision SUPERV.
Address 2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT determines the threshold voltage (phase-to-
phase) above which the voltage symmetry supervision is effective (see also Figure 2-
60). Address 2903A BAL. FACTOR U is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradi-
ent of the symmetry characteristic (Figure 2-60). This parameter can only be altered
with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
Address 2904A BALANCE I LIMIT determines the threshold current above which
the current balance supervision is effective (also see Figure 2-59). Address 2905A
BAL. FACTOR I is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance
characteristic (Figure 2-59).
Broken Wire The broken wire supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2908 BROKEN
Supervision WIRE.
Summated Current The summated current supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2921 FAST
Supervision S i SUPERV.
Address 2906A SI THRESHOLD determines the threshold current above which the
summation current supervision (see Figure 2-58) is effective (absolute value, only re-
ferred to IN). The relative value (referred to the maximum phase current) for the pickup
of the summated current supervision (Figure 2-58) is set in address 2907A SI FAC-
TOR. This parameter can only be altered with DIGSI® under “Additional Settings”.
Note:
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the
protected line is connected to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
Trip Circuit When address 140 Trip Cir. Sup. was configured (Subsection 2.1.1), the number
Supervision of trip circuits that are to be monitored was set. If the trip circuit supervision function is
not used at all, Disabled is set there.
The trip circuit supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT Trip-
Superv.. The number of the binary inputs per trip circuit is entered under address
4002 No. of BI. If the routing of the binary inputs required for this does not comply
with the selected supervision mode, an alarm is given (with identification of the non-
compliant circuit).
The trip circuit alarm is delayed for approximately 1 s to 2 s in supervision with two bi-
nary inputs, whereas the delay can be set under address 4003 Alarm Delay for
supervision with one binary input. 1 s to 2 s are sufficient if only device 7SD52 is con-
nected to the trip circuits as the trip circuit supervision does not operate during a sys-
tem fault. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices work also on the trip circuit in
parallel, the alarm must be delayed for longer than the longest possible duration of a
tripping command.
Measured Value Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
Supervision rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be
multiplied by 5.
Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI®,
under “Additional Settings”.
2905A BAL. FACTOR I 0.10..0.95 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Moni-
tor
2908 BROKEN WIRE ON OFF Fast broken current-wire super-
OFF vision
Trip Circuit
Supervision
4003 Alarm Delay 1..30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
Measured Value
Supervision
Trip Circuit
Supervision
The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of
the protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information
coming from the power system. Among these are
· switch-in recognition,
· processing of the circuit breaker position,
· fault detection/pickup logic,
· tripping logic.
During energization of the protected object, several measures may be required or de-
sirable; e.g. for manual closure onto a fault usually instantaneous tripping is desired.
This is done e.g. in the overcurrent protection by bypassing the delay time of specific
stages. For every short-circuit protection function which can be delayed, at least one
stage can be selected that will operate instantaneously in the event of a manual clos-
ing, as mentioned in the relevant sections. Also see Subsection 2.1.4 under the sub-
title “Circuit Breaker Status”, page 27.
The manual closing command must be indicated to the device via a binary input. The
command duration is fixed to a defined length (to be set under address 1150A SI
Time Man.Cl). That is to make the processing of the switch-in recognition independ-
ent of the actual duration of an individual manual closing operation. Figure 2-65 shows
the logic diagram.
L+
Control 7SD52
discrep.
switch
FNo 00356
>Manual Close
FNo 02851
AR Close
CBC
CB
Legend:
CB — Circuit breaker
CBC — Circuit breaker closing coil
L–
Figure 2-66 Manual closing with internal auto-reclosure function
L+
Control
7SD52
External discrep.
switch
AR device FNo 00356
>Manual Close
Reclose
command
CB CBC
Legend:
CB — Circuit breaker
CBC — Circuit breaker closing coil
L–
Figure 2-67 Manual closing with external auto-reclosure device
If internal control commands are intended to cause manual close, they have to be in-
cluded into the manual close processing, either by means of interconnection between
binary input and outputs or via the user definable logic functions (CFC).
Several protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the cir-
cuit breaker for proper functioning. This is e.g. helpful for
- the conditions when connecting the protected object (cf. Subsection 2.7.1) to the
network,
- start of the dead times before auto-reclosure (cf. Subsection 2.9.1),
- plausibility check before auto-reclosure (cf. Subsection 2.9.1),
- the enabling condition for the high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (I>>> stage,
cf. Subsection 2.7.1), also applicable for all ends of the protected object,
- the circuit breaker failure protection (cf. Subsection 2.10.1),
- the verification of the reset conditions for the tripping command (cf. Subsection
2.13.4),
- the trip circuit check with the help of the TRIP-CLOSE-test cycle (cf. Subsection
2.13.5).
The device is equipped with a circuit breaker position logic (Figure 2-68), which offers
different options depending on which auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are avail-
able and on how they are connected to the device.
In most cases it is sufficient to have the status of the circuit breaker signalled by its
auxiliary contact to the device via a binary input. This is valid if the circuit breaker is
always operated three-pole. In this case the make contact of the auxiliary contact is to
be connected to a binary input which must be allocated to the input function “>CB 3p
Closed” (FNo 00379). Then the other inputs are not assigned and the logic is limited
to the transmission of this input information.
If the breaker poles can be operated individually and e.g. only the series-connected
break contacts (pole open) are available, the associated binary input is also allocated
to function “>CB 3p Open” (FNo 00380). The other inputs are not assigned either in
that case.
If the breaker poles can be closed individually and the auxiliary contacts are acces-
sible individually, each auxiliary contact should be assigned its own binary input as far
as possible if the device can and is supposed to perform single-pole tripping. With the
help of this connection, the device can process a maximum amount of information.
Three binary inputs are necessary for this:
- “>CB Aux. L1” (FNo 00351), for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
- “>CB Aux. L2” (FNo 00352), for the auxiliary contact of pole L2,
- “>CB Aux. L3” (FNo 00353), for the auxiliary contact of pole L3,
The inputs FNo 00379 and FNo 00380 are not used in this case.
If the breaker poles can be operated individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both
the series-connected make contacts (pole closed) and the series-connected break
contacts (pole open) of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are available. The
series circuit of the make contacts is allocated on the input function “>CB 3p Closed”
(FNo 00379) and the series circuit of the break contacts on the input function “>CB
3p Open” (FNo 00380) in this case.
Please note that Figure 2-68 shows the entire logic of all connection possibilities. Only
a part of the inputs is used for the respective application as described above.
The 8 output signals of the circuit breaker status logic can be processed by the indi-
vidual protection and ancillary functions. The output signals are blocked if the signals
transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the circuit breaker
cannot be open and closed at the same time.
In 7SD52 the position of the circuit breaker poles detected by the device is also trans-
mitted to the remote end device(s). This way the position of the circuit breaker poles
is also recognized by at all other ends. The high-current switch-on-to-fault protection
(see 2.7.1) makes use of this function.
CB auxiliary contacts:
R 00380 ³1
& any pole closed
R 00351 ³1
& L1 open
R 00352 ³1
& L2 open
R 00353 ³1
& L3 open
³1
& any pole open
R 00379
8
L1, L2, L3 Circuit breaker
auxiliary contacts Plausibility
FNo ... Binary input with FNo check
PoleOpenCurrent
R ... Binary input is allocated 3
Special binary inputs are available for the auto-reclosure function and for the circuit
breaker check; they are to be handled in the same way and additionally allocated if
necessary. These inputs have an analogue meaning to the inputs described above
and are identified with “CB1 ...” for easier distinction:
- “>CB1 3p Closed” (FNo 00410) for the series circuit of the make contacts of the
auxiliary contacts,
- “>CB1 3p Open” (FNo 00411) for the series circuit of the closing contacts of the
auxiliary contacts,
- “>CB1 Pole L1” (FNo 00366) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
- “>CB1 Pole L2” (FNo 00367) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2,
- “>CB1 Pole L3” (FNo 00368) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3.
Phase Segregated The fault detection logic combines the pickup signals of all protection functions. For
Pickup those protection functions which allow phase-segregated pickup, the pickup informa-
tion is provided per phase. When a protection function has detected an earth fault, this
is also indicated. Thus the alarms “Relay PICKUP L1”, “Relay PICKUP L2”, “Re-
lay PICKUP L3” and “Relay PICKUP E” are available.
These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. Some protection functions
can also indicate the phase pickup as a group signal for the local displaying of fault
messages and for the transmission of the messages to a PC or a central control sys-
tem, e.g. “Diff Flt. L12E” for differential protection pickup L1–L2–E; only one of
these is displayed at a time and represents the entire pickup situation.
General Pickup The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device.
It is signalled with the alarm “Relay PICKUP”. If no protection function of the device
has picked up any longer, “Relay PICKUP” disappears (message: “Off”).
The general pickup is the precondition for a number of internal and external conse-
quential functions. Among these functions, which are controlled by the general pickup,
are:
· Start of a fault log: All fault messages are entered into the trip log from the beginning
of the general pickup to the drop-off.
· Initialization of the fault recording: The recording and storage of fault wave forms
can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command.
· Creation of spontaneous messages: Certain fault messages can be displayed as so
called spontaneous messages (see “Spontaneous Indications” below). This display
can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command.
· Start of the action time of the auto-reclosure (if available and used).
External functions can be controlled via an output contact. Examples are:
· Reclosure devices,
· Further additional devices or similar.
Spontaneous Spontaneous indications are alarms that are displayed automatically after a general
Indications pickup of the device or after the trip command of the device. In the case of 7SD52 they
are the following:
· “Diff PICKUP“: pickup of a protection function, e.g. the differential protection,
with phase indication;
· “PU Time: the operating time from the general pickup to the dropout of the
device, the time is given in ms;
· “TRIP Time: the operating time from the general pickup to the first trip
command of the device, the time is given in ms.
Three-pole Three-pole tripping is the usual action of the device in the event of a fault, single-pole
Tripping tripping, however, is also possible depending on the version ordered (see below). If a
single-pole tripping is generally not possible or not desired, the output function “Relay
TRIP 3ph.” is used for the output of commands to the circuit breaker. In these cases
the following subtitle on “Single-pole Tripping” is not relevant.
Single-pole Single-pole tripping is advisable only for overhead lines on which auto-reclosures are
Tripping to be executed and which are equipped with circuit breakers suitable for single-pole
tripping on all ends. In this case, in the event of a single-phase fault, the faulty phase
can be tripped single-pole with subsequent reclosure; in the event of two-phase or
three-phase faults with or without ground a three-pole tripping is issued in general.
Preconditions for pole-segregated tripping concerning the device are,
· that the device is equipped with pole-segregated tripping (according to the order
specification),
· that the tripping protection function is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (for ex-
ample, not for overload protection),
· that the binary input “>1p Trip Perm” is allocated and activated or that the internal
auto-reclosure function is ready for auto-reclosure on single-pole tripping.
In all other cases tripping will be three-pole. The binary input “>1p Trip Perm” is the
logic inversion of a three-pole coupling and is activated by an external auto-reclosure
device as long as this is ready for a single-pole auto-reclosure cycle.
With the 7SD52, three-pole coupling of the trip command is also possible if tripping
only concerns one phase but more than one phase has picked up. This can be the
case e.g. if two faults occur in two different places of which only one is within the range
of the differential protection zone. This is achieved with the help of setting parameter
3pole coupling (address 1155) which can be set to with PICKUP (each mul-
tiphase pickup leads to three-pole tripping) or with TRIP (three-pole tripping in the
event of a multi-pole trip command).
The tripping logic combines the trip signals of all protection functions. Trip commands
are output per phase if the protection functions allow single-pole tripping. The relevant
informations are “Relay TRIP L1”, “Relay TRIP L2” and “Relay TRIP L3”.
These informations can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of a three-
pole tripping all three informations are provided.
If single-pole tripping is possible, the protection functions can also output a group sig-
nal for the local displaying of alarms and for the transmission of the alarms to a PC or
a central control system, e.g. “Diff TRIP 1p L1”, “Diff TRIP 1p L2”, “Diff
TRIP 1p L3” for single-pole tripping by the differential protection and “Diff TRIP
L123” for three-pole tripping. Only one of these alarms is displayed at a time. These
informations are also used as trip commands to the circuit breaker.
Single-pole The single-pole tripping after a two-phase fault is a special case. If a phase-to-phase
Tripping after a fault clear of ground occurs in a grounded system, the fault may be cleared by a single-
Two-phase Fault pole auto-reclosure, since this is sufficient to interrupt the fault current loop. The phase
selected for this must be the same on all line ends and should be the same every-
where else within the system.
The setting parameter Trip2phFlt (address 1156A) allows to select whether this
tripping should be 1pole leading Ø, i.e. single-pole tripping of the leading phase,
or 1pole lagging Ø, i.e. single-pole tripping of the lagging phase. Standard setting
is 3pole, i.e. three-pole tripping after two-phase faults (default setting).
Table 2-7 shows a summary of the conditions for single-pole or three-pole tripping.
Table 2-7 Single- and three-pole tripping depending on the type of fault
Table 2-7 Single- and three-pole tripping depending on the type of fault
General Tripping All tripping signals of the protection functions are OR-combined and lead to the alarm
“Relay TRIP“. This can be allocated to an LED or output relay.
Terminating the Once a trip command is activated, it is stored separately for each pole (for all three
Trip Command poles after three-pole tripping, see Figure 2-69). At the same time a minimum trip com-
mand duration TMin TRIP CMD is started to ensure that the command is sent to the
circuit breaker long enough if the tripping protection function should drop off too quick-
ly. The trip commands cannot be terminated until the last protection function has
dropped off (no function activated) AND the minimum trip command time is over.
Another condition for terminating the trip command is that the circuit breaker is open
(with single-pole tripping the relevant circuit breaker pole). The current must have
fallen below the value that corresponds to the setting value PoleOpenCurrent (ad-
dress 1130A, refer to “Circuit Breaker Status” in Subsection 2.1.4, page 27) plus 10 %
of the fault current.
PoleOpenCurrent 1130
FNo 00507
Trip L1 S Q Relay TRIP L1
from Fig. 2-68 IL1
from protection fucntions
L1 open & R
FNo 00508
Trip L2 S Q Relay TRIP L2
from Fig. 2-68 IL2
& R
L2 open
FNo 00509
Trip L3 S Q Relay TRIP L3
from Fig. 2-68 IL3
& R
L3 open
&
³1
T
Reclosure When tripping the circuit breaker with a protection function the manual reclosure must
Interlocking often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. 7SD52
therefore provides the integrated reclosure interlocking function.
The interlocking feature is realized by a RS flipflop which is protected against auxiliary
voltage failure (see Figure 2-70). The RS flipflop is set via a binary input “>Lockout
SET” (FNo 00385). With the output alarm “LOCKOUT” (FNo 00530), if interconnected
correspondingly, a reclosure of the circuit breaker (e.g. for automatic reclosure, man-
ual close signal, synchronization, closing via control) can be blocked. Only once the
cause for the protection operation is known, should the interlocking be reset by a man-
ual reset via binary input “>Lockout RESET” (FNo 00386).
Conditions which cause reclosure interlocking and control commands which have to
be interlocked can be set individually. The two inputs and the output can be wired via
the correspondingly allocated binary inputs and outputs or be linked via user-defined
logic functions (CFC).
If, for example, each trip by the protection function has to cause a reclosing lock-out,
then combine the tripping command “Relay TRIP” (FNo 00511) with the binary input
“>Lockout SET” (FNo 00385). If automatic reclosure is applied, only the final trip of
the protection function should activate reclosing lock-out. Then combine the output
alarm “Final Trip” (FNo 00536) with the interlocking input “>Lockout SET” (FNo
00385), so that the interlocking function is not activated when an automatic reclosure
is still expected to come.
In the most simple case the output alarm “LOCKOUT” (FNo 00530) can be allocated to
the output which trips the circuit breaker without creating further links. Then the trip-
ping command is maintained until the interlock is reset via the binary reset input. Nat-
urally it has to be ensured in advance that the close coil at the circuit breaker — as is
usually done — is blocked as long as a tripping command is maintained.
The output alarm “LOCKOUT” can also be applied to interlock certain closing com-
mands (externally or via CFC), e.g. by combining the output alarm with the binary input
“>CloseCmd.Blo” (FNo 00357) or by connecting the inverted alarm with the bay in-
terlocking of the feeder.
The reset input “>Lockout RESET” (FNo 00386) resets the interlocking state. This
input is initiated by an external device which is protected against unauthorized or un-
intentional operation. The interlocking state can also be controlled by internal sources,
e.g.
a function key, operation of the device or using DIGSI® on a PC.
For each case please make sure the corresponding logical combinations, security
measures, etc. are taken into account for the routing of the binary inputs and outputs
and are also considered for the setting of user-defined logic functions, if necessary.
For further information refer to the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, order no. E50417–
H1176–C151.
Breaker Trip Alarm While on feeder without automatic reclosure every trip command by a protection func-
Suppression tion is final, it is desirable, when using automatic reclosure, to prevent the operation
detector of the circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the breaker) from sending an alarm
if the trip of the breaker is not final (Figure 2-71).
For this purpose, the signal from the circuit breaker is routed via a correspondingly al-
located output contact of the 7SD52 (output indication “CB Alarm Supp”, FNo
00563). In the idle state and when the device is turned off, this contact remains
closed. Therefore an output contact with a normally closed contact (NC contact) must
be available.
Prior to the command, with the internal automatic reclosure in the ready state, the con-
tact is opened so that no signal from the circuit breaker is forwarded. This applies only
if the device is equipped with the automatic reclosure function and this is configured
to be enabled (Subsection 2.1.1).
Also when closing the breaker via the binary input “>Manual Close” (FNo 00356)
or via the integrated automatic reclosure the contact is opened so that no breaker
alarm can be passed during closure.
Further optional closing commands which are not sent via the device cannot be taken
into consideration. Closing commands for control can be linked to the alarm suppres-
sion via the user-defined logic functions (CFC).
If the device issues a final trip command, the contact remains closed. This is the case,
during the reclaim time of the automatic reclosure cycle, when the automatic reclosure
is blocked or switched off or, due to other reasons is not ready for automatic reclosure
(e.g. tripping only occurred after the action time expired).
Figure 2-72 shows time diagrams for manual trip and close as well as for protection
tripping with a single unsuccessful automatic reclosure attempt.
(Signalling
L+ Voltage) 7SD52
Alarm:
“Breaker Trip”
Figure 2-71 Breaker tripping alarm suppression
Manual trip
(as desired)
Protection
pick-up
Protection
trip
Auto-reclosure
(AR) AR dead time
CB Pole
CB Operation
Detector
Binary output
“CB Alarm Supp”
Alarm:
“Breaker Trip”
Manual opening Final trip of protection function
“No Trip no Flag” The storage of alarms allocated to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous
alarms can be made dependent on the device sending a trip command. Fault event
information is then not output when one or more protection functions have picked up
due to a fault but no tripping occurred because the fault was removed by another de-
vice (e.g. on a different line). The information is thus limited to faults on the protected
line “no trip – no flag”.
Figure 2-73 shows the logic diagram of this function.
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD
Target on PU
“1“ Target on TRIP
CB Operation The number of trips caused by the device 7SD52 is counted. If the device is to be used
Statistics for single-pole tripping, this number is counted for each CB pole individually.
Furthermore, the interrupted current for each pole is acquired, provided as an informa-
tion and accumulated in a memory. The maximum interrupted current can be re-
trieved, too.
If the device is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the automatic
closing commands are counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole trip, after
three-pole trip, as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and further reclosure
cycles.
The levels of these counted values are buffered against auxiliary voltage failure. They
can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For further information refer to the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151.
The differential protection 7SD52 allows an easy check of the trip circuits and the cir-
cuit breakers.
The test programs according to Table 2-8 are available for the test. Of course, single-
pole tests are available only if the device is suitable for single-pole tripping.
The output alarms mentioned must be allocated to the relevant command relays that
are used for controlling the circuit breaker coils.
The test is started via the operation panel on the front of the device or via the PC with
DIGSI®. Figure 2-74 shows the chronological sequence of one TRIP-CLOSE test
cycle. The set times are those stated in Subsection 2.1.2 for “Command Duration” (ad-
dresses 240A TMin TRIP CMD and 241A TMax CLOSE CMD) and “Circuit Breaker
Test” (address 242 T-CBtest-dead). Details how to proceed are given in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151.
Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate the status of the circuit breaker or
of its poles to the device via binary inputs, the test cycle can only be initiated if the cir-
cuit breaker is closed.
The information on the circuit breaker status during the circuit breaker test is not au-
tomatically adopted from the position logic according to 2.13.2 (Figure 2-68). It is rath-
er that special binary inputs are provided to process the breaker status feedbacks for
the circuit breaker test. This must be taken into consideration when allocating the bi-
nary inputs, as described in Subsection 2.13.2.
The device displays the states of the test sequence with the respective indications.
Item Circuit
Test programs Output alarms (FNo)
no. breaker
1 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L1 CB1-TESTtrip L1 (07325)
2 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L2 CB1-TESTtrip L2 (07326)
3 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L3 LS 1 CB1-TESTtrip L3 (07327)
4 Three-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle CB1-TESTtrip123 (07328)
Associated close command CB1-TEST close (07329)
TRIP
CLOSE
The parameters for the tripping logic of the entire device and the circuit breaker test
have already been set in Subsections 2.1.4 and 2.1.2.
Address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD still decides whether the alarms that are allocated
to local LEDs and the spontaneous alarms that appear on the local display after a fault
should be stored on every pickup of a protection function (Target on PU) or whether
they should be stored only when a tripping command is given (Target on TRIP).
Fault Display
Circuit Breaker
Test
The device is provided with a comprehensive commissioning and monitoring tool that
checks the communication and the whole differential protection system. Using a per-
sonal computer in conjunction with a web-browser this tool enables the user to chart
the state of the system and the communication of the differential protection clearly.
The necessary operator software is integrated in the device; online-help can be found
on the DIGSI®-CD and is also available in the Internet.
To ensure a proper communication between the device and the PC browser the trans-
mission speed must be equal for both. Furthermore, the user must set an IP-address
so that the browser can identify the device.
Thanks to the “IBS-tool” the user is able to operate the device with the PC. On the PC-
screen the front panel of the device is emulated, a function that can also be deactivat-
ed by the settings.
The parameters of the “IBS-tool” can be set separately for the front operating interface
and the service interface. The relevant addresses are those which relate to the inter-
face that is used for communication with the PC and the “IBS-tool”.
Addresses 4401 to 4406 are to configure the front interface. The 12-digit IP-address
is formatted as follows: ***.***.***.***. There is a 3-digit block in each of the following
setting addresses: 4401 IP-A (A.x.x.x), 4402 IP-B (x.B.x.x), 4403 IP-C
(x.x.C.x) and 4404 IP-D (x.x.x.D).
The address 4405 NUM LOCK determines if the differential protection device should
be operated with the “IBS-tool” from the PC. When setting YES, the devices cannot be
operated by the front panel emulation of the PC. This is the normal state during oper-
ation. Once this address is set to NO during commissioning, all device parameters can
be changed to correct, for example, false or inconsistent settings.
In address 4406 LCP/NCP set if your PC-interface supports LCP (Link Control Proto-
col) and NCP (Network Control Protocol). To make possible the long-distance data
transmission for a point-to-point connection the setting must be YES (default setting).
When using a star coupler only one device (master-device) requires the setting YES,
the other devices require NO.
Addresses 4411 IP-A (A.x.x.x), 4412 IP-B (x.B.x.x), 4413 IP-C
(x.x.C.x) and 4414 IP-D (x.x.x.D), 4415 NUM LOCK and 4416 LCP/NCP are
to configure the rear interface.
2.15.1.1 General
For the detailed fault analysis, the information regarding the reaction of the protection
device and the measured values following a system fault are of interest. For this pur-
pose, the device provides information processing which operates in a threefold man-
ner:
Indicators (LEDs) Important events and states are indicated with optical indicators (LED) on the front
and Binary Outputs plate. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. Most of the sig-
(Output Relays) nals and indications can be marshalled, i.e. routing can be changed from the preset-
ting with delivery. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC® 4 system
manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151. The state of the delivered relay (presetting)
is listed in Section A.4 of the Appendix.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode
(each may be individually set).
The latched state is saved against loss of auxiliary supply. It is reset:
- locally by operation of the key LED reset on the front of the device,
- from remote via a binary input,
- via one of the serial interfaces,
- automatically on detection of a new fault.
Condition messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the condi-
tion to be reported has reset. This applies to e.g. messages from monitoring functions,
or similar.
A green LED indicates that the device is in service (“RUN”); it can not be reset. It ex-
tinguishes if the self-monitoring of the microprocessor recognizes a fault or if the aux-
iliary supply fails.
In the event that the auxiliary supply is available while there is an internal device fail-
ure, the red LED (“ERROR”) is illuminated and the device is blocked.
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC®4 device can be individually
and precisely checked using DIGSI®. This feature is used to verify wiring from the de-
vice to plant equipment during commissioning (refer also to Subsection 3.3.4).
Information on the Events and states can be obtained from the LCD on the front plate of the device. A
Integrated Display personal computer can be connected to the front interface or the service interface for
(LCD) or to a retrieval of information.
Personal Computer
In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display
selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values). In
the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the so-called spontaneous
displays, are displayed instead. The quiescent state information is displayed again
once the fault messages have been acknowledged. The acknowledgement is identical
to the resetting of the LEDs (see above).
The device in addition has several event buffers for operational messages, switching
statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a battery
buffer. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection via the
keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC interface.
The retrieval of events/alarms during operation is extensively described in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151.
With a PC and the protection data processing program DIGSI® it is also possible to
retrieve and display the events with the convenience of visualisation on a monitor and
a menu-guided dialogue. The data may be printed or stored for later evaluation.
Information to a If the device has a serial system interface, the information may additionally be trans-
Control Centre ferred via this interface to a centralized control and monitoring system. Several com-
munication protocols are available for the transfer of this information.
You may test whether the information is transmitted correctly with DIGSI®.
Also the information transmitted to the control centre can be influenced during opera-
tion or tests. For on-site monitoring, the IEC protocol 60870–5–103 offers the option
to add a comment saying “test mode” to all annunciations and measured values trans-
mitted to the control centre. It is then understood as the cause of annunciation and
there is no doubt on the fact that messages do not derive from real disturbances. Al-
ternatively, you may disable the transmission of annunciations to the system interface
during tests (“transmission block”).
To influence information at the system interface during test mode (“test mode” and
“transmission block”) a CFC logic is required. Default settings already include this log-
ic (see Appendix A.4, margin heading “Preset CFC-Charts”, page 310).
For information on how to enable and disable the test mode and the transmission
block see for the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual E50417–H1176–C151.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the de-
vice, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix.
The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a
SIPROTEC® 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions are not
present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as “Disabled” in device
configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.
Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation
and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological
order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has
been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message.
Operational annunciations come in automatically and can be read out from the device
display or a personal computer. Faults in the power system are indicated with “Net-
work Fault” and the present fault number. The fault messages (Trip Log) contain
details about the history of faults. This topic is discussed in Subsection 2.15.1.3.
Following a system fault, it is possible to for example retrieve important information re-
garding its progress, such as pickup and trip. The start of the fault is time stamped with
the absolute time of the internal system clock. The progress of the disturbance is out-
put with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection (first pickup of a protec-
tion function), so that the duration of the fault until tripping and up to reset of the trip
command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms.
A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection, i.e. first pick-
up of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection, i.e. dropout
of the last protection function, or after the expiry of the auto-reclose reclaim time, so
that several unsuccessful auto-reclose cycles are also stored cohesively. Accordingly
a system fault may contain several individual fault events (from fault detection up to
reset of fault detection).
Spontaneous The spontaneous messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pick-
Displays up of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the device
front in the sequence shown in Figure 2-75.
Diff Pickup L1E Protection function that had picked up latest, e.g.
differencial protection, with phase information;
PU Time 93 ms Elapsed time from pick-up until drop-off;
TRIP Time 0 ms Elapsed time from pick-up until the first trip com-
mand of a protection function;
differential protection mostly 0
Retrieved The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. Altogether up to 600
messages indications can be stored. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is
full.
The messages in switching statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted
currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of control commands issued by the
device to the breakers, and the maximum interrupted currents. The interrupted cur-
rents are in primary terms.
Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running
DIGSI® and connected to the operating or service interface.
In 7SD52 the statistics register the data of the protection communication. The trans-
mission time of the information from device to device via protection data interfaces (to
and fro) is measured steadily and registered in the folder “Statistic”. The availability of
the means of transmission is also indicated. The availability is indicated in %/min and
%/h. This enables the user to assess the transmission quality.
The counters and memories of the statistics are saved by the device. Therefore the
information will not get lost in case the auxiliary voltage supply fails. The counters,
however, can be reset back to zero or to any value within the setting range.
A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is re-
quired to change or delete the statistics. For further information see the SIPROTEC®
4 System Manual (order-no. E50417–H1176–C151).
Display and Operating measured values and metered values are determined in the background by
Transmission of the processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via
Measured Values the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI®, or transferred to a central master sta-
tion via the system interface (if available).
The operational measured values are also calculated in the event of a running fault in
intervals of approximately 2 s.
Precondition for a correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete
and correct entry of the rated values of the instrument transformers and the power sys-
tem as well as the transformation ratio of the current and voltage transformers in the
ground paths according to Subsection 2.1.2.
Table 2-9 shows a survey of the measured values of the local device. Depending on
the version ordered, the connection of the device, and the configured protection func-
tions, only a part of the measured operating values listed in Table 2-9 is available.
Voltages can only be available if the voltages phase-to earth are connected to the re-
lay and this is in accordance with the configuration of the device. The residual voltage
3U0 is the e-n-voltage multiplied by Ö3 (if Uen is connected) or calculated from the
phase-to-earth-voltages 3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|. For this the three voltage inputs
phase-to-earth must be connected.
The power components P, Q are positive, when real power or inductive reactive power
are flowing into the protected object, assuming that this direction has been parameter-
ized as “forward”.
The sign of the power factor cos j corresponds to the sign of the real power.
Overload measured values can appear only if the overload protection was configured
Enabled.
Differential The differential and restraint values of the differential protection are listed in Table 2-
Protection Values 10.
Remote Measured When the 7SD52 devices communicate, the data of the opposite ends of the protected
Values object can be read out. The currents and voltages involved as well as phase shifts be-
tween the local and remote measured quantities can be displayed. This is especially
helpful for checking the correct and coherent phase allocation at the different line ends
and for the verification of the vector group if a power transformer is within the protected
zone. Furthermore, the device addresses of the other device are transmitted. In this
way all important data of all ends are available at any line end. All possible data are
listed in Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Operational measured values transmitted from the other ends and compared
with the local values
Data % referring to
Device ADR Device address of the remote device (abs)
IL1, IL2, IL3 remote Phase currents of the remote device Rated operat. current 1)
IL1, IL2, IL3 local Phase currents of the local device Rated operat. current 1)
j(IL1), j(IL2), j(IL3) Phase angles between the remote °
and the local phase currents
UL1, UL2, UL3 remote Voltages of the remote device Rated operat. voltage/Ö3 2)
UL1, UL2, UL3 local Voltages of the local device Rated operat. voltage/Ö3 2)
j(UL1), j(UL2), j(UL3) Phase angles between the remote °
and the local voltages
1
) for lines according to address 1104 (see Subsection 2.1.4),
for transformers calculated from address 1106 (see Subsection 2.1.4) IN = SN /(Ö3·UN)
2) according to address 1103 (see Subsection 2.1.4)
Transmission In 7SD52 the data concerning the protection communication is registered in statistics.
Statistics The transmission times of the information between the devices via interfaces (send
and receive) are measured continuously. The values are kept stored in the Statis-
tics folder. The availability of the transmission media is also reported. The availabil-
ity is indicated in %/min and %/h. This allows the user to assess the quality of the
transmission.
If GPS-synchronization is configured, the transmission times for each direction and
each protection data interface are regularly measured and indicated as long as GPS-
synchronization is intact.
“IBS-tool” The “IBS-tool” is a comprehensive commissioning and visualization tool which en-
ables the user to chart data of the complete differential protection system on a PC-
screen by means of an internet browser. Measured values and the values derived
from them are graphically displayed as phasor diagrams. You can also view tripping
diagrams. Scalar values are shown in numerical form. For more details refer to the
“Online Help” for the “IBS-tool”.
This tool allows to illustrate the measured values, the currents, voltages (if connected
to the system) and their phase relationship for all devices connected to the differential
protection system. In addition to phasor diagrams, numerical values as well as fre-
quency and device addresses are indicated. Figure 2-76 shows an example.
Additionally, the position of the differential and restraint values can be viewed in the
pickup characteristic.
Figure 2-76 Local measured values in the “IBS-tool” — example for voltages and currents
The differential protection 7SD52 is equipped with a fault recording function. The in-
stantaneous values of the measured quantities
iL1, iL2, iL3, 3 i0, uL1, uL2, uL3, 3 u0 and IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3, IRestL1, IRestL2, IRest L3
(voltages depending on the connection) are sampled at 1 ms intervals (for a frequency
of 50 Hz) and stored in a cyclic buffer (20 samples per period). During a system fault
these data are stored over a time span that can be set (5 s at the longest for each fault
record). Up to 8 faults can be stored. The total capacity of the fault record memory is
approx. 15 s. The fault recording buffer is updated when a new fault occurs, so that
acknowledging is not necessary. Fault recording can be initiated, additionally to the
protection pickup, via the integrated operator panel, the serial operator interface and
the serial service interface.
For the differential protection system of a protected object all fault records of all ends
are synchronized by time management features. This ensures that all fault records op-
erate with exactly the same time basis. Therefore equal measured values are coinci-
dent at all ends.
The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer
and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI® and the graphic
analysis software SIGRA. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during
the system fault and calculates additional information from the measured values. A se-
lection may be made as to whether the measured quantities are represented as pri-
mary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. “fault
detection”, “tripping” are also represented.
If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on
to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by the respec-
tive programs in the central device. The measured quantities are referred to their max-
imum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation. In
addition, internal events are recorded as binary traces (marks), e.g. “fault detection”,
“tripping”.
Where transfer to a central device is possible, the request for data transfer can be ex-
ecuted automatically. It can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the
protection, or only after a trip.
Data Storage for The parameters of the fault recording memory are set in the sub-menu Oscillo-
Fault Recording graphic Fault Recordings of the menu Settings.
Distinction is made between the starting instant (i.e. the instant where time tagging is
T = 0) and the criterion to save the record (address 402A WAVEFORMTRIGGER). With
the setting Save w. Pickup, the starting instant and the criterion for saving are the
same: the pickup of any protective element. The option Save w. TRIP means that
the pickup of a protective function still starts fault recording but the record is saved only
if the device issues a trip command. The third option for address 402A is Start w.
TRIP: A trip command issued by the device is both the starting instant and the criterion
to save the record.
A fault event starts with the fault detection of any protection function and ends with the
reset of the last fault detection. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (ad-
dress 403A WAVEFORM DATA = Fault event). If automatic reclosure is implement-
ed, the entire system disturbance — possibly with several reclose attempts — up to
the final fault clearance can be stored (address 403A WAVEFORM DATA =
Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history,
but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-reclosure dead time(s).
The actual storage amount of data encompasses the pre-trigger time PRE. TRIG.
TIME (address 411) before the starting instant, the normal recording time and the
post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 412) after the storage criterion has reset.
The maximum permissible storage period per fault recording MAX. LENGTH is set in
address 410. A maximum recording time of 5 s is available per fault recording. In total
up to 8 fault records with a total recording time of max. 15 s can be stored.
An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved via a binary input or via the op-
erating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The length of the fault re-
cording is set in address 415 BinIn CAPT.TIME (maximum length however is MAX.
LENGTH, address 410). The pre- and post-fault times are additive. If the time for the
binary input is set to ¥, the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is
activated (static), the maximum length however still is MAX. LENGTH (address 410).
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI®, under “Additional Settings”.
Fault Recording
403A WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Power System fault
410 MAX. LENGTH 0.30..5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Cap-
ture Record
411 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
412 POST REC. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
415 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10..5.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
Statistics
Local Values
00602 IL2 = I L2
00603 IL3 = I L3
Remote Values
Diff-Values
Fault Recording
General In addition to the protective functions described so far, control command processing
is integrated in the SIPROTEC® 7SD52 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers
and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four
command sources:
- Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device,
- Local or remote operation using DIGSI®,
- Remote operation via system (SCADA) interface (e.g. SICAM),
- Automatic functions (e.g. using a binary inputs, CFC).
The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is basically limited by the
number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control
commands it has be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are con-
figured and provided with the correct properties.
If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user
can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic func-
tions (CFC).
The configuration of the binary inputs and outputs, the preparation of user defined log-
ic functions, and the procedure during switching operations are described in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151.
Control Commands These commands operate binary outputs and change the power system status:
· Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (without synchro-check) as well as
commands for the control of isolators and earthing disconnectors,
· Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps,
· Commands with configurable time settings (e.g. Petersen coils).
Internal / Pseudo These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal
Commands functions, simulate or acknowledge changes of state.
· Manual entries to change the feedback indication of plant such as the status condi-
tion, for example in the case when the physical connection to the auxiliary contacts
is not available or is defective. The process of manual entries is recorded and can
be displayed accordingly.
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be
released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded.
Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately for
each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored after its release.
The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following:
Check Sequence · Command entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device)
- Check password ® access rights;
- Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) ® selection of deac-
tivated interlocking status.
· User configurable interlocking checks that can be selected for each command
- Switching authority (local, remote),
- Switching direction control (target state = present state),
- Zone controlled/bay interlocking (logic using CFC),
- System interlocking (centrally via SICAM),
- Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation),
- Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions).
· Fixed command checks
- Timeout monitoring (time between command initiation and execution can be
monitored),
- Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are re-
jected or delayed),
- Equipment not present at output (if controllable equipment is not assigned to a
binary output, then the command is denied),
- Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and
is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is de-
nied),
- Component hardware malfunction,
- Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each
circuit breaker or switch),
- 1-out-of-n check (for schemes with multiple assignments and common potential
contact, it is checked whether a command has already been initiated for the
common output contact).
2.16.3 Interlocking
The command checks that can be selected for the SIPROTEC®-relays are also re-
ferred to as “standard interlocking”. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or de-
activated (non interlocked) via DIGSI®.
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are by-
passed in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked in
the command check routines. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be
rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. “CO-”), followed by an operation
response information. Table 2-12 shows some types of commands and messages. For
the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI®
they appear in spontaneous messages.
The “plus” sign indicated in the message is a confirmation of the command execution:
the command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a
negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 2-77 shows the messages
relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful
operation of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and
tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual
entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.
EVENT LOG
---------------------
19.06.99 11:52:05,625
Q0 CO+ close
19.06.99 11:52:06,134
Q0 FB+ close
Figure 2-77 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0
Standard The standard interlocking includes the checks for each device which were set during
Interlocking the configuration of inputs and outputs.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure
2-78.
AUTO
&
Remote &
Switching Authority
(Local/Remote)
& DIGSI
The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters ex-
plained in the following table 2-13.
Figure 2-79 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of
the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in
Table 2-13. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 2-79).
Interlocking 01/03
--------------------
Q0 Close/Open S – Z P B
Q1 Close/Open S – Z P B
Q8 Close/Open S – Z P B
Control Logic using For zone controlled/field interlocking, control logic can be programmed, using the
CFC CFC. Via specific release conditions the information “released” or “bay interlocked”
are available.
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further processing of in-
formation, command and process feedback information are sent to the message
processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. The messages
are entered in the event list.
Acknowledgement All information which relates to commands that were issued from the device front
of Commands to “Command Issued = Local” is transformed into a corresponding message and shown
the Device Front in the display of the device.
Acknowledgement The messages which relate to commands with the origin “Command Issued = Local/
of Commands to Remote/DIGSI” are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (config-
Local/Remote/Digsi uration on the serial digital interface).
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not provided with a response indica-
tion as it is done with the local command but with ordinary recorded command and
feedback information.
Monitoring of Feed- The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feed-
back Information back information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the moni-
toring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls
whether the device operation is executed with the required final result within the mon-
itoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information is de-
tected. If no feedback information arrives, a response “Timeout command monitoring
time” is indicated and the command sequence is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the
execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of
the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback in-
formation, the command output resets.
The “plus” appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was suc-
cessful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a neg-
ative confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear are described
and Switching in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, order no. E50417–H1176–C151.
Relays
Warning!
The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, and application by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and
hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or substantial
property damage.
Preconditions Verify that the 7SD52 has the expected features by checking the complete ordering
number with the ordering number codes given in Section A.1 of the Appendix. Also
check that the required and expected accessories are included with the device. The
ordering number of the device is on the nameplate sticker on the housing. The name-
plate also indicates the ratings of the device. A verification that these ratings are the
expected values is especially important.
3.1.1 Installation
Panel Flush Depending on the version of the device, the housing size may be 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19 inch
Mounting rack. For the size 1/2 (Figure 3-1) there are 4 covers and four holes for securing the
device, with size 1/1 (Figure 3-2) there are six covers and six securing holes.
q Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, for size
1/ the 2 additional covering caps located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the
1
4 or 6 slots in the mounting flange.
q Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten with 4 or 6 screws. Refer to Figure
4-5 or 4-6 in Section 4.13 for dimensions.
q Replace the four or six cover caps.
q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of
the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
Elongated
holes SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Elongated SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7SD52
holes
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
q Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the panel.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
The System Manual (order-no. E50417–H1176–C151) has pertinent information re-
garding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the
brief reference booklet attached to the device.
Rack Mounting and Depending on the version of the device, the housing size may be 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19 inch
Cubicle Mounting rack. For the size 1/2 (Figure 3-3) there are 4 covers and four holes for securing the
device, with size 1/1 (Figure 3-4) there are six covers and six securing holes.
To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The
ordering codes are stated in the Appendix in Section A.1.1.
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
q Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws.
q Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, for size
1
/1 the 2 additional covering caps located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the
4 or 6 slots in the mounting flange.
q Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
q Replace the four or six covering caps.
q Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws.
q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any oth-
er control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the
ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
q Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the rack.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
Panel Surface q Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figures 4-7 or 4-8 in
Mounting Section 4.13 for dimensions.
q Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The cross-
sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sec-
tional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the
cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
q Solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area ³ 2.5 mm2) must
be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for
the device ground.
q Connect the screwed terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to the
wiring diagram for the panel. Optical connections are made on the inclined housings
on the top and/or bottom of the case.
The System Manual (order-no. E50417–H1176–C151) has pertinent information re-
garding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the
brief reference booklet attached to the device.
Outline diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current and
voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be checked that the
setting configuration of the Power System Data 1 corresponds with the connec-
tions to the device.
Currents The Figures A-13 and A-14 show examples of the current transformer connection op-
tions.
For the normal connection according to Figure A-13 address 220 must be set to I4
transformer = In prot. line, and furthermore address 221 must be set to I4/
Iph CT = 1.000.
For the connection as shown in Figure A-14 the setting of address 220 must also be
I4 transformer = In prot. line. The factor 221 I4/Iph CT may deviate from
1. For notes on how to calculate the factor, refer to Subsection 2.1.2 under “Connec-
tion of the Currents”.
Voltages This Section is only relevant if the measured voltages are connected to the device, a
condition which was already set during the configuration (address 144, see Section
2.1.1).
The Figures A-15 and A-16 show examples of the voltage transformer connection op-
tions.
For the normal connection as shown in Figure A-15 the fourth voltage measuring input
U4 is not used. Correspondingly address 211 must be set to U4 transformer = Not
connected. The factor in address 211 Uph / Udelta must however be set to 1.73
(this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording
values).
Figure A-16 shows the additional connection of an e-n-winding of the voltage trans-
former set. Address 210 U4 transformer = Udelta transf. must be set. The
factor in address 211 Uph / Udelta depends on the transformation ratio of the e-n-
winding. For more information refer to “Connection of the Voltages” in Subsection
2.1.2.
Binary Inputs and The connections to the power plant depend on the possible allocation of the binary
Outputs inputs and outputs, i.e. how they are assigned to the power equipment. The preset al-
location of the binary inputs and outputs of the device can be found in Tables A-1 and
A-2 in Section A.4 of Appendix A. Also check that the labels on the front panel corre-
spond to the configured message functions.
It is also very important that the feedback components (auxiliary contacts) of the circuit
breaker monitored are connected to the correct binary inputs which assigned for this
purpose (if used).
Changing Setting If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note:
Groups with Binary
· Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups
Inputs
when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for “>Set
Group Bit 0”, the other input for “>Set Group Bit 1”. If either of these input
functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled.
· To control two setting groups, one binary input set for “>Set Group Bit 0” is
sufficient since the binary input “>Set Group Bit 1”, which is not assigned, is
considered to be not controlled.
· The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting
group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active.
Table 3-1 shows the relationship between “>Set Group Bit 0”, “>Set Group Bit
1”, and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary in-
puts are illustrated in Figure 3-5. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set
Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated bi-
nary input is energized (high).
no no Group A
yes no Group B
no yes Group C
yes yes Group D
no = not energized
yes = energized
A 7SD52
B
L+ C
L–
D
Binary input set for: 8
”>Set Group Bit 1”, High
Figure 3-5 Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs
Trip Circuit Super- It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R
vision must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore
be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage.
If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must
be volt-free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure 3-
6). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary con-
tact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The val-
ue of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore
Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked
up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.
UCTR
L+ 7SD52
FNo 06854
UBI >TripC1 TripRel
7SD52
RTC
Legend:
RTC —
Relay Tripping Contact
CB —
Circuit Breaker
R TC —
circuit breaker Trip Coil
Aux1 —
circuit breaker Auxiliary contact
(closed when CB is closed)
TC Aux1 Aux2 Aux2 — circuit breaker Auxiliary contact
CB (closed when CB is open)
R — bypass Resistor
UCTR — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI — input voltage for Binary Input
L–
Figure 3-6 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected.
R max + R min
R = ---------------------------------
2
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is
derived as:
U CRT – U BI min
R max = æ --------------------------------------ö – R CBTC
è I BI (High) ø
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is
derived as:
U CTR – U TC (LOW)
R min = R TC × æè -----------------------------------------------öø
U TC (LOW)
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with
the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented
in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Subsection 3.1.3).
For the power consumption of the resistor:
U CTR 2
P R = I × R = æ ----------------------------ö × R
2
è R + R CBTCø
Example:
IBI (HIGH) 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC® 7SD52)
UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V
UCTR 110 V from trip circuit (control voltage)
RCBTC 500 W from trip circuit (resistance of CB trip coil)
UCBTC (LOW) 2 V from trip circuit (max. voltage not to trip breaker)
110 V – 19 V
R max = æ ----------------------------------ö – 500 W
è 1.8 mA ø
110 V – 2 V
R min = 500 W æ ------------------------------ö – 500 W
è 2V ø
R max = 50.1kW
R min = 27 kW
R max + R min
- = 38.6 kW
R = -------------------------------
2
The closest standard value of 39 kW is selected; the power is:
110 V 2
P R = æ ----------------------------------------ö × 39 kW
è 39 kW + 0.5 kWø
P R ³ 0.3 W
3.1.3.1 General
Power Supply There are different input ranges for the power supply voltage. Refer to the data for the
Voltage 7SD52 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of Appendix A. The power supplies with the
ratings 60/110/125 VDC and 110/125/220/250 VDC / 115 VAC are interconvertible.
Jumper settings determine the rating. The assignment of these jumpers to the supply
voltages are illustrated below in Section 3.1.3.3 under subtitle “Input/Output Board I/
O-1 and I/O-10”. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the
name-plate sticker. Generally, they need not be altered.
Nominal Currents Jumper settings determine the rating of the current input transducers of the device.
When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker
to 1 A or 5 A. The physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the dif-
ferent current ratings are described below in Section 3.1.3.3 under subtitle „Input/Out-
put Board I/O-2“.
Note:
If nominal current ratings are changed for exceptional reason, then the new ratings
must be recorded under address 206 CT SECONDARY in the Power System Data
1 (see Subsection 2.1.2).
Control Voltages When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
for Binary Inputs a voltage that corresponds to the rated voltage of the power supply. In general, to op-
timize the operation of the inputs, the pickup voltage of the inputs should be set to
most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a
pickup voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set
according to the function performed.
Jumper positions can be changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The
physical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pickup voltages is
explained below in Section 3.1.3.3 under “Input/Output Board I/O-1 and I/O-10”.
Note:
If the 7SD52 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and
a resistor, are connected in series. The pickup voltage of these inputs must be less
than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.
Contact Mode for Input and output boards may contain relays the contact of which can be set as normal-
Binary Outputs ly closed or normally open contact. Therefore it is necessary to rearrange a jumper.
Subsection 3.1.3.3, “Input/Output Board I/O-1 and I/O-10” and “Input/Output Board I/
O-2” describes to which type of relays in which boards this applies.
Interface Modules The serial interface modules can be replaced in models for installation in panels or cu-
bicles. Which kind of interfaces and how the interfaces can be replaced is described
in „Replacing Interface Modules”, Subsection 3.1.3.4.
Termination of If the device is equipped with a serial RS 485 port, the RS 485 bus must be terminated
Serial Interfaces with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For
this purpose, terminating resistors are provided on the interface modules. The physi-
cal arrangement and jumper positions on the interface modules CPU-board are ex-
plained in Subsection 3.1.3.4 under “RS485 Interfaces”.
Spare Parts Spare parts may be the backup battery that maintains the data in the battery-buffered
RAM when the voltage supply fails, and the miniature fuse of the internal power
supply. Their physical location is shown in Figures 3-12 (battery) and 3-9 (mini-fuse).
The ratings of the fuse are shown in Table 3-2. When exchanging the battery or fuse,
please observe the hints given in the System Manual (order no. E50417–H1176–
C151) in Chapter “Maintenance”.
If changes to jumper settings are required to modify the rating of the power supply, the
nominal rating of the current inputs, the pickup voltage of binary inputs, or the state of
the terminating resistors, proceed as follows:
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the de-
vice. Self-adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement stickers.
o Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to
damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
- screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
- 1 Phillips screwdriver,
- 5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at loca-
tion “A”.
This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o If the device has more communication interfaces on the rear, the screws located diag-
onally to the interfaces must be removed.
This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
o Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part.
The order of the boards for housing size 1/2 is shown in Figure 3-7, for housing size
1
/1 refer to Figure 3-8.
o At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the CPU board
(). To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push
down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front cover.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the CPU board () and the I/O-11 boards
().
o Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from electro-
static damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in
versions of the device for surface mounting, because of the plug connectors.
o Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-9 to 3-14 and the following notes. Change
or remove the jumpers as necessary.
1 2 2 4 3
1 2 4 3
1 2 2 4 3
Input/Output Board The design of a jumper setting for the input/output board I/O-1 is shown in Figure 3-9.
I/O-1 and I/O-10 the input/output board I/O-10 in Figure 3-10.
o The power supply is situated
for housing size 1/2 on the input/output board I/O-1 ( in Figure 3-7, slot 19),
for housing size 1/1 on the input/output board I/O-1 ( in Figure 3-8, slot 33 left).
The preset rated voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table
3-2, the quiescent state of the life contact is checked according to Table 3-3.
Table 3-2 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
input/output board I/O-1 with power supply
Nominal voltage
Jumper DC 110/125/220/250 V
DC 60/110/125 V DC 24/48 V
AC 115 V
X51 1–2 2–3 Jumpers
X51 to X53 not
X52 1–2 and 3–4 2–3
fitted
X53 1–2 2–3
can be interchanged not changeable
Mini-fuse T2H250V T4H250V
Table 3-3 Jumper settings for the quiescent state of the life contact on the input/output
board I/O-1 with power supply
Jumper Open in quiescent state (NO) Closed in quiescent state (NC) presetting
X40 1–2 2–3 2–3
o Depending on the device version the contacts of some binary outputs can be changed
from normally open to normally closed operation (see also in Appendix, Section A.2).
The following outputs can be modified:
Version 7SD52**–*D/H/M (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs)
BO16 and BO24 (Figure 3-8, slot 19 left and right);
Version 7SD52**–*C/G/L (housing size 1/1 with 24 binary outputs)
BO16 (Figure 3-8, slot 19 right);
Version 7SD52**–*P/R/T (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs and acceleration)
BO24 (Figure 3-8, slot 19 left).
Table 3-4 shows the jumper settings for the contact mode.
Table 3-4 Jumper settings for the contact mode of outputs BO16 and BO24 on the input/output board I/O-1
X51 *)
3
2
1
F1 *)
X40
1
2
3
X53 *)
3
2
1
X52 *)
3 4
2
1
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
LMH
X73 (AD2) *)
X72 (AD1) *)
*)
X32
X31
X71 (AD0)
H L
LMH
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
Figure 3-9 Input/output board I/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings re-
quired for the module configuration
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
LMH
X73 (AD2)
X72 (AD1)
X32
X31
X71 (AD0)
H L
LMH
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
LMH
Figure 3-10 Input/output board I/O-10 with representation of the jumper settings
required for the module configuration
Table 3-5 Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI8 on
the input/output board I/O-1, for housing size 1/2
Binary inputs
Jumper Pickup 17 V 1) Pickup 73 V 2) Pickup 154 V 3)
Slot 19
BI1 X21/X22 L M H
BI2 X23/X24 L M H
BI3 X25/X26 L M H
BI4 X27/X28 L M H
BI5 X29/X30 L M H
BI6 X31/X32 L M H
BI7 X33/X34 L M H
BI8 X35/X36 L M H
1
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 24 to 125 V
2
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 110 to 250 V and AC 115 V
3) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 220 to 250 V and AC 115 V
Table 3-6 Jumper settings for the pickup voltage of the binary inputs BI1 through BI24 on
the input/output boards I/O-1 or I/O-10, for housing size 1/1
Binary inputs
Pickup Pickup Pickup
Slot 33 Slot 19 Slot 19 Jumper
17 V 1) 73 V 2) 154 V 3)
left right left
BI1 BI9 BI17 X21/X22 L M H
BI2 BI10 BI18 X23/X24 L M H
BI3 BI11 BI19 X25/X26 L M H
BI4 BI12 BI20 X27/X28 L M H
BI5 BI13 BI21 X29/X30 L M H
BI6 BI14 BI22 X31/X32 L M H
BI7 BI15 BI23 X33/X34 L M H
BI8 BI16 BI24 X35/X36 L M H
1
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 24 to 125 V
2) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 110 to 250 V and AC 115 V
3
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 220 to 250 V and AC 115 V
o The jumpers X71 to X73 serve for identification of the modules on the internal serial
bus for housing size 1/1. They must not be changed. Table 3-7 shows the jumper po-
sitions. These jumpers are not fitted in housing size 1/2.
Table 3-7 Jumper settings for the bus module identification of the input/output boards
I/O-2
Presetting Presetting
Jumper
Slot 19 left Slot 19 right
X71 H L
X72 L L
X73 H H
Input/Output Board The design of the input/output board I/O-2 is show in Figure 3-11.
I/O-2
o The contact of BO13 binary output can be changed from normally closed to normal-
ly open operation (see also Section A.2, in Appendix A):
for housing size 1/2 ( in Figure 3-7, slot 33),
for housing size 1/1 ( in Figure 3-8, slot 33, right).
Table 3-8 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the contact of output BO13
o The preset rated currents of the current transformer are checked on the input/output
board I/O-2. All jumpers must be set unitary for one rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61
to X64) for each current transformer, additionally there is one common jumper X60.
o The jumpers X71 to X73 serve for identification of the modules on the internal serial
bus. They must not be changed. Table 3-9 shows the jumper positions:
for housing size 1/2 ( in Figure 3-7, slot 33),
for housing size 1/1 ( in Figure 3-8, slot 33, right).
Table 3-9 Jumper settings for the bus module identification of the input/output boards
I/O-2
Jumper Presetting
X71 1–2 (H)
X72 1–2 (H)
X73 2–3 (L)
3
2
1
X41
X71 X72 X73
(AD0)
1
2
3
(AD1)
1
2
3 (AD2)
L
H
X60
5A 3
2
1A 1
X61
5A 3
2
1A 1
T2 T1
X62
1A 1
2
5A 3
T3 T4
X63
X64
1A 1
2
5A 3
5A 3
2
1A 1
Figure 3-11 Jumpers on the input/output board I/O-2 for the input current transformers
Note:
Devices in surface mounted housing with optical fibre connection have the fibre-optic
module installed in the inclined console housing. On the CPU board, however, an
RS232 interface module is placed which communicates electrically with the fibre-optic
module.
Mounting location
(rear side of housing)
Service interface C
Battery grip
System interface B
Battery
+ –
G1
Figure 3-12 Processor board CPU with the interface modules (max. complement)
Replacing Inter- The interface modules can be replaced in housings for flush or cubicle installation.
face Modules They are located on the processor board CPU ( in Figure 3-7 or Figure 3-8). Figure
3-12 shows the CPU board and the location of the interface modules. The ordering
numbers of the exchange modules are listed in Appendix A.1.1 (Accessories).
Please note the following:
· Interface modules can only be exchanged for devices with flush mounting housing.
Interface modules for devices with surface mounting housing must be exchanged
in our manufacturing centre.
· Use only interface modules that can be ordered as an option of the device (see also
Appendix A.1).
· With interfaces with bus capability, ensure that the bus termination is correct (if ap-
plicable); see head margin “RS485 Interfaces” below.
Table 3-10 Replacement interface modules for devices with flush mounting housing
RS232 Interfaces The interface RS232 can be transformed into interface RS485 according to Figure 3-
14.
Figure 3-12 shows the PCB of the CPU with the location of the modules. Figure 3-13
shows how jumpers of interface RS232 are located on the interface module.
Here, terminating resistors are not required. They are always disabled.
Note that devices in surface mounted housing with optical fibre connection have an
electrical RS232 module on the CPU board (see Note above). For this application
type, the jumpers X12 and X13 on the RS232 module are plugged in position 2–3, in
contrast to the illustration in Figure 3-13.
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
X12 X5
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
X11
2
3
X10
1 2 3 1
2
3
X13
Jumpers illustrated C53207-
in Factory position A324-B180
Figure 3-13 Location of the jumpers on the interface module for RS232
With jumper X11 the flow control which is important for modem communication is en-
abled. Jumper settings are explained in the following:
Jumper setting 2–3: The modem control signals CTS (Clear-To-Send) according to
RS232 are not available. This is a standard connection via star coupler or optical fibre
converter. They are not required since the connection to the SIPROTEC® devices is
always operated in the half-duplex mode. Please use connection cable with order
number 7XV5100–4.
Jumper setting 1–2: Modem signals are made available. For a direct RS232 connec-
tion between the device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We
recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pole on
25-pole).
Table 3-11 Jumper setting for CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module
RS485 Interfaces The interface RS485 can be transformed into interface RS232 according to Figure 3-
13.
Using interfaces with bus capability requires a termination for the last device at the
bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be switched to the line.
The terminating resistors are connected to the corresponding interface module that is
mounted to the processor input/output board CPU (Figure 3-12).
The module for the RS485 interface is illustrated in Figure 3-14 for the Profibus and
DNP interface in Figure 3-15. The two jumpers of a module must always be plugged
in the same position.
When a module leaves the factory the jumpers are set in such a way that the terminat-
ing resistors are switched off.
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
Terminating resistors 3 X4
X12 X5
Jumper 1 2 3 1 2 3
Connected Disconnected 1
X11
2
X3 2-3 1-2*) 3
X10
1 2 3 1
X4 2-3 1-2*) 2
3
*) Factory Setting
X13
C53207-
A324-B180
Figure 3-14 Location of the jumpers on the RS485-interface module with termination resis-
tors
C53207-A322- 2 3 4
B100
B101
Jum- Terminating Resistors
3 2 1
pers connected disconnected X4
X3 1–2 2–3 *)
3 2 1
X4 1–2 2–3 *) X3
*) Factory Setting
Figure 3-15 Location of the jumpers for the configuration of the termination resistors on the
interfaces Profibus DP and DNP3.0
Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug
connectors) as shown in Figure 3-16. In that case the terminating resistors provided
on the interface module must be disconnected.
+5 V
390 W
A/A´
220 W
B/B´
390 W
The tables of the following margin headers list the pin-assignments for the different se-
rial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface. The physical ar-
rangement of the connectors is illustrated in Figure 3-17.
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
9 6 6
RS232-LWL
6 9 9
1 5 5
P-Slave
AME
Operating interface Time synchronization
at the front side interface
Serial Interface
Figure 3-17 9-pin D-subminiature sockets
PC Operating Inter- When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
face at Front the SIPROTEC® device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix A,
Subsection A.1.1 for an ordering description of the cable.
System (SCADA) When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control sys-
Interface tem, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and
the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission di-
rection. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other
device, and vice versa.
The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO
2110 (see also Table 3-12):
- TxD data transmit
- RxD data receive
- RTS request to send
- CTS clear to send
- DGND signal/chassis ground
The cable shield is to be grounded at only both ends. For extremely EMC-loaded en-
vironments the GND may be integrated into a separate individually shielded wire pair
to improve the immunity to interference.
Operating
Pin-No. RS232 RS485 Profibus DP Slave, RS485 DNP3.0, RS485
interface
1 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected)
2 RxD RxD — — —
3 TxD TxD A/A' (RxD/TxD–N) B/B' (RxD/TxD–P) A
4 — — — CNTR–A (TTL) RTS (TTL level)
5 GND GND C/C' (GND) C/C' (GND) GND1
6 — — — +5 V (max. load 100 mA) VCC1
7 RTS RTS —*) — —
8 CTS CTS B/B' (RxD/TxD–P) A/A' (RxD/TxD–N) B
9 — — — — —
*) Pin 7 also may carry the RS232 RTS signal to an RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!
RS 485 The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B'
Termination with a common relative potential C/C' (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. Jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface modules RS 485 (Figure
3-14) or Profibus DP or DNP3.0 (Figure 3-15).
It is also possible that the terminating resistors are arranged externally (Figure 3-16);
in this case, the internal termination resistors must be disconnected.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Time Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the
Synchronization connections are made as indicated in Table 3-13.
Interface
Table 3-13 Pin-assignment for the D-subminiature port of the time synchronization
interface
Pin-No. Designation Signal meaning
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4 M_TSYNC*) Return Line*)
5 Screen Shield potential
6 – –
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC*) Input 24 V*)
9 Screen Shield potential
*) only for PPS signal (GPS)
Optical Fibres Refer to Subsection 3.2.2 for differential protection data communication.
For the system (SCADA) interface, signals transmitted over optical fibres are unaffect-
ed by interference. The fibres guarantee electrical isolation between the connections.
Transmit and receive connections are identified with the symbols for transmit
and for receive.
The character idle state for the optical fibre interface is “Light off”. If this setting is to
be changed, use the operating program DIGSI®, as described in the SIPROTEC®
System Manual, order-no. E50417–H1176–C151.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
Optical Fibres The direct optical fibre connection is visually checked like the other optical fibre con-
nections. There is one connection for each direction. Therefore the output of the one
device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. Transmis-
sion and receiving connections are identified with the symbols for transmit
and for receive. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and
receive channels is relevant. For use of the FO5-modules and the recommended fibre
type for short distances, laser class 1 is valid. Higher laser powers can occur in other
cases.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look into the LEDs or fibre-optic elements! Do not use optical
instruments! Laser class 3A according to EN 60825–1.
If using more than two devices, the connections of all protection data interfaces are
checked according the topology selected.
Communication Optical fibres are usually used for the connections between the devices and commu-
Converter nication converters. The optical fibres are checked in the same manner as the direct
optical fibre connections.
Verify that address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER or 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER (see also
Section 2.4.2) is set to the correct type of connection.
Further For further connections a visual control is sufficient for the time being. Electrical and
connections functional controls are done during commissioning (Section 3.3.5).
Warning!
Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages.
They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with
all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to un-
usually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values
see Subsection 4.1.2 under Technical Data.
Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final oper-
ating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature and to minimize hu-
midity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final lo-
cation. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
Connection examples for the instrument transformer circuits are given in the Appendix
Section A.3. Please observe the plant diagrams, too.
o Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the
power supply and the measured voltages must be opened.
o Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the
system and connection diagrams:
q Are the current transformers grounded properly?
q Are the polarities of the current transformers the same?
q Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
q Are the voltage transformers grounded properly (if used)?
q Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct (if used)?
q Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct (if used)?
q Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used)?
q Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (if used, e.g. with open delta winding)?
o Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of sec-
ondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches
in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current trans-
formers when they are in the test mode (open).
o The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An
ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed. Make sure that
continuity is not simulated by the reverse connected current transformers themselves
or their short-circuit links.
q Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 3-7 or 3-8).
q Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O-2 board ( in Figure 3-7 or 3-8), and
pull the board out until there is no contact between the board and the rear connec-
tions of the device.
q At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that re-
ceives current from the CTs.
q Firmly re-insert the I/O-2 board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend
any connector pins! Do not use force!
q Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again.
q Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
o Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A
to 5 A for the meter is appropriate.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. Check the polarity
and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals.
o The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power con-
sumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors.
o Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
o Disconnect the measuring equipment; restore the normal power supply connections.
o Apply voltage to the power supply.
o Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used).
o Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
o Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used) and the power sup-
ply.
o Check the trip circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
o Check the close circuits to the power system circuit breakers (if used).
o Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
o Check the signalling connections.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
o If communication converters are used, check the auxiliary voltage supply for the com-
munication converters.
o If the communication converter is connected to the communication network, its
“device-ready”-relay (DR) picks up. This also signalizes that the clock pulse of the
communication network is recognized. Further checks are performed according to
Subsection 3.3.5.
o Please also observe carefully the documentation on the communication converter.
3.3 Commissioning
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non-
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
· The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth
conductor before any other electrical connection is made.
· Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the
supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
· Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the
supply voltage (storage capacitors!).
· Wait for at least 10 s after having disconnected the supply voltage before you re-
apply the voltage in order to achieve defined initial conditions.
· The limit values stated in the Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected
from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected!
If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer
secondary circuits, it is sufficient to place them into the “Test” position provided the
short-circuit functions has been previously tested.
For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for
the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without dan-
ger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.
Warning!
Primary tests must only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
If the device is connected to a substation control system or a server, the user is able
to modify, in some protocols, information that is transmitted to the substation (see Sec-
tion A.5 “Protocol Dependent Functions” in Appendix A).
In the testing mode all messages sent from a SIPROTEC®4 device to the substa-
tion are marked with an extra test bit so that the substation is able to identify them as
messages announcing no real faults. Furthermore the transmission blocking
function leads to a total blocking of the message transmission process via the system
interface in the testing mode.
Refer to the System Manual (Order-no. E50417–H1176–C151) to know how the test-
ing mode and the transmission blocking can be enabled and disabled. Please note
that it is necessary to be Online to be able to use the testing mode.
If external time synchronization sources are used the data of the time source (antenna
system, time generator) are checked (see Subsection 4.1.4 under “Time Synchroni-
zation”). Using time signal IRIG B or DCF77 the correct time must appear at last 3 min-
utes after startup of the processor system, i.e. the clock alarm must go off (message
“Alarm Clock OFF” in the operating messages or spontaneous messages). Table
3-14 shows the display indications under regular conditions of time control. Refer to
the System Manual (Order-no. E50417–H1176–C151) for detailed information about
time status.
Preliminary Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for
Notes the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI® operational
function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test feature while the
device is in service on a live system!
DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface
by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the
SIPROTEC®4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit
breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!
Note:
The device will reboot after termination of these tests. All annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® prior to these tests.
Structure of the In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system in-
Dialogue Box terface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Status Scheduled the user has
to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message
different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By double-
clicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.
Changing the Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column Action you will be asked for
Operating State password no. 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password mes-
sages can be issued. To do so, click on Send. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC®4 device as well as
from the central master computer.
As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is to be
Direction checked under Status Scheduled:
q Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)
q Click on Send and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central
station and shows the desired reaction. Information which are normally forwarded
to the device via binary inputs (identified with a leading “>” sign) are also sent to the
central station.
f
Exiting the Test To end the system interface test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service
Mode while the processor system starting up. The dialogue box closes.
Test in Command The information beginning with “>” is transmitted towards the device. This kind of in-
Direction formation must be sent by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC® 4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled using DIGSI®. This feature is used to verify control wiring from
the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not be
used while the device is in service on a live system.
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI®
results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC® de-
vice. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be
operated as a result of these actions!
Note:
The device will reboot after termination of these tests. All annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® prior to these tests.
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI® in the online operating mode:
q Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the de-
vice appear.
q Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
q Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialogue box of the same
name opens (see Figure 3-19).
Structure of the The dialogue box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output
Test Dialogue Box relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an
appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components with-
in the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the Status column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is
displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch
symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the Scheduled column, which is next to the Status column. The intended
condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured
(masked) to the hardware components.
Changing the To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching
Hardware field in the Scheduled column.
Conditions
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first
hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition
change will be executed.
Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Binary Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between
Outputs the output relay of the 7SD52 and the plant, without having to generate the message
that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the
output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device func-
tions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a
switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command
cannot be executed.
q Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!).
q Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the di-
alog box.
q The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading “Exiting the Proce-
dure”), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests.
Test of the Binary To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SD52 the condition
Inputs in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the
device checked.
To do this, the dialogue box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the phys-
ical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
q Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated.
q The response of the device must be checked in the Status-column of the dialogue
box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below
under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switch-
ing in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test
function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the
password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and
can only be activated via the hardware test function.
q Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading „Exiting the Pro-
cedure“).
Test of the LED’s The LED’s may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components.
As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are sepa-
rated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware
test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protec-
tion function or operation of the LED reset key.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hard-
Display ware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
- for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully
performed,
- for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
- for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
Procedure unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware com-
ponents are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.
General The communication topology can either be checked from the PC using DIGSI® or a
web browser via the “IBS-Tool”. If you choose to work with the IBS-Tool, please note
the Help files referring to the “IBS-Tool”.
You can either connect the PC to the device locally using the operator interface at the
front, or the service interface at the rear of the device (Figure 3-20). Or you can log
into the device using a modem via the service interface (example in Figure 3-21).
If you use the “IBS-Tool”:
q Make sure that the 12-digit IP-address valid for the browser is set correctly accord-
ing to the following format: ***.***.***.***. A three-digit block of the IP address is in-
serted into each address from 4401 to 4404, or 4411 to 4414.
q Set the address 4405 or 4415 NUM LOCK to NO, if you are directly interfaced to the
device. You will then have the option to operate the device with the “IBS-Tool”.
q If you are interfaced to the devices via modem you can set the address 4405 or
4415 NUM LOCK to NO. You will then have the option to access all devices with the
“IBS-Tool”.
7SD52 7SD52
:
Figure 3-20 PC interfacing directly to one device — schematic example
7SD52 7SD52
d em
Mo
dem
Mo
: Mo
dem
Communication Network
Checking a For two devices linked with fibre optical cables (as in Figure 3-20 or 3-21), this con-
Connection Using nection is checked as follows. If more than 2 devices are concerned, or in case of a
Direct Link ring topology, check only one link first.
o Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on.
o Check in the Event Log or spontaneous annunciations for the following:
q If the message “PI1 with” (protection data interface 1 connected with, FNo.
03243) is provided with the device index of the other device, a link has been estab-
lished and one device has recognized the other.
q If the protection data interface 2 has also been connected, a corresponding mes-
sage will appear (FNo 03244).
q The device also indicates the device index of the device which communicates cor-
rectly (e.g. annunciation “Rel2 Login”, FNo 03492, when relay 2 has been con-
tacted).
o In the event of a communication link error the message “PI1 Data fault” (FNo.
03229) or “PI2 Data fault” (FNo. 03231) will be displayed. In this case, check
the fibre optical cable link again:
q Have the devices been linked correctly and no cables been interchanged?
q Are the cables free from mechanical damage, intact, and the connectors locked?
q Repeat check if necessary.
Proceed then with “Consistency of Topology and Parameterization”, page 232.
Checking a If a communication converter is used, please note the instructions enclosed with the
Connection via a device. The communication converter has a test setting where its outputs are looped
Communication back to the inputs.
Converter
Links via the communication converter are tested by means of local loop-back (Figure
3-22, left).
Remote
Local Communication Communication
Converter Converter
local
:
Figure 3-22 Differential protection communication via communication converter and communication network
— schematic example
DANGER!
Before opening the communication converter, it is absolutely necessary to iso-
late it from the auxiliary supply voltage at all poles! There is a danger to life by
energized parts!
o Change the interface parameters at the 7SD52 (at the device front or via DIGSI®):
q Address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing protection
data interface 1,
q Address 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing protection
data interface 2.
o Check the Event Log or spontaneous annunciations:
q Message 03217 “PI1 Data reflec ON” (Protection interface 1 data reflection
ON) when you are testing protection data interface 1.
q Message 03218 “PI2 Data reflec ON” (Protection interface 2data reflection
ON) when you are testing protection data interface 2.
q When working with both interfaces, note that the current interface of the 7SD52 is
connected to its associated communication converter.
q If the message is not transmitted check for the following:
- Has the 7SD52 fibre-optical transmitting terminal output been correctly linked
with the fibre optical receiving terminal input of the communication converter and
vice versa (No erroneous interchanging)?
- Does the 7SD52 device have the correct interface module and is it working cor-
rectly?
- Are the fibre optic cables intact?
- Are the parameter settings for interface type and transmission rate at the com-
munication converter correct (see above; note the DANGER instruction!)?
q Repeat the check after correction if necessary.
o Reset the interface parameters at the 7SD52 to the correct state:
q Address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = required setting, when you have tested the pro-
tection data interface 1,
q Address 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER = required setting, when you have tested the pro-
tection data interface 1.
o Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage of the communication converter at both poles.
Note the above DANGER instruction!
o Reset the communication converter to normal position (X32 in position 1-2) and close
the housing again.
o Reconnect the supply voltage of the communication converter.
Perform the above check at the other end with the device being connected there and
its corresponding communication converter.
Continue then with “Consistency of Topology and Parameterization“.
Consistency of Having performed the above checks, the linking of a device pair — including their com-
Topology and munication converters if applicable — has been completely tested and connected to
Parameterization auxiliary supply voltage. Now the devices communicate by themselves.
o Now check the Event Log or spontaneous annunciations of the device where you are
working:
q Message FNo. 03243 “PI1 with” (protection data interface 1 linked with) followed
by the device index of the other device, if interface 1 is applying. For protection data
interface 2 the message is FNo 03244 “PI2 with”.
q If the devices are at least connected once, the message FNo 03464 “Chainto-
pology” will then be displayed, too.
q If no other devices are involved in the topology as an entirety, the message FNo
03464 “Topol complete” (Topology complete) will appear.
q And if the device parameterization is also consistent, i.e. the prerequisites for set-
ting the Configuration of the Scope of Functions (Section 2.1.1), the Power System
Data 1 (2.1.2), the General Protection Data (Power System Data 2) (2.1.4), the set-
tings for Protection Data Interfaces and Protection Data Topology (Section 2.4.2)
have been considered, the fault message, i.e. FNo. 03229 “PI1 Data fault” or
FNo. 03231 “PI2 Data fault”, for the interface just checked, will go off. The
communication and consistency test has now been completed.
q If the fault message of the interface being checked does not disappear, however,
the fault must be found and eliminated. Table 3-15 lists messages that indicate such
faults.
Finally, there should not be any more fault messages of the protection data interfaces.
Availability of the The quality of protection data transmission depends on the availability of the protec-
Protection Data tion data interfaces and the transmission. Therefore, check the statistic information at
Interfaces the device where you are working.
Check the following messages:
q FNo 07753 “PI1A/m” indicates the availability of the protection data interface 1 per
minute, FNo 07754 “PI1A/h” per hour. After 2 minutes of data transfer the first val-
ue should indicate at least 99.85 % per-minute-availability, after one hour the per-
hour-availability should be at least 99.85 %.
q If protection data interface 2 is used, the corresponding messages can be found un-
der FNo 07755 “PI2A/m” (per minute) and FNo 07756 “PI2A/h” (per hour).
If the values are not attained, the protection communication must be checked.
If GPS-synchronization is used, the transmission times can be retrieved, separately
for each direction:
q Concerning protection data interface 1, FNo 07876 “PI1 TD S” indicates the trans-
mission time in sending direction, FNo 07875 “PI1 TD R” in receiving direction.
q Concerning protection data interface 2, FNo 07878 “PI2 TD S” indicates the trans-
mission time in sending direction, FNo 07877 “PI2 TD R” in receiving direction.
In other cases, the mean value of both directions can be retrieved:
q FNo 07751 “PI1 TD” indicates the transmission time via protection data interface
1.
q FNo 07752 “PI2 TD” indicates the transmission time via protection data interface
2.
Checking further If more than two devices have been linked, that is if the object to be protected has
Links more than two ends, or, if two devices have been linked via both protection data inter-
faces to create redundancy, repeat all checks for every possible link as described
above including the consistency check.
If all devices involved in the topology communicate properly and all parameters are
consistent, the message FNo 03464 “Topol complete” appears.
If there is a ring topology, the message FNo 03457 “Ringtopology” must also ap-
pear after closing the ring.
However, if you have got a ring topology which only issues the message “Chainto-
pology” instead of “Ringtopology”, the differential protection system is function-
able, but the ring has not yet been closed. Check the missing link as described above
including the consistency test until all links to the ring have been made.
Finally, there should be no more fault messages concerning the protection data inter-
faces.
“IBS-Tool” The topology can be displayed as a graph on the monitor using the “IBS-Tool”. For this
you need a personal computer and a web browser. Figure 3-23 exemplifies a differen-
tial protection system for three ends with a ring topology. The devices have been prop-
erly linked (green shaded squares) and work as differential protection (Status: Differ-
ential Mode). The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 2 (PC-connected
relay).
Figure 3-23 illustrates the interface data of a 7SD52 with GPS-synchronization as an
example. The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 3. The transmission
time at protection data interface 1 is 0.000 ms, at protection data interface 2 it is
0.763 ms in transmission direction, 0.772 ms in receiving direction.
Figure 3-23 Example of a ring topology with three ends communicating correctly
Figure 3-24 Example of viewing the transmission times and availability of the protection data interfaces
If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used,
the interaction with the breakers of the power plant must be tested.
Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of
the power plant it is not possible to give detailed description of the test steps neces-
sary to verify the correct interaction between the breaker failure protection and the
breakers. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant
drawings.
It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep
the busbar disconnector and the line disconnector open, in order to ensure operation
of the breaker without risk.
Caution!
Tripping of the complete busbar or busbar section will occur even during tests at the
local feeder breaker. Therefore, it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands
to the adjacent (busbar) breakers e.g. by switch-off of the associated control voltage.
Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of a real primary fault if parts
of the power plant are live.
The trip command of the tested differential protection is made ineffective so that the
local breaker can be tripped only by the breaker failure protection function.
The following lists do not claim to cover all possibilities. On the other hand, they may
contain items that can be bypassed in the actual application.
Circuit Breaker The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure pro-
Auxiliary Contacts tection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure that the
correct assignment has been checked (Subsection 3.3.4).
External Initiation If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by external protection devic-
Conditions es, each of the external initiation conditions must be checked. Depending on the de-
vice version and the setting on the breaker failure protection, single-pole trip or single-
and three-pole trip are possible. Note that the internal pole discrepancy supervision or
the pole discrepancy supervision of the breaker itself may lead to a later three-pole trip
after single-pole trip during the tests. Reconsider the settings of the breaker failure
protection and its ancillary functions. Refer to Subsection 2.10.2 (addresses 3901
etc.) if more information is desired.
At least the tested phase of the device must be subjected to a test current to enable
initiation of the breaker failure protection. This may be a secondary injected current.
Following every initiation the message “BF Start” (FNo 01461) must appear in the
fault annunciations (trip log) or in the spontaneous messages.
The following applies for phase segregated initiation:
q Start by single-pole trip command L1 of the external protection:
Binary inputs “>BF Start L1” (FNo 01435) and if necessary “>BF release”
(FNo 01432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages.
Trip command depending on the settings.
Busbar trip The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands
to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails.
The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order
to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. In other words,
the adjacent breaker are those of all feeders which may feed the same busbar or bus-
bar section as the faulty feeder.
The identification of the adjacent feeders depends widely on the topology of the bus-
bar and its possible arrangement or switching states. That is why a generally detailed
test description cannot be specified.
In particular if multiple busbars are concerned the trip distribution logic to the other
breakers must be checked. It must be verified for each busbar section that all breakers
connected to the same section are tripped in case the concerned feeder breaker fails,
and no other breakers.
Remote Trip If the trip command of the breaker failure protection or its ancillary functions (e.g. end
fault protection) is intended to trip also the circuit breaker of the remote end of the con-
cerned feeder, the correct transmission and reception of this remote trip must be
checked. Practically, this is performed in conjunction with the transmission checks ac-
cording to Subsection 3.3.10.
Termination of the After completion of the tests, re-establish all provisory measures which might have
Checks been taken for the above tests. Ensure that the states of all switching devices of the
plant are correct, that interrupted trip commands are reconnected and control voltages
are switched on, that setting values which might have been altered are reverted to cor-
rect values, and that protective function are switched to the intended state (on or off).
Note:
It must be taken into consideration that tripping can occur even at the opposite ends
of the protected object, if connections were made wrong.
Before energizing the object to be protected at any end, short-circuit protection must
be ensured at least at the feeding ends. If a separate back-up protection (e.g. overcur-
rent protection) is available, this has to be put into operation and switched to alert first.
Voltage and Phase If the device has been connected to voltage transformers, these connections are
Rotation Test checked using primary values. For devices without voltage transformer connection the
rest of this margin header may be omitted.
The voltage transformer connections are individually tested at either end of the object
to be protected. At the other end(s) the circuit breaker(s) remain open first.
o Having closed the local circuit breaker, none of the measurement monitoring functions
in the device may respond.
q If there was a fault message, however, the Event Log or spontaneous messages
could be checked to investigate the reason for it.
q At the indication of symmetry monitoring there might actually be asymmetries of the
primary system. If they are part of normal operation, the corresponding monitoring
function is set less sensitive (see Subsection 2.12.1.3 under “Voltage Balance”,
page 144).
The voltages can be read on the display at the front, or called up in the PC via the op-
erator or service interface, and compared with the actual measured quantities as pri-
mary or secondary values. Apart from the absolute values of the line-earth and line-
line voltages, voltage phase differences are indicated so that the correct phase se-
quence and polarity reversal of individual voltage transformers can be seen. The volt-
ages can also be read with the “IBS-Tool” (see below, “Current Test”).
o The voltages should be almost equal. All the three angles j(ULx–ULy) must be approx-
imately 120°.
q If the measured quantities are not plausible, the connections must be checked and
revised after switching off the line. If the phase difference angle between two volt-
ages is 60° instead of 120°, one voltage must be polarity-reversed. The same ap-
plies if there are phase-to-phase voltages which almost equal the phase-to-ground
Current Test The connections of the current transformers are tested with primary values. A load
current of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is pos-
sible.
This test cannot replace visual inspection of the correct current transformer connec-
tions. Therefore, the inspection according to Section 3.2.3 is a prerequisite.
o The current transformer connections are tested at each end of the protected object.
The current flows through the protected object. For more than two ends, one current
path (i.e. two ends) is tested first.
o After closing the circuit breakers, none of the measured value monitoring functions in
the 7SD52 must respond. However, in the event of a monitoring signal, the reason for
this signal can be investigated in the Event Log or in the spontaneous messages:
q If current summation errors occur, check the matching factors (see Subsection
2.1.2, “Connection of the Currents”).
q Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are
asymmetrical conditions in the primary system. If they are part of normal operation,
the corresponding monitoring function is set less sensitive (see Subsection 2.12.2,
“Symmetry Supervision”).
Currents can be viewed as primary or secondary measured values in the front display
panel or via the operator or service interface with a personal computer, and compared
with the actually measured values. The absolute values as well as the phase differ-
ences of the currents are indicated so that the correct phase sequence and polarity of
individual transformers can also be seen.
The “IBS Tool” provides comfortable read-out possibilities for all measured values with
visualisation using phasor diagrams (Figure 3-25).
o The current amplitudes must be approximately the same. Each one of the three angles
j(ILx–ILy) must be approximately 120°.
q If the measured values are not plausible, the connections must be checked and cor-
rected after switching off the protected object and short-circuiting the current trans-
formers. If, for example, the phase difference between two currents is 60° instead
of 120°, one of the currents must have a reversed polarity. The same is the case, if
a substantial earth current 3I0 occurs:
- 3I0 » phase current Þ one or two phase currents are missing,
- 3I0 » doubled phase current Þ one or two phase currents have a reversed po-
larity.
o The measurements are to be repeated after setting the connections right.
Figure 3-25 Local measured values in the “IBS Tool” — example of plausible measured values
o The previously stated tests of the measured values are to be repeated at the other end
of the tested current path. The current value of the other end can also be read out lo-
cally as percentage values as well as the phase angles.
In the “IBS Tool”, the local and remote measured values can be graphically displayed.
Figure 3-26 shows an example.
Figure 3-26 Local and remote measured values in the “IBS Tool” — examples for plausible measured values
Polarity Check If the device is connected with voltage transformers, the local measured values al-
ready provide a polarity test.
For more than two ends, one current path is continued to be tested first. A load current
of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is possible but
must be known.
o With closed circuit breakers, the power values can be viewed as primary and second-
ary measured values in the front display panel or via the operator or service interface
with a personal computer.
Here, again, the IBS Tool is a comfortable help as the vector diagrams also show the
correlation between the currents and voltages (Figure 3-26). Cyclically and acyclically
swapped phases can easily be detected.
o With the aid of the measured power values you are able to verify that they correlate to
the load direction, reading either at the device itself or in DIGSI® (Figure 3-27).
q P positive, if active power flows into the protected object,
q P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
q Q positive, if (inductive) reactive power flows into the protected object,
q Q negative, if (inductive) reactive power flows towards the busbar.
Therefore, the power results and their components must have opposite signs at both
ends.
It must be taken into consideration that high charging currents, which might occur with
long overhead lines or with cables, are capacitive, i.e. correspond to a negative reac-
tive power into the line. In spite of a resistive-inductive load, this may lead to a slightly
negative reactive power at the feeding end whereas the other end shows an increased
negative reactive power. The lower the load current for the test, the higher the signif-
icance of this influence. In order to get unambiguous results, you should increase the
load current if necessary.
P
Positive active power in
the direction of the line
SLoad
jQ
o The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured val-
ues of one end have the correct polarity.
q If the reactive power is correct but the active power has the wrong sign, cyclic phase
swapping of the currents (right) or of the voltages (left) might be the cause.
q If the active power direction is correct but the reactive power has the wrong sign,
cyclic phase swapping of the currents (left) or of the voltages (right) might be the
cause.
q If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign, the polarity
according to the address 201 CT Starpoint is to be checked and corrected.
The phase angles between currents and voltages must also be conclusive. Each one
of the three phase angles j (ULx–ILx) must be approximately the same and must rep-
resent the operating status. In the event of power in the direction of the protected ob-
ject, they represent the current phase displacement (cos j positive); in the event of
power in the direction of the busbar they are higher by 180° (cos j negative). However,
charging currents might have to be taken into consideration (see above).
o The measurements may have to be repeated after correction the connections.
o The above described tests of the measured values also have to be performed at the
other end of the tested current path. The current and voltage values as well as the
phase angles of the other end can also be read out locally as percentage values. Note
that currents flowing through the object (without charging currents) ideally have oppo-
site signs at both ends, i.e. turned by 180°.
In the “IBS Tool” the local and remote measured values can be shown graphically. You
can see an example in Figure 3-26.
o The protected object is now switched off, i.e. the circuit breakers are opened.
Polarity Check for If the standard connection of the device is used whereby the current measuring input
the Current I4 is connected in the starpoint of the set of current transformers (refer also to the con-
Input I4 nection circuit diagram in the Appendix, Figure A-13), then the correct polarity of the
earth current path in general automatically results.
If however the current I4 is derived from a separate summation CT (e.g. a core balance
CT) an additional direction check with this current is necessary.
o The test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be
noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with cases that may
occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the measured val-
ue monitoring to pick up. These must therefore be ignored during such tests.
.
DANGER!
All precautionary measures must be observed when working on the instrument
transformers! Secondary connections of the current transformers must have
been short-circuited before any current lead to the relay is interrupted!
o To generate a displacement voltage, the e-n winding of one phase in the voltage trans-
former set (e.g. L1) is bypassed (refer to Figure 3-28). If no connection on the e-n
windings of the voltage transformer is available, the corresponding phase is open
circuited on the secondary side. Via the current path only the current from the current
transformer in the phase from which the voltage in the voltage path is missing, is con-
nected; the other CTs are short-circuited. If the line carries load in the first quadrant,
the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during an earth
fault in the direction of the line.
o The same manipulation is carried out with the current and voltage transformers at the
other end.
L1
Bus
L2
bar
L3
(alternatively
disconnect here)
e
bypass one n
phase
I4
7SD52
Line
Figure 3-28 Polarity testing for I4, example with current transformers configured in a
Holmgreen connection
o Figure 3-29 illustrates an example corresponding to the circuit in Figure 3-28, when
the current flows in direction of the object to be protected. The currents IL2 and IL3 are
almost zero, an earth current 3I0 of the same value as IL1 appears. Accordingly, the
voltage UL1E is missing and a zero sequence voltage 3U0 appears.
o In the event of a polarity fault, 3I0 is in opposite phase with IL1 or the zero sequence
voltage 3U0 supplements the other two voltages to a (here false) voltage star. Open
the circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers and set current and voltage
transformer connections right. Repeat test.
o Having finished the test, open all circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers
and restore current and voltage transformer connections.
Currents: Voltages:
+90° +90°
±180° 0° ±180° 0°
–90° –90°
Figure 3-29 Local measured values — example for single-phase, asymmetrical test
Measuring Differen- The test for two ends is terminated with the reading of the differential and restraint cur-
tial and Restraint rents which simultaneously check that the current transformer connections have been
Currents restored correctly after the I4 test (if performed).
o Read out the differential and restraint currents. They are available for every phase at
the device display or in DIGSI® amongst the measured values.
q The differential currents must be low, at least one scale less than the currents flow-
ing through. If high charging currents are to be expected in long overhead lines or
cables, these are additionally included in the differential currents.
q The restraint currents result from the pickup value I-DIFF> (address 1210, cf.
Subsection 2.2.2) in addition to the sum of the current errors to be tolerated: such
as the locally permissible current transformer error according to address 253 E%
ALF/ALF_N (cf. Subsection 2.1.2) the permissible current transformer errors at the
other ends according to that setting there, as well as the internal estimation of the
system errors (frequency, synchronization and delay time difference errors). With
the default values for I-DIFF> (0.3 IN) and E% ALF/ALF_N (5.0 % = 0.05) there is:
I stab I I
----------- = 0.3 + 0.05 × -------- + 0.05 × -------- + Sytem errors
I NO I N1 I N2
with
I the actual current flowing,
INO the nominal operating current as parameterized,
IN1 the primary nominal current of the local current transformers,
IN2 the primary nominal current of the current transformers of the remote end.
In the “IBS-Tool”, the differential and restraint currents are displayed as a graph in a
characteristics diagram. An example is illustrated in Figure 3-30.
o If there is a differential current in the size of twice the through-flowing current, you may
assume a polarity reversal of the current transformer(s) at one line end. Check the po-
larity again and set it right after short-circuiting all the three current transformers. If you
have modified these current transformers, also perform a power and angle test.
o Finally, open circuit breaker again.
o If parameter settings have been changed for the tests, reset them to the values nec-
essary for operation.
Figure 3-30 Differential and restraint currents — example for plausible currents
3.3.9 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections for More than Two Ends
If there are more than two ends, all tests according to Subsection 3.3.8 — as far as
they are applicable in this case — have to be repeated for the other current paths in
such a way that all ends of the object to be protected have been included in the current
flow test at least once. It is not necessary to test every possible current path.
At the ends not involved in a test the circuit breakers are to remain open. Also pay at-
tention to all safety notes, especially the DANGER warning in Section 3.3.8!
The circuit breakers are reopened after the last test.
In the event that parameters were modified for the tests, they finally have to be set to
the values necessary for operation.
As soon as the communication between the devices has been established, the func-
tions that depend on the transmission can be tested.
This applies in particular to
q remote tripping via a binary input (cf. Section 2.3),
q transmission of further remote commands and remote signals (cf. Section 2.6),
q tripping of the remote circuit breaker by breaker failure protection and/or end fault
protection (cf. Subsection 3.3.6),
q verification of remote circuit breaker positions.
The “IBS-Tool” can be used to achieve the latter. It contains a sheet where the circuit
breaker position is notified. Note that the circuit breaker position can only be indicated
reliably, if the circuit breaker's feed-back information has been signalled to the corre-
sponding device via binary inputs. Without these auxiliary contacts the devices can
only deduce the circuit breaker positions from the current flow. But as the current may
be zero even if the circuit breaker is closed, you must expect wrong indications. The
circuit breaker position is, however, always interpreted by the protection functions in
such a way that it goes on the safe side if in doubt.
For all the other commands and information to be transmitted, generate the source of
the information and check that the desired effect is created at the receiving end. Also
note the following:
DANGER!
Make sure that switching operations produced by remote command can be per-
formed without any danger during the actual switching state!
7SD52 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially
with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked.
Of course, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switch-
gear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). They must be considered and tested.
The circuit breaker and tripping circuits can be conveniently tested by the device
7SD52.
The procedure is described in Section 2.13.5.
If the check does not produce the expected results, the cause may be established from
the text in the display of the device or the PC. If necessary, the connections of the cir-
cuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be checked:
It must be noted that the binary inputs used for the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
must be assigned separately for the CB-test. It is accordingly not sufficient that the
auxiliary contacts are assigned to the binary inputs with FNo 00351 to 00353, 00379
and/or 00380 (depending on the options of the auxiliary contacts); in addition, the
corresponding FNos 00366 to 00368 and/or 00410 and/or 00411 (depending on the
options of the auxiliary contacts) must be configured (see also Section 2.13.2). These
are exclusively used for the CB-test. In addition, the ready state of the circuit breaker
for the CB-test must be indicated to the binary input FNo 00371.
Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7SD52
also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the
device via the service program DIGSI®, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For the
latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function “>Trig.Wave.Cap.” (FNo
00004). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is en-
ergized. For example, a close command to the circuit breaker may be used to control
the binary input for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective el-
ement pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording
with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The exter-
nally triggered record has a consecutive number for establishing a sequence.
Triggering with To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI®, click on Test in the left part of the win-
DIGSI® dow. Double-click the entry Test Wave Form in the list in the right part of the window
to trigger the recording. See Figure 3-31.
A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments
concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed.
The SIGRA program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse
the oscillographic data.
Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly
fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.
Caution!
Do not use force! The permissible tightening torques must not be exceeded as the
threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting
changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under
device configuration, input/output configuration are especially important as well as the
power system data, and activated Groups A through D (if applicable). All desired ele-
ments and functions must be set ON. See (Chapter 2). Keep a copy of all of the in-
service settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the system
manual, order-no. E50417–H1176–C151.
The annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the operational mes-
sages (event log) and fault messages (trip log). Future information will then only apply
for actual system events and faults. To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU ® An-
nunciation ® Set/Reset. Refer to the system manual if further assistance is
needed. The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that
were existing prior to the testing, or to values in accordance with the user's practices.
Set the statistics by pressing MAIN MENU ® Annunciation ® Statistic.
Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were
picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed.
Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing
the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the
button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual
conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must be on. The red “ERROR” LED must not be lit.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
2nd condition:
The accuracy limiting factor must be
at least 30, or a non-saturated period
of at least 1/4 AC cycle after fault n’ ³ 30 OR t’AL ³ 1/4 AC cycle
inception must be ensured
3rd condition:
Maximum ratio between primary I prim max
currents of current transformers --------------------- £ 8
I prim min
at the ends of the protected object
Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 220/250 VDC
Permissible voltage ranges 88 to 300 VDC 176 to 300 VDC
Binary Outputs Command/signal relays (see also General Diagrams in Section A.2 of Appendix A)
Number and data dependent on device version (allocatable)
plus 1 alarm relay (NO/NC adjustable):
RS232
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
(from prod. series /CC) 9-pin DSUB socket
shielded data cable
– Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission speed min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud
factory setting: 38400 Baud
– Maximum transmission distance 15 m (50 ft)
RS485
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
(from prod. series /CC) 9-pin DSUB socket
shielded data cable
– Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission speed min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud
factory setting: 38400 Baud
– Maximum transmission distance 1000 m (3300 ft)
Optical fibre
– Connector type ST-connector
for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C”
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
– Optical wavelength l = 820 nm
– Laser class 1 acc. EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 50/125 µm or
using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Maximum transmission distance 1.5 km (0.9 miles)
– Character idle state selectable; factory setting: “Light off”
RS232
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
(from prod. series /CC) 9-pin DSUB socket
– Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
factory setting: 19200 Bd
– Maximum transmission distance 15 m (50 ft)
RS485
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
(from prod. series /CC) 9-pin DSUB socket
– Test voltage 500 V, 50 Hz
– Transmission speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
factory setting: 19200 Bd
– Maximum transmission distance 1000 m (3300 ft)
Optical fibre
– Connector type ST-connector
for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
– Optical wavelength l = 820 nm
– Laser class 1 acc. EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 50/125 µm or
using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Maximum transmission distance 1.5 km (0.9 miles)
– Character idle state selectable; factory setting: “Light off”
Profibus RS485
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
9-pin DSUB socket
– Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission speed up to 12 MBd
– Maximum transmission distance 1000 m (3300 ft) at £ 93.75 kBd
500 m (1650 ft) at £ 187.5 kBd
200 m (665 ft) at £ 1.5 MBd
100 m (330 ft) at £ 12 MBd
Profibus Optical
– Connector type ST-connector
twin ring
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
for surface mounted case only with external OLM
– Transmission speed to 1.5 MBd
recommended: > 500 kBd
– Optical wavelength l = 820 nm
– Laser class 1 acc. EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 50/125 µm or
using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Optical budget max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Maximum transmission distance between
2 modules at redundant optical ring 1.6 km (1 mile) at 500 kB/s
topology and glass fiber 62.5/125 µm 530 m (1/3 mile) at 1500 kB/s
– Character idle state “Light off”
– Number of modules in optical rings max. 41 at 500 kB/s or 1500 kB/s
DNP3.0 RS485
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
9-pin DSUB socket
– Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission speed up to 19200 Bd
– Maximum transmission distance 1000 m (3300 ft)
DNP3.0 Optical
– Connector type ST-connector
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
for surface mounted case only with external converter
– Transmission speed to 19200 Bd
– Optical wavelength l = 820 nm
– Laser class 1 acc. EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 50/125 µm or
using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Maximum transmission distance 1500 m (0.9 miles)
EMC Tests; Inter- Standards: IEC 60255–6 and –22 (Product standards)
ference Immunity EN 61000–6–2 (Generic standard)
(Type Tests) VDE0435
Note:
All mechanical stress specifications are valid for standard works packaging!
Temperatures 1) – Type tested (acc. IEC60068–2–1 –25 °C to +85 °C (–13 °F to +185 °F)
and –2, Test condition for 16 h)
– Limiting temporary (transient) –20 °C to +70 °C Visibility of display
may be impaired
operating temperature (tested for 96 h) (–4 °F to 158 °F) above +55 °C/130 °F
The device is designed for use in an industrial environment or an electrical utility en-
vironment, for installation in standard relay rooms and compartments so that proper
installation and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. In addition, the follow-
ing are recommended:
· All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel
as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable
surge suppression components.
· For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
· Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device
is energized. When handling the modules or the boards outside of the case, stand-
ards for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed.
The modules, boards, and device are not endangered when the device is complete-
ly assembled.
4.1.9 Construction
Housing 7XP20
Dimensions see drawings, Section 4.13
Weight (mass), approx.
– in flush mounted case, size 1/2 6 kg (13 lb)
– in flush mounted case, size 1/1 10 kg (22 lb)
– in surface mounted case, size 1/2 11 kg (24 lb)
– in surface mounted case, size 1/1 19 kg (42 lb)
Degree of protection acc. IEC 60529
– for the device
in surface mounted case IP 51
in flush mounted case
front IP 51
rear IP 50
– for human safety IP 2x with closed protection cover
UL-certification conditions: “For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1
Enclosure”
Tripping Times The operating times depend on the number of ends and the communication speed.
The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of
commands via high-speed output relays (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Delay Times Delay time of the IDIFF>-stage 0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
TI-DIFF> or ¥ (stage ineffective)
Delay time of the IDIFF>-stage 0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
for 1-phase pickup T3I0 1PHAS or ¥ (stage ineffective for 1-phase pickup)
Expiry tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
The times set are pure delay times
External Direct The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays
Local Tripping (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Operating time, total approx. 6 ms
Trip time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
Expiry tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
The set times are pure delay times.
External Direct Tripping of remote ends by a command that is coupled into a binary input
Remote Tripping
The operating times depend on the number of ends and the communication speed.
The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of
commands via high-speed output relays (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Topology Number of devices for protected object 2 for 7SD522 (chain topology)
(= number of ends of the protected 2 to 6 for 7SD523 (chain topology
zone limited by CTs) or ring topology)
Current Stages High set stages IPh>> (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
or ¥ (ineffective)
TIPh>> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
3I0>> (earth) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
or ¥ (ineffective)
T3I0>> (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
Overcurrent stages IPh> (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(definite time) or ¥ (ineffective)
TIPh> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
3I0> (earth) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
or ¥ (ineffective)
T3I0> (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
Overcurrent stages IP (phases) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(inverse time acc. IEC) or ¥ (ineffective)
TIP (phases) 0.05 s to 3.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
3I0P (earth) 0.05 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
or ¥ (ineffective)
T3I0P (earth) 0.05 s to 3.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Overcurrent stages IP (phases) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(inverse time acc. ANSI) or ¥ (ineffective)
DIP (phases) 0.50 s to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ¥ (ineffective)
TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Further Definite Overcurrent IPh >STUB 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Stages; Stub Pro- (phases) or ¥ (ineffective)
tection
TIPh STUB 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
(phases) or ¥ (ineffective)
3I0 >STUB 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(earth) or ¥ (ineffective)
T3I0 STUB 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
(earth) or ¥ (ineffective)
Tolerances currents 3 % of setting value or 1% of rated current
times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Enable via special binary input is necessary.
The set times are pure delay times.
1
) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Operating Times of The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays
Definite Stages (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Pickup time, minimum approx. 15 ms with fN = 50 Hz
approx. 13 ms with fN = 60 Hz
Pickup time, typical approx. 20 ms with fN = 50 Hz
approx. 18 ms with fN = 60 Hz
Dropout time, typical approx. 30 ms with fN = 50 Hz
approx. 30 ms with fN = 60 Hz
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 Tp 10
3.2
5 5
1.6 Tp
3 3
2 3.2
0.8 2
1 1 1.6
0.4
100 1000
t [s]
300
t [s]
20 200
10 100
5 50
3 30 Tp
2 20 3.2
1 Tp 10 1.6
3.2
0.5 5 0.8
0.3 1.6 3
0.4
0.2 2
0.8
0.2
0.1 1
0.4
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.05 0.1
0.05 0.5
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 7 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
Extremely inverse: 80
t = ---------------------------- × T [s] Longtime inverse: 120 [s]
2 p t = ---------------------------- × T
(Type C) (I ¤ I ) – 1 1 p
p (I ¤ I ) – 1
p
t trip time
Tp setting value time multiplier Note: For earth fault read 3I0p instead of
I fault current
Ip setting value current Ip and T3I0p instead of Tp
Figure 4-1 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. IEC (phases and earth)
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 10
7 7
5 D [s] 5
3 15 3
2 10 2
1 5 1 D [s]
0.7 0.7
15
0.5 0.5
2 10
0.3 0.3
0.2 1 0.2 5
100 100
t [s] D [s] t [s]
50 50
15
10
20 20
5
10 10
5 2 5 D [s]
3 3 15
1
2 2 10
0.5
1 1 5
0.5 0.5
2
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ 5.6143 ö æ 0.0103 ö
LONG INVERSE - + 2.18592÷ × D [s]
t = ç ------------------------ MODERATELY INVERSE - + 0.0228÷ × D
t = ç -------------------------------- [s]
è ( I ¤ Ip ) – 1 ø è ( I ¤ I ) 0.02 – 1 ø
p
Figure 4-2 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. ANSI/IEEE, (phases and earth)
100 500
t [s]
t [s]
200
30
100
20
50
10 30
20
5
10
3
D [s] 5
2
15
3
10
1 2
5 1 D [s]
0.5
0,5 15
0.3
2 10
0.2 0,3
0,2 5
0.1 1
0,1
0.5 2
0.05 0,5 1
0,05
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö
æ 3,922 ö 5.64 - + 0.02434÷ × D
VERY INVERSE - + 0.0982÷ × D [s]
t = ç -------------------------- Extremely inverse t = ç --------------------------- [s]
ç 2 ÷
è ( I ¤ I )2 – 1 ø è ( I ¤ Ip ) – 1 ø
p
100
t [s]
30
20
t trip time
D setting value time multiplier
10
I fault current
Ip setting value current
5
D [s]
3 15
2 10
1 5
0.5
2
0.3
0.2 1 Note: For earth fault read 3I0p instead
of Ip and D3I0p instead of DIp
0.1
0.5
0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
æ 0.4797 - + 0.21359ö × D
DEFINITE INVERSE t = ç ------------------------------------- ÷ [s]
è ( I ¤ I ) 1.5625 – 1 ø
p
Figure 4-3 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and earth)
Times The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays
(7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Shortest tripping time approx. 5 ms
Circuit Breaker Current flow monitoring 0.25 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Supervision Dropoff to pickup ratio approx. 0.95
Pickup tolerance 5 % of set value or 0.01 A1)
Breaker status monitoring
– with three-pole control binary input for CB auxiliary contact
– with individual pole control 1 binary input each for each pole, or
1 binary input each for NO and NC contacts
Note: Breaker failure protection can operate without the mentioned breaker auxiliary contacts but with re-
duced functionality. Processing of the auxiliary contacts are necessary for:
Breaker failure protection without or with insufficient current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection),
end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision.
1)
Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Pole Discrepancy Starting criterion any pole open and any pole closed
Supervision
Supervision time 0.00 s to 30.00 s; ¥ (steps 0.01 s)
Time tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Setting Ranges Factor k according to IEC 60255–8 0.10 to 4.00 (steps 0.01)
Time factor t 1.0 min to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min)
Alarm temperaturerise Qalarm/Qtrip 50 % to 100 % related to the trip
temperature rise (steps 1 %)
Current alarm stage Ialarm 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
1
) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
100 100
t [min] t [min]
50 Parameter: 50
Setting value;
Time constant
30 30
t [min]
20 20
1000
Parameter:
10 10 Setting value;
500 Time constant
5 5
t [min]
200 1000
3 3
2 2
100 500
1 1
50
200
0.5 0.5
20 100
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
10 50
0.1 0.1
5
20
1 2 1 2 5 10
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12
I / (k·IN) I / (k·IN)
I pre ö 2
I ö2
æ ------------- I -ö 2 æ -------------
æ ------------- -
èk × I ø
- è k × I ø – çè k × I ÷ø
N N N
t = t × ln -------------------------------- [min] t = t × ln --------------------------------------------------- [min]
I ö2
æ ------------- I ö2
æ -------------
- –1 - –1
èk × I ø èk × I ø
N N
Measured values of
the differential protection IDIFFL1; IDIFF L2; IDIFFL3;
IRESTL1; IRESTL2; IRESTL3
in % of IN oper
Remote measured values of currents IL1; IL2; IL3 of remote ends in % of IN oper;
j(IL1); j(IL2); j(IL3) (remote vs. local) in °
Remote measured values of voltages UL1; UL2; UL3 of remote ends
in % of UN oper /Ö3;
j(UL1); j(UL2); j(UL3) (remote vs. local) in°
4.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Size 1/2 (of 19")
244
266
244
2 2
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
225
220
221 + 2
5 or M4
255.8 ± 0.3
+1
245
6
5.4
Panel cut-out
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-5 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/2)
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Size 1/1 (of 19")
266
244
244
2 2
Rear view
6 6
5 or M4
255.8 ± 0.3
245 + 1
6 6
Dimensions in mm
13.2 405 ± 0.5
7.3 431.4 ± 0.3
Figure 4-6 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/1)
240
219 10.5 260
51 75
29.5
76 100
225
280
320
344
266
9 1 25
26 50
71
Front view
Side view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-7 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel surface mounting (size 1/2)
465
444 10.5
101 150
151 200
450
280
320
344
9 1 50
51 100
Front view
260
29.5
266
71 Dimensions in mm
Side view
Figure 4-8 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel surface mounting (size 1/1)
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Version
Differential protection for two-end operation 2
Differential protection for multi-end operation 3
Measured Current
IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A 5
Additional specification L + L
Port B: System Interface
Profibus DP Slave, electrical RS485 0 A
Profibus DP Slave, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3) 0 B
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 0 G
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, twin ring, ST-plug 3) 0 H
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Differential Protection 7SD52 _ _ 0
Functions 1
3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 0
3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 1
1-/3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 2
1-/3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 3
With protection data interface 2 see additional specification N (3 has to be at position 6) 9
Backup Functions
without (no more available) A
with time overcurrent protection B
with time overcurrent protection and breaker failure protection C
Additional Funktions 1
4 Remote Commands / 24 Remote Indication Transformer Expansions (Vector Group Adaption)
without without A
without with E
with without J
with with N
without external GPS synchronisation 0
with external GPS synchronisation 1
Additional Specification M + M
Port C: DIGSI/Modem Interface
no DIGSI interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3
Additional Specification N + N
Functions 1
3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 0
3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 1
1-/3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 2
1-/3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 3
A.1.1 Accessories
Communication Converter for the serial connection of the differential protection system 7SD52 to the
Converter synchronous communication interfaces X.21 or G.703 (X/G) or ISDN (S0) or copper
cable (Cu).
Name Order No.
Optical-electrical communication converter (CC-X/G) 7XV5662–0AA00
Optical-electrical communication converter (CC-S0) 7XV5662–0AB01
Optical-electrical communication converter (CC-Cu) 7XV5662–0AC00
Isolating Trans- Isolating transformers become necessary on copper pilot wires if the induced longitu-
former dinal voltage of the wires can lead to more than 60 % of the insulation test voltage at
the communication converter (i.e. 3 kV for CC-Cu). They are installed between the
communication converter and the pilot wires.
Name Order No.
Isolating transformer 20 kV insulation test voltage 7XR6516
GPS
Name Order No.
GPS-receiver and antenna 7XV5664–0AA00
Power supply 7XV5810–0BA00
Voltage Transform-
er Miniature Circuit Nominal varies Order No.
Breaker Thermal 1.6 A; magnetic 6 A 3RV1611–1AG14
External Optical connectors for Profibus and DNP3.0 are not available in surface mounting
Converters housings. Please order a device with the corresponding electrical RS485 interface
and the matching converter according to the following table:
For Interface Type Order Device with Additional Accessories
Profibus DP double ring Profibus DP RS485 6GK1502–4AB10
7XV5810–0BA00
DNP3.0 820 nm DNP3.0 RS485 7XV5650–0BA00
Terminal Block
Covering Caps Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block C73334–A1–C31–1
12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block C73334–A1–C32–1
Plug-in Connectors
Connector Type Order No.
2 pin C73334–A1–C35–1
3 pin C73334–A1–C36–1
Mounting Bracket
for 19"-Racks Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165–A63–C200–3
Battery
Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No.
VARTA 6127 101 501
Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are at least Windows 95 or Windows NT4
and the operating software DIGSI®.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.
Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100–4
Graphical Analysis Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option
Program SIGRA package of the complete version of DIGSI®
Graphical analysis program SIGRA® Order No.
Full version with license for 10 machines 7XS5410–0AA00
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
connector) using DIGSI®.
(Option package of the complete version of DIGSI®.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Order No.
Full version with license for 10 machines 7XS5440–1AA00
SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and creating
additional function is SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete version
of DIGSI®.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Order No.
Full version with license for 10 machines 7XS5450–0AA00
7SD52**-*A/J
Q1 *) BO1 K6
IL1
Q2 *) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 IL3 *) BO4 K9
Q6 K10
Q7 K11 *) accelerated
I4 *) BO5
Q8 K12
R15 UL1 K13
*) BO6
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 K15
*) BO7
R16 K16
R13 BO8 R1
U4
R14 BO9 R2
BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2
R5
J2
1 2
J3 BI3 BO13 R7
3 2
J4 BI4 R8
J6 BI5
BO14 R9
J5
R10
J7 BI6
BO15 R11
J8
R12
J9 BI7
J10 Live status 1 2
K3
J11 BI8 contact 3 2
K4
J12 +
Power (~)
K1
supply - K2
Protection data
E
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables
interface 2
3-12 and 3-13 in Subsection 3.2.1
Protection data
interface 1 D
System
interface B
Service
interface C
Time
synchronization A
Operator
interface
7SD52**-*C/L
Q1 *) BO1 K6
IL1
Q2 *) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3
Q6 K10
Q7 *) BO5 K11 *) accelerated
I4 K12
Q8
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14
BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
J7 BI6 BO15 R11
J8 R12
1 2
J9 BI7 BO16 P3
3 2
J10 P4
J11 BI8 BO17 P6
J12 BO18 P7
P17 BI9 BO19 P8
P18 P5
N1 BI10 BO20 P9
N2 P10
N3 BI11 BO21 P11
N4 BI12 P12
N6 BI13 BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 BO23 P15
N8 P16
N9 BI15
Live status 1 2
K3
N10 contact 3 2
N11 BI16 K4
N12 +
Power (~)
K1
supply - K2
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables
Protection data
interface 2 E
3-12 and 3-13 in Subsection 3.2.1
Protection data
interface 1 D
System
interface B
Service
interface C
Time
synchronization A
Operator
interface Interference suppression
capacitors at the contacts,
Earthing at the Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
rear wall
Figure A-2 General diagram 7SD52**–*C/L (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting), housing size 1/1
7SD52**-*N/S
Q1 *) BO1 K6
IL1
Q2 *) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3
Q6 K10
Q7 *) BO5 K11 *) accelerated
I4 K12
Q8 **) high-speed
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14
BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
J7 BI6 BO15 R11
J8 R12
J9 BI7 **) BO16 P3
J10 P4
J11 BI8 *) BO17 P6
J12 *) BO18 P7
P17 BI9 *) BO19 P8
P18 P5
N1 BI10 **) BO20 P9
N2 P10
N3 BI11 **) BO21 P11
N4 BI12 P12
N6 BI13 **) BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 **) BO23 P15
N8 P16
N9 BI15
Live status 1 2
K3
N10 contact 3 2
N11 BI16 K4
N12 +
Power (~)
K1
supply - K2
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables
Protection data
interface 2 E
3-12 and 3-13 in Subsection 3.2.1
Protection data
interface 1 D
System
interface B
Service
interface C
Time
synchronization A
Operator
interface Interference suppression
capacitors at the contacts,
Earthing at the Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
rear wall
Figure A-3 General diagram 7SD52**–*N/S (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting), housing size 1/1
7SD52**-
Q1 *) BO1 K6
*D/M Q2
IL1
*) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3 K10
Q6
Q7 *) BO5 K11
I4 K12
Q8 *) accelerated
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14 BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
BO15 R11
J7 BI6
R12
J8 1 2
J9 BI7 BO16 P3
3 2
J10 P4
J11 BI8 BO17 P6
J12 BO18 P7
BO19 P8
P17 BI9
P18 P5
BO20 P9
N1 BI10
P10
N2
BO21 P11
N3 BI11 P12
N4 BI12
N6 BI13 BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 BO23 P15
P16
N8
1 2
N9 BI15 BO24 H3
3 2
N10 H4
N11 BI16 BO25 H6
N12 BO26 H7
H17 BI17 BO27 H8
H18 H5
G1 BI18 BO28 H9
G2 H10
G3 BI19 BO29 H11
G4 BI20 H12
G6 BI21 BO30 H13
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables
G5 H14
G7 BI22 BO31 H15
G8 H16
3-12 and 3-13 in Subsection 3.2.1
Figure A-4 General diagram 7SD52**–*D/M (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting), housing size 1/1
7SD52**-
Q1 *) BO1 K6
*P/T Q2
IL1
*) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3 K10
Q6
Q7 *) BO5 K11
I4 K12
Q8 *) accelerated
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
**) high-speed
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14 BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
BO15 R11
J7 BI6
R12
J8
J9 BI7 **) BO16 P3
J10 P4
J11 BI8 *) BO17 P6
J12 *) BO18 P7
*) BO19 P8
P17 BI9
P18 P5
**) BO20 P9
N1 BI10
P10
N2
**) BO21 P11
N3 BI11 P12
N4 BI12
N6 BI13 **) BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 **) BO23 P15
P16
N8
1 2
N9 BI15 BO24 H3
3 2
N10 H4
N11 BI16 BO25 H6
N12 BO26 H7
H17 BI17 BO27 H8
H18 H5
G1 BI18 BO28 H9
G2 H10
G3 BI19 BO29 H11
G4 BI20 H12
G6 BI21 BO30 H13
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables
G5 H14
G7 BI22 BO31 H15
G8 H16
3-12 and 3-13 in Subsection 3.2.1
Figure A-5 General diagram 7SD52**–*P/T (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting), housing size 1/1
7SD52**-*E
*) BO1
25 IL1 63
50 *) BO2 87
24 *) BO3 62
IL2
49 88
23 IL3 *) BO4 86
48 61 *) accelerated
22 I4 *) BO5 85
47 60
20 UL1 84
*) BO6
19 UL2 59
44 UL3 83
*) BO7
45 58
21 BO8 74
U4
46 BO9 99
BO10 73
43 BI1 BO11 98
18 BO12 72
42 BI2 97
17
1 2
41 BI3 BO13 96
3 2
40 BI4 71
39 BI5
BO14 95
14 70
38 BI6 94
BO15
13 69
37 BI7
12 Live status 1 2
90
contact 3 2
36 BI8 65
11 +
Power (~)
L+
supply - L–
Earthing
terminal (26)
Earthing at the
side wall Interference suppression
capacitors at the contacts,
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-6 General diagram 7SD52**-*E (panel surface mounting), housing size 1/2
7SD52**-*E
(production series
/CC)
optical
System
interface
electrical Channel B
electric RS232/RS485
optical
Service
interface
electrical Channel C
electric RS232/RS485
Protection optical
data interface 1 Channel D
Protection optical
Channel E
data interface 2
2 IN SYNC
27 IN 12 V
Time electrical 3 COM SYNC
synchronisation 28 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
29 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Figure A-7 General diagram 7SD52**-*E (panel surface mounting), housing size 1/2
7SD52**-*G
50 *) BO1 123
IL1
100 *) BO2 172
49 *) BO3 122
IL2
99 173
48 *) BO4 171
IL3
98 121
47 *) BO5 170
I4 120
97 *) accelerated
45 UL1 *) BO6 169
44 UL2 119
94 UL3 *) BO7 168
118
95 BO8 149
46 U4 BO9 199
96
BO10 148
75 BI1 BO11 198
25 BO12 147
74 BI2 197
24 1 2
BO13 196
73 BI3 3 2
146
23 BI4
22 BI5 BO14 195
72 145
71 BI6 BO15 194
21 144
70 BI7 BO16
1 2
190
3 2
20 140
69 BI8 BO17 139
19 BO18 188
90 BI9 BO19 138
40 189
89 BI10 187
39 BO20
137
86 BI11 186
36 BI12 BO21
136
35 BI13
BO22 185
85
135
84 BI14 184
34 BO23
134
83 BI15
33
82 BI16
32 Live status 1 2
174
contact 3 2
124
+
Power (~)
L+
supply - L–
Earthing
terminal (51)
7SD52**-*Q
50 *) BO1 123
IL1
100 *) BO2 172
49 *) BO3 122
IL2
99 173
48 *) BO4 171
IL3
98 121
47 *) BO5 170
I4 120
97 *) accelerated
45 UL1 *) BO6 169 **) high-speed
44 UL2 119
94 UL3 *) BO7 168
118
95 BO8 149
46 U4 BO9 199
96
BO10 148
75 BI1 BO11 198
25 BO12 147
74 BI2 197
24 1 2
BO13 196
73 BI3 3 2
146
23 BI4
22 BI5 BO14 195
72 145
71 BI6 BO15 194
21 144
70 BI7 **) BO16 190
20 140
69 BI8 *) BO17 139
19 *) BO18 188
90 BI9 *) BO19 138
40 189
89 BI10 **) BO20 187
39 137
86 BI11 186
36 BI12 **) BO21
136
35 BI13
**) BO22 185
85
135
84 BI14 184
34 **) BO23
134
83 BI15
33
82 BI16
32 Live status 1 2
174
contact 3 2
124
+
Power (~)
L+
supply - L–
Earthing
terminal (51)
Figure A-10 General diagram 7SD52**-*H (panel surface mounting), housing size 1/1
For further serial interfaces refer to Figure A-12.
Figure A-11 General diagram 7SD52**-*R (panel surface mounting), housing size 1/1
For further serial interfaces refer to Figure A-12.
7SD52**-*G/H/Q/R
(production series
/CC)
optical
System
interface Channel B
electrical electric RS232/RS485
optical
Service
interface Channel C
electrical
electric RS232/RS485
Protection optical
data interface 1 Channel D
Protection optical
data interface 2 Channel E
2 IN SYNC
52 IN 12 V
electrical 3 COM SYNC
Time
synchronisation 53 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
54 IN 24 V
1 screen
Figure A-12 General diagram 7SD52**-*G/H/Q/R (panel surface mounting), housing size 1/
1
Current
Transformer
Connection
Examples Panel surface mounted
Flush mounted/cubicle
IL1
25 Q1 Q2 50
IL2
24 Q3 Q4 49
IL3
23 Q5 Q6 48
P2
S2
I4
P1
S1 22 Q7 Q8 47
7SD52
I4
P1
S1 47 Q7 Q8 97
7SD52
Figure A-13 Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection
for earth current (residual 3I0 neutral current), normal circuit layout —
appropriate for all systems
I4
S1 47 Q8 Q7 22
P1
7SD52
L1 L2 L3
P2 S2
P1 S1
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!
Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 current
input I4
I4
S1 97 Q8 Q7 47
P1
7SD52
L1 L2 L3
P2 S2
P1 S1
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!
Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 current
input I4
Figure A-14 Current connections to three current transformers and a separate neutral current
transformer (summation transformer) for earth current —
preferred for solidly or low-resistive earthed systems
Voltage L1
Transformer L2
Connection L3
Examples
a b 45 R16
7SD52
L1
L2
L3
a b 95 R16
7SD52
L1
L2
L3
da dn a b 45 R16
U4
21 R13
46 R14
7SD52
L1
L2
L3
da dn a b 95 R16
U4
46 R13
96 R14
7SD52
Binary Inputs
Table A-1 Binary input presettings
Binary Outputs
Table A-2 Binary output presettings
LEDs
Table A-3 LED presettings
Function keys The 4 function keys on the front have the following presetting:
Preset CFC-Charts 7SD52 provides a CFC configuration sheet with preset logical functions. These con-
vert the binary inputs “>DataStop” and “>Test mode” from single point indication
(SP) into internal single point indication (IntSP).
Negator
NEG PLC1_BEA
Negator 1/–
IN: Device >DataStop SP BO X1 Y BO OUT: Device UnlockDT IntSP
Timer
TIMER PLC1_BEA OR
Timer 4/– OR PLC1_BEA
0 BO R Q BO OR–Gate 5/–
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP BO S QT1 BO BO X1 Y BO
10 I T1x1ms QT2 BO BO X2
10 I T2x1ms
INVERT COM
NEG PLC1_BEA BOOL_TO_IC PLC1_BEA
Negator 2/– Bool to intern 6/–
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP BO X1 Y BO 16#0 W ORIGIN IE BO OUT: Diff. Prot Test Diff. IntSP
DM 16#0 W PROP
BUILD_DI PLC1_BEA 0 I TIMx100m
Create Double 3/– BO TRIG
0 BO TYP_DP_I Y W W VAL
BO VAL OFF
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP BO VAL ON
Protocol ®
IEC 60870–5–103 Profibus DP DNP3.0
Function ¯
Operational measured values Yes Yes Yes
Metering values Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes No No
User-defined alarms and Yes Pre-defined Pre-defined
switching objects “user-specified mes- “user-specified mes-
sages” in CFC sages” in CFC
Time synchronization Via Protocol; Via Protocol; Via Protocol;
DCF77/IRIGB/GPS; DCF77/IRIGB/GPS; DCF77/IRIGB/GPS;
Interface; Interface; Interface;
Binary Input Binary Input Binary Input
Alarms with Time Stamp Yes No Yes
Commissioning Tools
Alarm and measured Yes No No
value transmission
blocking
Generate test alarms Yes No No
Further Data
Physical Mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous
Transmission Mode Cyclic/Event Cyclic/Event Cyclic/Event
Baud Rate 4800 to 38400 Up to 1.5 MBaud 2400 to 19200
Type RS 232; RS 485; RS 485;
RS 485; Optical fibre Optical fibre
Optical fibre (Double ring)
Note: Depending on the version and the variant ordered some addresses are not used or have different default
settings.
The setting ranges and presettings listed in the following tables refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a
secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5.
Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in DIGSI®, under “Additional Set-
tings”.
110 Trip 1pole 3pole only 3pole only 1pole trip permitted
1-/3pole
122 DTT Direct Trip Disabled Disabled DTT Direct Transfer Trip
Enabled
134 AR control mode with Pickup and Action time with Trip but wit- AR control mode
with Pickup but without hout Action time
Action time
with Trip and Action time
with Trip but without Action
time
203 Unom PRIMARY Power System 0.4..1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage
Data 1
204 Unom SECON- Power System 80..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
DARY Data 1 (Ph-Ph)
210 U4 transformer Power System not connected not connected U4 voltage transformer is
Data 1 Udelta transformer
211 Uph / Udelta Power System 0.10..9.99 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT
Data 1 To Open-Delta-VT
220 I4 transformer Power System not connected Neutral Current (of I4 current transformer is
Data 1 Neutral Current (of the protected line)
the protected line)
221 I4/Iph CT Power System 0.010..5.000 1.000 Matching ratio I4/Iph for
Data 1 CT's
240A TMin TRIP CMD Power System 0.02..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Data 1 Duration
242 T-CBtest-dead Power System 0.00..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Dead Time for CB test-
Data 1 autoreclosure
301 ACTIVE GROUP Change Group Group A Group A Active Setting Group is
Group B
Group C
Group D
403A WAVEFORM Oscillographic Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
DATA Fault Records Power System fault
410 MAX. LENGTH Oscillographic 0.30..5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Fault Records Capture Record
411 PRE. TRIG. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior
Fault Records to Trigger
412 POST REC. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Fault Records Event
415 BinIn CAPT.TIME Oscillographic 0.10..5.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary
Fault Records Input
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device Display Targets on Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
every Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on
TRIP only
1106 OPERATION Power System 0.2..5000.0 MVA 692.8 MVA Operational power of pro-
POWER Data 2 tection zone
1130A PoleOpenCurrent Power System 0.05..1.00 A 0.10 A Pole Open Current Thres-
Data 2 hold
1134 Line status Power System with Pole Open Cur- with Pole Open Cur- Line status
Data 2 rent Threshold only rent Threshold only
with CBaux open
AND I < PoleOpen-
Current
1150A SI Time Man.Cl Power System 0.01..30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after MANUAL
Data 2 closures
1155 3pole coupling Power System with Pickup with Trip 3 pole coupling
Data 2 with Trip
1156A Trip2phFlt Power System 3pole 3pole Trip type with 2phase faults
Data 2 1pole, leading
phase
1pole, lagging
phase
1161 VECTOR GROUP Power System 0..11 0 Vector group numeral for
U Data 2 voltage
1162 VECTOR GROUP I Power System 0..11 0 Vector group numeral for
Data 2 current
1163 TRANS STP IS Power System Solid Earthed Solid Earthed Transformer starpoint is
Data 2 Not Earthed
1217A T-DELAY I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec I-DIFF>: Trip time delay
tection
1218A T3I0 1PHAS Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec Delay 1ph-faults (comp/
tection isol. star-point)
1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE Intertrip Alarm only Trip Reaction if intertrip com-
Trip mand is receiv.
1303 T-ITRIP BI Intertrip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.02 sec Delay for intertrip via binary
input
1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI Intertrip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Prolongation for intertrip via
bin.input
1505A PROT 1 T-DELAY Protection Inter- 0.1..30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 1: Maximal permissible
face (Port D+E) delay time
1506A PROT 1 UNSYM. Protection Inter- 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 1: Diff. in send and
face (Port D+E) receive time
1509 T-DATA DISTURB Protection Inter- 0.05..2.00 sec 0.10 sec Time delay for data distur-
face (Port D+E) bance alarm
1510 T-DATAFAIL Protection Inter- 0.0..60.0 sec 6.0 sec Time del for transmission
face (Port D+E) failure alarm
1511 PI1 SYNCMODE Protection Inter- Telegram and GPS Telegram and GPS PI1 Synchronizationmode
face (Port D+E) Telegram or GPS
GPS synchroniza-
tion OFF
1512 Td ResetRemote Protection Inter- 0.00..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec Remote signal RESET
face (Port D+E) DELAY for comm.fail
1513A PROT1 max Protection Inter- 0.5..20.0 % 1.0 % Prot 1: Maximal permissible
ERROR face (Port D+E) error rate
1515A PI1 BLOCK Protection Inter- YES YES Prot.1: Block. due to
UNSYM face (Port D+E) NO unsym. delay time
1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER Protection Inter- Direct connection Direct connection Connection 2 over
face (Port D+E) with fibre optic cable with fibre optic cable
Communication
converter with 64
kBit/s
Communication
converter with 128
kBit/s
Communication
converter with 512
kBit/s
1605A PROT 2 T-DELAY Protection Inter- 0.1..30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 2: Maximal permissible
face (Port D+E) delay time
1606A PROT 2 UNSYM. Protection Inter- 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 2: Diff. in send and
face (Port D+E) receive time
1613A PROT2 max Protection Inter- 0.5..20.0 % 1.0 % Prot 1: Maximal permissible
ERROR face (Port D+E) error rate
1615A PI2 BLOCK Protection Inter- YES YES Prot.2: Block. due to
UNSYM face (Port D+E) NO unsym. delay time
1803A TD GPS FAILD Protection Inter- 0.5..60.0 sec 2.1 sec Delay time for local GPS-
face (Port D+E) pulse loss
2201 FCT Direct Trip DTT Direct ON OFF Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)
Transfer Trip OFF
2202 Trip Time DELAY DTT Direct 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.01 sec Trip Time Delay
Transfer Trip
2611 T Iph>> Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.30 sec T Iph>> Time delay
current
2612 3I0>> PICKUP Backup over- 0.05..25.00 A; ¥ 0.50 A 3I0>> Pickup
current
2613 T 3I0>> Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec T 3I0>> Time delay
current
2614 I>> Telep/BI Backup over- NO YES Instantaneous trip via Tele-
current YES prot./BI
2621 T Iph> Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec T Iph> Time delay
current
2623 T 3I0> Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec T 3I0> Time delay
current
2630 Iph> STUB Backup over- 0.10..25.00 A; ¥ 1.50 A Iph> STUB Pickup
current
2631 T Iph STUB Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.30 sec T Iph STUB Time delay
current
2633 T 3I0 STUB Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec T 3I0 STUB Time delay
current
2642 T Ip Time Dial Backup over- 0.05..3.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
current
2646 T Ip Add Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T Ip Additional Time Delay
current
2652 T 3I0p TimeDial Backup over- 0.05..3.00 sec; ¥ 0.50 sec T 3I0p Time Dial
current
2653 TimeDial TD3I0p Backup over- 0.50..15.00; ¥ 5.00 Time Dial TD 3I0p
current
2656 T 3I0p Add Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T 3I0p Additional Time
current Delay
2660 IEC Curve Backup over- Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
current Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long time inverse
2680 SOTF Time DELAY Backup over- 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
current
2905A BAL. FACTOR I Measurement 0.10..0.95 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Supervision Monitor
3403 T-RECLAIM Auto Reclose 0.50..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Reclaim time after suc-
cessful AR cycle
3404 T-BLOCK MC Auto Reclose 0.50..300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
manual close
3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. Auto Reclose with Pickup with Trip Evolving fault recognition
with Trip
3407 EV. FLT. MODE Auto Reclose Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR- Evolving fault (during the
starts 3pole AR- cycle dead time)
cycle
3408 T-Start MONITOR Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring
time
3409 CB TIME OUT Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Super-
vision Time
3410 T RemoteClose Auto Reclose 0.00..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.20 sec Send delay for remote
close command
3411A T-DEAD EXT. Auto Reclose 0.50..300.00 sec; ¥ ¥ sec Maximum dead time exten-
sion
3420 AR WITH DIFF Auto Reclose YES YES AR with differential protec-
NO tion ?
3424 AR w/ DTT Auto Reclose YES YES AR with direct transfer trip
NO
3431 DLC / RDT Auto Reclose Without Without Dead Line Check / Redu-
Dead Line Check ced Dead Time
(DLC)
3433 T-ACTION ADT Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.20 sec Action time
3434 T-MAX ADT Auto Reclose 0.50..3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time
3438 T U-stable Auto Reclose 0.10..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/
live voltage
3450 1.AR: START Auto Reclose YES YES Start of AR allowed in this
NO cycle
3451 1.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.20 sec Action time
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase
¥ faults
3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase
¥ faults
3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase
¥ faults
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip
¥
3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
¥
3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving
fault
3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase
¥ faults
3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase
¥ faults
3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase
¥ faults
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
¥
3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
¥
3469 2.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving
fault
3473 3.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.20 sec Action time
3475 3.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase
¥ faults
3476 3.AR Tdead 2Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 2phase
¥ faults
3477 3.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase
¥ faults
3478 3.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
¥
3479 3.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
¥
3480 3.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving
fault
3484 4.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec; ¥ 0.20 sec Action time
3486 4.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase
¥ faults
3488 4.AR Tdead 3Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3phase
¥ faults
3489 4.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; ¥ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
¥
3490 4.AR Tdead3Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.50 sec Dead time after 3pole trip
¥
3491 4.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving
fault
3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) Breaker Failure NO YES 1pole retrip with stage T1
YES (local trip)
3904 T1-1pole Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start
(local trip)
3905 T1-3pole Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start
(local trip)
3906 T2 Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage
(busbar trip)
3907 T3-BkrDefective Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with
defective bkr.
3909 Chk BRK CON- Breaker Failure NO YES Check Breaker contacts
TACT YES
3921 End Flt. stage Breaker Failure ON OFF End fault stage is
OFF
3922 T-EndFault Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ¥ 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage
4003 Alarm Delay Trip Circuit 1..30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
Supervision
4201 Ther. OVERLOAD Thermal Over- OFF OFF Thermal overload protec-
load ON tion
Alarm Only
4203 TIME CONSTANT Thermal Over- 1.0..999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
load
4206 CALC. METHOD Thermal Over- Theta Max Theta Max Method of Acquiring Tem-
load Average Theta perature
Theta @ Imax
Notes:
The following tables list all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. Depending on
the version and the variant ordered only those data may be present which are valid for the actual version.
The leading ‘>’ sign indicates a binary input as a source.
Indications according to IEC 60870-5-103 are always announced “ON” and “OFF” if they are mandatory for
general interrogation, otherwise only “ON”.
User-specified indications or indications which are user-allocated to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, are an-
nounced “ON” and “OFF” only in case they are not configured as pulse outputs.
The following terminology applies for the columns under “Log-Buffers”:
CAPITAL LETTERS: preset ON/OFF indication, cannot be changed
lowercase letters: preset ON/OFF indication, can be changed
*: not preset, can be allocated and configured
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00056 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device OUT ON * LED BO 192 5 1
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00069 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSav- Device OUT ON * LED BO
Time) OFF
00110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device OUT_Ev ON * LED BO 135 130 1
00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device OUT ON * M LED BO 135 136 1 GI
00127 Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system Auto Reclose IntSP ON * LED BO
port) (AR ON/OFF) OFF
00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Device OUT ON * LED BO 192 47 1 GI
Sum Alarm) OFF
00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Device OUT * * LED BO 192 46 1 GI
Event)
00163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 183 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
00167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail U Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 186 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
00177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 193 1 GI
OFF
00181 Error: A/D converter (Error A/D-conv.) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 178 1 GI
OFF
00182 Alarm: Real Time Clock (Alarm Clock) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 194 1 GI
OFF
00183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 171 1 GI
OFF
00184 Error Board 2 (Error Board 2) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 172 1 GI
OFF
00185 Error Board 3 (Error Board 3) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 173 1 GI
OFF
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00186 Error Board 4 (Error Board 4) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 174 1 GI
OFF
00187 Error Board 5 (Error Board 5) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 175 1 GI
OFF
00188 Error Board 6 (Error Board 6) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 176 1 GI
OFF
00189 Error Board 7 (Error Board 7) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 177 1 GI
OFF
00190 Error Board 0 (Error Board 0) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 210 1 GI
OFF
00192 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from set- Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 169 1 GI
ting (Error1A/5Awrong) OFF
00193 Alarm: Analog input adjustment invalid Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 181 1 GI
(Alarm adjustm.) OFF
00203 Waveform data deleted (Wave. dele- Oscillographic OUT_Ev ON * LED BO 135 203 1
ted) Fault Records
00289 Alarm: Current summation supervision Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 250 1 GI
(Failure Si) Supervision OFF
00290 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 137 1 GI
L1 (Broken Iwire L1) Supervision
00291 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 138 1 GI
L2 (Broken Iwire L2) Supervision
00292 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 139 1 GI
L3 (Broken Iwire L3) Supervision
00301 Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Power System OUT ON ON 135 231 2 GI
Data 2 OFF
00302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Power System OUT * ON 135 232 2
Data 2
00351 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1 Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 1 1 GI
(>CB Aux. L1) Data 2
00352 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2 Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 2 1 GI
(>CB Aux. L2) Data 2
00353 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L3 Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 3 1 GI
(>CB Aux. L3) Data 2
00356 >Manual close signal (>Manual Close) Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 6 1 GI
Data 2
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00357 >Block all close commands from Power System SP ON * LED BI BO 150 7 1 GI
external (>CloseCmd.Blo) Data 2 OFF
00371 >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for reclo- Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 71 1 GI
sing (>CB1 Ready) Data 2
00379 >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed (>CB Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 78 1 GI
3p Closed) Data 2
00380 >CB aux. contact 3pole Open (>CB 3p Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 79 1 GI
Open) Data 2
00410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB- Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 80 1 GI
Test) (>CB1 3p Closed) Data 2
00411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test) Power System SP * * LED BI BO 150 81 1 GI
(>CB1 3p Open) Data 2
00501 Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP) Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 84 2 GI
Data 2
00503 Relay PICKUP Phase L1 (Relay PIK- Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 64 2 GI
KUP L1) Data 2
00504 Relay PICKUP Phase L2 (Relay PIK- Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 65 2 GI
KUP L2) Data 2
00505 Relay PICKUP Phase L3 (Relay PIK- Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 66 2 GI
KUP L3) Data 2
00506 Relay PICKUP Earth (Relay PICKUP Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 67 2 GI
E) Data 2
00507 Relay TRIP command Phase L1 Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 69 2
(Relay TRIP L1) Data 2
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00508 Relay TRIP command Phase L2 Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 70 2
(Relay TRIP L2) Data 2
00509 Relay TRIP command Phase L3 Power System OUT * * M LED BO 192 71 2
(Relay TRIP L3) Data 2
00511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command Power System OUT * M LED BO 192 68 2
(Relay TRIP) Data 2 OFF
00512 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase Power System OUT * * LED BO
L1 (Relay TRIP 1pL1) Data 2
00513 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase Power System OUT * * LED BO
L2 (Relay TRIP 1pL2) Data 2
00514 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase Power System OUT * * LED BO
L3 (Relay TRIP 1pL3) Data 2
00515 Relay TRIP command Phases L123 Power System OUT * * LED BO
(Relay TRIP 3ph.) Data 2
00533 Primary fault current IL1 (IL1 =) Power System OUT * ON 150 177 4
Data 2 OFF
00534 Primary fault current IL2 (IL2 =) Power System OUT * ON 150 178 4
Data 2 OFF
00535 Primary fault current IL3 (IL3 =) Power System OUT * ON 150 179 4
Data 2 OFF
00536 Final Trip (Final Trip) Power System OUT ON ON LED BO 150 180 2 GI
Data 2
00545 Time from Pickup to drop out (PU Power System OUT
Time) Data 2
00560 Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase Power System OUT * ON LED BO 150 210 2
(Trip Coupled 3p) Data 2
00561 Manual close signal detected Power System OUT ON * LED BO 150 211 1
(Man.Clos.Detect) Data 2
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01027 Accumulation of interrupted current L1 Statistics OUT
(S IL1 =)
01402 >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection Breaker Failure SP * * LED BI BO
(>BF off)
01403 >BLOCK Breaker failure (>BLOCK Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO 166 103 1 GI
BkrFail) OFF
01415 >BF: External start 3pole (>BF Start Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
3pole) OFF
01435 >BF: External start L1 (>BF Start L1) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
OFF
01436 >BF: External start L2 (>BF Start L2) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
OFF
01437 >BF: External start L3 (>BF Start L3) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
OFF
01439 >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
(>BF Start w/o I) OFF
01440 Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI Breaker Failure IntSP ON * LED BO
(BkrFailON/offBI) OFF
01451 Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker Failure OUT ON * LED BO 166 151 1 GI
(BkrFail OFF) OFF
01452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail Breaker Failure OUT ON ON LED BO 166 152 1 GI
BLOCK) OFF OFF
01453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail Breaker Failure OUT * * LED BO 166 153 1 GI
ACTIVE)
01461 Breaker failure protection started (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO 166 161 2 GI
Start) OFF
01472 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
(BF T1-TRIP 1pL1)
01473 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L2 Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
(BF T1-TRIP 1pL2)
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01474 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L3 Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
(BF T1-TRIP 1pL3)
01476 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole (BF T1- Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
TRIP L123)
01494 BF Trip T2 (busbar trip) (BF T2- Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO 192 85 2
TRIP(bus))
01495 BF Trip End fault stage (BF EndFlt Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
TRIP)
01500 BF Pole discrepancy Trip (BF CBdiscr Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
TRIP)
01511 Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Over- OUT ON * LED BO 167 11 1 GI
(Th.Overload OFF) load OFF
01512 Thermal Overload Protection BLOK- Thermal Over- OUT ON ON LED BO 167 12 1 GI
KED (Th.Overload BLK) load OFF OFF
01513 Thermal Overload Protection ACTIVE Thermal Over- OUT ON * LED BO 167 13 1 GI
(Th.Overload ACT) load OFF
01515 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (O/L Thermal Over- OUT ON * LED BO 167 15 1 GI
I Alarm) load OFF
01516 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip Thermal Over- OUT ON * LED BO 167 16 1 GI
(O/L Q Alarm) load OFF
01517 Winding Overload (Winding O/L) Thermal Over- OUT ON * LED BO 167 17 1 GI
load OFF
01521 Thermal Overload TRIP (ThOverload Thermal Over- OUT * ON LED BO 167 21 2 GI
TRIP) load
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02712 >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 12 2 GI
(>Trip L1 AR)
02715 >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 15 2 GI
(>Trip 1p for AR)
02716 >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 16 2 GI
(>Trip 3p for AR)
02742 >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle (>BLK 1.AR- Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 37 1 GI
cycle) OFF
02743 >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle (>BLK 2.AR- Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 38 1 GI
cycle) OFF
02744 >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle (>BLK 3.AR- Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 39 1 GI
cycle) OFF
02745 >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 40 1 GI
(>BLK 4.-n. AR) OFF
02746 >AR: External Trip for AR start (>Trip Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 41 2 GI
for AR)
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02752 >AR: External pickup 3phase for AR Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 47 2 GI
start (>Pickup 3ph AR)
02781 Auto recloser is switched OFF (Auto Auto Reclose OUT ON * LED BO 40 81 1 GI
recl. OFF) OFF
02782 Auto recloser is switched ON (Auto Auto Reclose IntSP * * LED BO 192 16 1 GI
recl. ON)
02784 Auto recloser is NOT ready (AR is Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 192 130 2 GI
NOT ready)
02787 AR: Circuit breaker not ready (CB not Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 87 1 GI
ready)
02796 AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI (AR Auto Reclose IntSP * * LED BO
on/off BI)
02801 Auto-reclose in progress (AR in pro- Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 101 2 GI
gress)
02809 AR: Start-signal monitoring time Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 174 2 GI
expired (AR T-Start Exp)
02810 AR: Maximum dead time expired (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 175 2 GI
TdeadMax Exp)
02818 AR: Evolving fault recognition (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 118 2 GI
evolving Flt)
02820 AR is set to operate after 1p trip only Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 143 1 GI
(AR Program1pole)
02821 AR dead time after evolving fault (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 197 2 GI
Td. evol.Flt) OFF
02839 AR dead time after 1pole trip running Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 148 2 GI
(AR Tdead 1pTrip)
02840 AR dead time after 3pole trip running Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 149 2 GI
(AR Tdead 3pTrip)
02841 AR dead time after 1phase fault run- Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 150 2 GI
ning (AR Tdead 1pFlt)
02842 AR dead time after 2phase fault run- Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 151 2 GI
ning (AR Tdead 2pFlt)
02843 AR dead time after 3phase fault run- Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 154 2 GI
ning (AR Tdead 3pFlt)
02844 AR 1st cycle running (AR 1stCyc. run.) Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 155 2 GI
02845 AR 2nd cycle running (AR 2ndCyc. Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 157 2 GI
run.)
02846 AR 3rd cycle running (AR 3rdCyc. Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 158 2 GI
run.)
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
02847 AR 4th or higher cycle running (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 159 2 GI
4thCyc. run.)
02848 AR cycle is running in ADT mode (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 130 2 GI
ADT run.)
02851 Auto-reclose Close command (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON M LED BO 192 128 2
Close)
02852 AR: Close command after 1pole 1st Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 152 1 GI
cycle (AR Close1.Cyc1p)
02853 AR: Close command after 3pole 1st Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 153 1 GI
cycle (AR Close1.Cyc3p)
02854 AR: Close command after 2nd cycle Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 192 129 1
(AR Close 2.Cyc)
02861 AR: Reclaim time is running (AR T- Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 161 1 GI
Recl. run.)
02862 Auto reclose cycle successful (AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 162 1 GI
Successful)
02863 Auto reclose Lockout (AR Lockout) Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 163 1 GI
02864 AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 164 1 GI
(AR 1p Trip Perm)
02865 AR: Synchro-check request (AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 165 2 GI
Sync.Request)
02871 AR: TRIP command 3pole (AR TRIP Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 171 2 GI
3pole)
02889 AR 1st cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 160 1 GI
(AR 1.CycZoneRel)
02890 AR 2nd cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 169 1 GI
(AR 2.CycZoneRel)
02891 AR 3rd cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 170 1 GI
(AR 3.CycZoneRel)
02892 AR 4th cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 172 1 GI
(AR 4.CycZoneRel)
02893 AR zone extension (general) (AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 173 1 GI
Zone Release)
02894 AR Remote close signal send (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 129 2 GI
Remote Close)
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03102 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO 92 89 1 GI
L1 (2nd Harmonic L1) tection
03103 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO 92 90 1 GI
L2 (2nd Harmonic L2) tection
03104 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO 92 91 1 GI
L3 (2nd Harmonic L3) tection
03132 Diff: Fault detection (Diff. Gen. Flt.) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO
tection OFF
03133 Diff: Fault detection in phase L1 (Diff. Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 93 2 GI
Flt. L1) tection OFF
03134 Diff: Fault detection in phase L2 (Diff. Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 94 2 GI
Flt. L2) tection OFF
03135 Diff: Fault detection in phase L3 (Diff. Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 95 2 GI
Flt. L3) tection OFF
03136 Diff: Earth fault detection (Diff. Flt. E) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 96 2 GI
tection OFF
03137 Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>> (I- Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 97 2 GI
Diff>> Flt.) tection OFF
03139 Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff> (I-Diff> Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 98 2 GI
Flt.) tection OFF
03141 Diff: General TRIP (Diff. Gen. TRIP) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 99 2 GI
tection OFF
03142 Diff: TRIP - Only L1 (Diff TRIP 1p L1) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 100 2 GI
tection OFF
03143 Diff: TRIP - Only L2 (Diff TRIP 1p L2) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 101 2 GI
tection OFF
03144 Diff: TRIP - Only L3 (Diff TRIP 1p L3) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 102 2 GI
tection OFF
03145 Diff: TRIP L123 (Diff TRIP L123) Differential Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 103 2 GI
tection OFF
03146 Diff: TRIP 1pole (Diff TRIP 1pole) Differential Pro- OUT * ON LED BO
tection OFF
03147 Diff: TRIP 3pole (Diff TRIP 3pole) Differential Pro- OUT * ON LED BO
tection OFF
03148 Diff: Differential protection is blocked Differential Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 92 104 1 GI
(Diff block) tection OFF
03149 Diff: Diff. protection is switched off Differential Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 92 105 1 GI
(Diff OFF) tection OFF
03176 Diff: Fault detection L1 (only) (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
1p.L1) tection
03177 Diff: Fault detection L1E (Diff Flt. L1E) Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
tection
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03178 Diff: Fault detection L2 (only) (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
1p.L2) tection
03179 Diff: Fault detection L2E (Diff Flt. L2E) Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
tection
03180 Diff: Fault detection L12 (Diff Flt. L12) Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
tection
03181 Diff: Fault detection L12E (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
L12E) tection
03182 Diff: Fault detection L3 (only) (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
1p.L3) tection
03183 Diff: Fault detection L3E (Diff Flt. L3E) Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
tection
03184 Diff: Fault detection L31 (Diff Flt. L31) Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
tection
03185 Diff: Fault detection L31E (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
L31E) tection
03186 Diff: Fault detection L23 (Diff Flt. L23) Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
tection
03187 Diff: Fault detection L23E (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
L23E) tection
03188 Diff: Fault detection L123 (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
L123) tection
03189 Diff: Fault detection L123E (Diff Flt. Differential Pro- OUT * * LED BO
L123E) tection
03190 Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection Differential Pro- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 92 106 1 GI
(Test Diff.) tection OFF
03191 Diff: Set Commissioning state of Diff. Differential Pro- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 92 107 1 GI
(Comm. Diff) tection OFF
03192 Diff: Remote relay in Teststate (Test- Differential Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 92 108 1 GI
Diff.remote) tection OFF
03193 Diff: Commissioning state is active Differential Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 92 109 1 GI
(Comm.Diff act.) tection OFF
03217 Prot Int 1: Own Datas received (PI1 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
Data reflec) face (Port D+E) OFF
03218 Prot Int 2: Own Datas received (PI2 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
Data reflec) face (Port D+E) OFF
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03228 >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO
(>PI2 light off) face (Port D+E) OFF
03229 Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 135 1 GI
(PI1 Data fault) face (Port D+E) OFF
03230 Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure (PI1 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 136 1 GI
Datafailure) face (Port D+E) OFF
03231 Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 137 1 GI
(PI2 Data fault) face (Port D+E) OFF
03232 Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure (PI2 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 138 1 GI
Datafailure) face (Port D+E) OFF
03233 Device table has inconsistent num- Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
bers (DT inconsistent) face (Port D+E) OFF
03234 Device tables are unequal (DT Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
unequal) face (Port D+E) OFF
03236 Different PI for transmit and receive Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI1<->PI2 error) face (Port D+E) OFF
03239 Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 139 1 GI
(PI1 TD alarm) face (Port D+E) OFF
03240 Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too high Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 140 1 GI
(PI2 TD alarm) face (Port D+E) OFF
03245 > GPS failure from external (>GPS Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO
failure) face (Port D+E) OFF
03247 GPS: local pulse loss (GPS loss) Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
face (Port D+E) OFF
03248 GPS: Prot Int 1 is GPS sychronized Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI 1 GPS sync.) face (Port D+E) OFF
03249 GPS: Prot Int 2 is GPS sychronized Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI 2 GPS sync.) face (Port D+E) OFF
03254 Prot.1: Delay time change recognized Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI1 jump) face (Port D+E) OFF
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03255 Prot.2: Delay time change recognized Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI2 jump) face (Port D+E) OFF
03457 System operates in a closed Ringto- Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO 93 141 1 GI
pology (Ringtopology) logy OFF
03458 System operates in a open Chaintopo- Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO 93 142 1 GI
logy (Chaintopology) logy OFF
03475 Relay 1 in Logout state (Rel1Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 143 1 GI
logy OFF
03476 Relay 2 in Logout state (Rel2Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 144 1 GI
logy OFF
03477 Relay 3 in Logout state (Rel3Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 145 1 GI
logy OFF
03478 Relay 4 in Logout state (Rel4Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 146 1 GI
logy OFF
03479 Relay 5 in Logout state (Rel5Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 147 1 GI
logy OFF
03480 Relay 6 in Logout state (Rel6Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 148 1 GI
logy OFF
03484 Local activation of Logout state Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 149 1 GI
(Logout) logy OFF
03487 Equal IDs in constellation (Equal IDs) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
03491 Relay 1 in Login state (Rel1 Login) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
03492 Relay 2 in Login state (Rel2 Login) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
03493 Relay 3 in Login state (Rel3 Login) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
03494 Relay 4 in Login state (Rel4 Login) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
03495 Relay 5 in Login state (Rel5 Login) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03496 Relay 6 in Login state (Rel6 Login) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
03517 I.Trip: General TRIP (ITrp. Gen. TRIP) Intertrip OUT * ON M LED BO
OFF
03521 I.Trip: TRIP L123 (ITrp.TRIP L123) Intertrip OUT * ON M LED BO 93 153 2 GI
OFF
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03522 I.Trip: TRIP 1pole (Diff TRIP 1pole) Intertrip OUT * ON LED BO
OFF
03523 I.Trip: TRIP 3pole (Diff TRIP 3pole) Intertrip OUT * ON LED BO
OFF
03528 Differential blocking sending via PI1 Differential Pro- OUT ON * LED BO
(Diffblk.sen PI1) tection OFF
03529 Differential blocking sending via PI2 Differential Pro- OUT ON * LED BO
(Diffblk.sen PI2) tection OFF
03545 Remote Trip 1 received (RemoteTrip1 Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 154 1 GI
rec) off
03546 Remote Trip 2 received (RemoteTrip2 Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 155 1 GI
rec) off
03547 Remote Trip 3 received (RemoteTrip3 Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 156 1 GI
rec) off
03548 Remote Trip 4 received (RemoteTrip4 Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 157 1 GI
rec) off
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03556 >Remote Signal 8 input (>Rem.Signal Remote Signals SP on * LED BI BO
8) off
03573 Remote signal 1 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 158 1 GI
1recv) off
03574 Remote signal 2 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 159 1 GI
2recv) off
03575 Remote signal 3 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 160 1 GI
3recv) off
03576 Remote signal 4 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 161 1 GI
4recv) off
03577 Remote signal 5 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 162 1 GI
5recv) off
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
03578 Remote signal 6 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 163 1 GI
6recv) off
03579 Remote signal 7 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 164 1 GI
7recv) off
03580 Remote signal 8 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 165 1 GI
8recv) off
03581 Remote signal 9 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 166 1 GI
9recv) off
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
04272 SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED (SOTF-O/C Instantaneous OUT ON ON LED BO 25 72 1 GI
BLOCK) HighSpeed SOTF OFF OFF
Overcurrent
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
04412 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase L1 DTT Direct SP ON * LED BI BO
(>DTT Trip L1) Transfer Trip OFF
04417 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT 3ph L123 DTT Direct SP ON * LED BI BO
(>DTT Trip L123) Transfer Trip OFF
04421 Direct Transfer Trip is switched OFF DTT Direct OUT ON * LED BO 51 21 1 GI
(DTT OFF) Transfer Trip OFF
04432 DTT TRIP command - Only L1 (DTT DTT Direct OUT * ON LED BO 51 32 2
TRIP 1p. L1) Transfer Trip
04433 DTT TRIP command - Only L2 (DTT DTT Direct OUT * ON LED BO 51 33 2
TRIP 1p. L2) Transfer Trip
04434 DTT TRIP command - Only L3 (DTT DTT Direct OUT * ON LED BO 51 34 2
TRIP 1p. L3) Transfer Trip
04435 DTT TRIP command L123 (DTT TRIP DTT Direct OUT * ON LED BO 51 35 2
L123) Transfer Trip
06861 Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC Trip Circuit OUT ON * LED BO 170 53 1 GI
OFF) Supervision OFF
06865 Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) Trip Circuit OUT ON * LED BO 170 55 1 GI
Supervision OFF
06866 TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set Trip Circuit OUT ON * LED BO
(TripC1 ProgFAIL) Supervision OFF
06867 TripC2 blocked: Binary input is not set Trip Circuit OUT ON * LED BO
(TripC2 ProgFAIL) Supervision OFF
06868 TripC3 blocked: Binary input is not set Trip Circuit OUT ON * LED BO
(TripC3 ProgFAIL) Supervision OFF
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
07105 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I> Backup overcur- SP ON * LED BI BO 64 5 1 GI
(>BLOCK O/C I>) rent OFF
07151 Backup O/C is switched OFF (O/C Backup overcur- OUT ON * LED BO 64 51 1 GI
OFF) rent OFF
07153 Backup O/C is ACTIVE (O/C ACTIVE) Backup overcur- OUT * * LED BO 64 53 1 GI
rent
07161 Backup O/C PICKED UP (O/C PIK- Backup overcur- OUT * M LED BO 64 61 2 GI
KUP) rent OFF
07162 Backup O/C PICKUP L1 (O/C Pickup Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 62 2 GI
L1) rent
07163 Backup O/C PICKUP L2 (O/C Pickup Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 63 2 GI
L2) rent
07164 Backup O/C PICKUP L3 (O/C Pickup Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 64 2 GI
L3) rent
07165 Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH (O/C Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 65 2 GI
Pickup E) rent
07191 Backup O/C Pickup I>> (O/C PICKUP Backup overcur- OUT * ON M LED BO 64 91 2 GI
I>>) rent
07192 Backup O/C Pickup I> (O/C PICKUP Backup overcur- OUT * ON M LED BO 64 92 2 GI
I>) rent
07193 Backup O/C Pickup Ip (O/C PICKUP Backup overcur- OUT * ON M LED BO 64 93 2 GI
Ip) rent
07201 O/C I-STUB Pickup (I-STUB PICKUP) Backup overcur- OUT * ON M LED BO 64 101 2 GI
rent OFF
07211 Backup O/C General TRIP command Backup overcur- OUT * * LED BO 64 111 2
(O/C TRIP) rent
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
07212 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1 (O/C Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 112 2
TRIP 1p.L1) rent
07213 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L2 (O/C Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 113 2
TRIP 1p.L2) rent
07214 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L3 (O/C Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 114 2
TRIP 1p.L3) rent
07215 Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123 (O/C Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 115 2
TRIP L123) rent
07221 Backup O/C TRIP I>> (O/C TRIP I>>) Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 121 2
rent
07222 Backup O/C TRIP I> (O/C TRIP I>) Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 122 2
rent
07223 Backup O/C TRIP Ip (O/C TRIP Ip) Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 123 2
rent
07235 O/C I-STUB TRIP (I-STUB TRIP) Backup overcur- OUT * ON LED BO 64 135 2
rent
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L2 (CB1tst Testing - *
L2)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00601 I L1 (IL1 =) Measurement 192 148 comp 9 1 CFC
00801 Temperat. rise for warning and trip (Q /Qtrip =) Measurement CFC
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00803 Temperature rise for phase L2 (Q /QtripL2=) Measurement CFC
07742 IDiffL1(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL1=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 1 CFC
Restraint Current
07743 IDiffL2(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL2=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 2 CFC
Restraint Current
07744 IDiffL3(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL3=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 3 CFC
Restraint Current
07745 IRestL1(% Operational nominal current) (IRestL1=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 4 CFC
Restraint Current
07746 IRestL2(% Operational nominal current) (IRestL2=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 5 CFC
Restraint Current
07747 IRestL3(% Operational nominal current) (IRestL3=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 6 CFC
Restraint Current
07751 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay (PI1 TD) Statistics 134 122 priv 9 7 CFC
07752 Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay (PI2 TD) Statistics 134 122 priv 9 9 CFC
07754 Prot.Interface 1: Availability per hour (PI1A/h) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 3 CFC
07756 Prot.Interface 2: Availability per hour (PI2A/h) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 6 CFC
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
07764 IL2(% of Operational nominal current) (IL2_opN=) Measurements CFC
from relay 1
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
07801 Relay ID of 3. relay (Relay ID) Measurements CFC
from relay 3
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
07832 Angle UL2_rem <-> UL2_loc (FU L2=) Measurements CFC
from relay 4
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
07869 UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) (UL1_opN=) Measurements CFC
from relay 6
07875 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay rec. (PI1 TD R) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 1 CFC
07876 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay send (PI1 TD S) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 2 CFC
07877 Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay rec. (PI2 TD R) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 4 CFC
07878 Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay send (PI2 TD S) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 5 CFC
A Check
Binary inputs and outputs 227
Accessories 288 Current transformer connections 239
Accuracy limit factor 19 Differential protection communication 220
Acknowledgement of commands 190 Optical fibres 220
Action times (of AR) 91 Power plant connections 221
Adaptive dead time (AR) 98 Protection data topology 229
Additional support ii System (SCADA) interface 225
Alternating voltage (power supply) 253 Time synchronization 224
Ambient temperatures 261 Voltage transformer connections 238
Applicability of manual i Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 70, 93, 120, 122,
Applications 5 130, 132, 145, 156, 165
AR = automatic reclosure 89 Circuit breaker failure protection 9, 120, 274
Automatic reclosure 8, 14, 89, 273 Circuit breaker position 155
Auxiliary contacts of the CB 70, 93, 120, 122, 130, Circuit breaker status 27
132, 145, 156, 165 Circuit breaker switch-in recognition 154
Availability of transmission (differential protection) Circuit breaker test 19, 165, 248
174, 176, 279 Climatic tests 261
Close command duration 19
Close command transmission 99
B Command acknowledgement 190
Command duration 19
Back-up overcurrent protection 74 Command processing 185
Battery 279, 289 Command sequence 186
Binary inputs 3, 253 Command types 185
Binary outputs 3, 254 Commissioning mode 56
Block data transmission 224 Commissioning tools 168
Breaker failure protection 9, 120, 274 Common phase initiation (breaker failure) 123
Broken-wire monitoring 144 Communication
Buffer battery 279, 289 Differential protection 51
Communication converter 288
Communication interfaces 254
C Communication topology (differential protection) 51
Configuration 12
Caution (definition) ii Scope of functions 12
CFC 9, 280, 290, 310 Conformity i
Changeover of setting groups 199 Connection examples 303
Charge comparison 39 Construction 262
Control and numeric keys 4
Copyright ii
Cubicle mounting 196
Current balance supervision 143
Current comparison 32
Current connections 18, 198, 303
L Pickup
Differential protection 41
LCD 4 Entire device 158
LED 4 Time overcurrent protection 79
Local trip 65, 265 Pickup characteristic (differential protection) 39
Lock-out 162 Plug-in connectors 289
Log out device 56 Polarity of current transformers 17
Pole discrepancy supervision 131, 134, 274
Power supply 4, 252
M Power system data 2 25
Power transformer with voltage regulation 21
Measured value synchronization (differential protec- Power transformer within the protected zone 21, 25,
tion) 34 37, 176
Measured values 174, 278 Preset configurations 307
Remote 176 Processing of commands 185
Measured voltages 3 Processing of messages 170
Measurement during operation 174 Protection data interface 4, 51, 267
Mechanical tests 260 Protection data topology 51
Monitoring functions 9 Protection data topology (differential protection) 229
Monitoring protection data 55 Protection data transmission 33
Mounting brackets 196, 289 Protocol dependent functions 311
Multiple auto-reclosure 96
Q
N
Qualified personnel (definition) iii
No trip no flag 164
Note (definition) ii
R
O Rack mounting 196
Rated quantities of current transformers 17
Operating interface 4, 254 Rated value settings
Operating messages 172 Current transformers 17
Operating Mode 56 Frequency 19
Operating software DIGSI 290 Power transformers 25
Operational accuracy limit factor 19 Protected lines 25
Ordering code 286 Voltage transformers 17
Ordering information 286 Reassembling the device 217
Ordering number 286 Reclaim time (of AR) 92
Oscillographic fault records 177 Reclosure interlocking 162
Overcurrent protection 8, 74, 268 Remote closing 99
Overload protection 9, 137, 275 Remote measured values 176
Remote tripping 8, 47, 67, 130, 265
Restraint
P Differential protection 35
Inrush 37
Panel flush mounting 194
Panel surface mounting 198
Parameter names iii
Parameter options iii
S
Phase segregated initiation (breaker failure) 125 SCADA interface 4, 255
Scope of functions 12
To From
Siemens AG Name:
Dept. PTD PA D DM
D–13623 Berlin Company/Dept.:
Germany
Address:
Dear reader,
printing errors can never be entirely eliminated:
therefore, should you come across any when read- Phone no.: Fax no.:
ing this manual, kindly enter them in this form to-
gether with any comments or suggestions for im-
provement that you may have.
Corrections/Suggestions
7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–4
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use
or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden with-
out express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of
Subject to technical alteration a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.